Home

User Manual: Hand-held Analyzer Types 2250 and

1. Table A 4 Measurement Control parameters for BZ 7222 to BZ 7225 Parameter Values Comment Measurement Mode Manual Determines whether the measurement is under Manual control fully controlled by the Reset and Start Pause Automatic pushbuttons or Automatic control start of measurement controlled by the Reset and Start Pause pushbuttons end of measurement automatically controlled by the analyzer when preset time has elapsed Preset Time 00 00 01 to Fixes the duration of ameasurement from start to automatic 24 00 00 stop in hours minutes and seconds Any pauses made during the measurement via the Start Pause pushbutton are not counted in the preset time Save Project Data at 00 00 00 to Determines the time for automatic save of the project and 23 59 59 start of a new project Continuous Logging On Determines whether the logging will run continuously or for a time set by Preset Logging Time Off Preset Logging Time 0 00 00 01 to Fixes the duration of ameasurement from start to automatic 31 00 00 00 stop in days hours minutes and seconds Logging Period 00 00 01 to Sets the period of the logging in hours minutes and 24 00 00 seconds Report Period 00 01 00 to Sets the period of the reports in hours and minutes 24 00 00 Full Spectral Stat for Yes Determines whether the full spectral statistics are logged in Reports the report or not No Available for microphone input only APPENDIX A
2. F Requires license for Signal Recording Option BZ 7226 For Logging BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging BZ 7225 templates only For En anced Logging BZ 7225 templates only APPENDIX A Setup Parameters A 14 Output Socket Signal Table A 14 Output Socket Signal parameters Parameter Values Comment Source Microphone Output to the Output socket on the connector panel Select between Offand the input signal for monitoring Off purposes f The L4Fsetting will output the X weighted sound level Input X weighted as a voltage between 0 V and 4 V Use DC Voltageto Input C weighted calibrate the connected equipment by setting the DC Output Input Z weighted Use Generatorto output the signal specified by the Generator settings LXF i Y Hint If you do not want to output the signal then DC Voltage select Offto economise the power e z Gen rat r Please note Accelerometer and Direct Off Input Linear e X frequency weighting A or B A requires that Broadband excl Peak is set to AC or AZ B requires that the Broadband excl Peak parameter is set to BC or BZ e The Generator setting is only available for Frequency Analysis templates DC Output 20 mV dB 0 0 to 200 0 dB Source DC Voltage will output 0 V for DC Output 0 dB and 4 V for DC Output 200 dB Output Gain Input 60 0 dB to 60 0 dB Output gain of the input signal Key in a gain value 0 1 dB resolution for the i
3. 14 54 51 To choose labels other than Ch 1 and Ch 2 e g Jn for Ch 1 and Out for Ch 2 tap the Label parameter and enter the new label 16 1 Range Setting Please note Pressing before a measurement institutes Auto Range which automatically selects High Range or Low Range as appropriate Type 2270 hardware can be utilised in two ways 1 As a single channel single range sound level meter and frequency analyzer like Type 2250 Only one channel can be measured at a time The input is selectable between the two physical channels in the user interface The full level measuring range is covered in a single range without a level range control 2 As a dual channel multi range sound level meter and frequency analyzer Both channels can be measured simultaneously The full level measuring range is covered in two ranges with a level range control These ranges are called High Range for the least sensitive range with 0 dB gain which allows the highest possible input Low Range for the most sensitive range with 30 dB gain To set the range settings for 2 channel measurements tap Main Menu gt Setup gt Input gt Range and select the appropriate range Fig 16 2 CHAPTER 16 2 channel Option BZ 7229 Fig 16 2 Range setting Input Input I Trigger Input None Channels Ch 1 Ch 2 Label Ch 1 Ch 2 Input Top Top Transducer 4189 123 4964 234 Snd Fld Corr Free Free Wind S Auto On On Non
4. Fig 8 6 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Overview of Multi user Facility Instrument e Transducer Calibration History Calibration Setup o User 1 q User N Preferences Preferences Template Template Display Param Display Param Setup Setup ee ee oe Project Project Template Template Meas Data Meas Data Annotations Annotations E J 040105 Tap Users and Projects or the plus icon then select Enabled The analyzer when delivered has one default user called 2250 for Type 2250 or 2270 for Type 2270 Measurement Partner Suite BZ 5503 included with the analyzer is required to set up new users on the analyzer see section 7 1 Project Naming Conventions Each time you save the results of a measurement the analyzer suggests a project name and number for the project The Project Name Prefix can be generated automatically from the start date of the project as Year Month Date in the format YYMMDD for example 051112 as 2005 NOVEMBER 12th or you can specify a Project Name Prefix max eight characters using the standard full character keyboard that pops up when you tap the current name set as the Project Name Prefix Fig 8 7 The
5. c cccccceecessssteeeeeeesesssaeeeeees NOISE CUIVEs na a hei eh Noise Dose Dose Dose S5 IN To Est m ale 6 10 oe Noise Parameters ccsccccceeesessseeeeeeeessneeeeeees Adding on Profiles 0 0 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeee Adding to Current Measurement ze Notes Screefi chinna a en Notifications iienaa ia RE Content NR Decisive Band Parameter ccccccceessseeees DOTINITION oe a E EEEE EA TT 328 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual NR Parameter ccccccccccccsssseeeeeesessssaeeeeeeeeees D finitions innia Win neti teal eens Number Keyboard 0 eee eececeeeeeeseneeeseeseeeeeaees Number of Decimal Places p4 Number of Peaks CPeaks gt 140 dB eee 33 O Occupational Health Parameters Occupational Health Standards H On screen Feedback ccccccccceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee Ordering Information c ccsceeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees Organising Measurements Outdoor Colour Scheme Outdoor Microphone Kit Output of Headphone Socket Output Socket cceee Output Socket Signal Parameters Overload CoM nn nan an a te 42 Overload Parameter cccccccssceceesseeeeeseeeesseeeeeees 236 Overview OP Smileys sre ta A Seis eae aranica iii 121 of Type 2250 2270 Microphones 290 Overview Tab in Reverberation Time Software 159 Overwriting a Locked Template s 48 P Padlock ICON iinei 47 Pa
6. 33 265 268 271 INSTANTANEOUS c cc ecceeeceessteeeeeeessseneeeeees 33 272 Weather Station MM 0256 ccsessceeseeesteeeteeeees 97 Weather Station MM 0316 cceseeeeeeseeeeteeeeees 97 Weather Stations GOnN CtON aaa etn Be eee 97 VV DOS etek AREA ATA DA EE E ss 97 Web Page for Veiwing and Control eeeees 76 Welmers iea a a ra a a liia 1 Whatis a Project Template ccceeeeeeeeeteeeeees 20 What is the Hand held Analyzer esee 32 WSF PAAA AA ceed A EE E AEE E 41 Parameters eiieeii onaran i teenies ininda o nuai 92 Wi Fi COnnection s nessnasenaneennnssnensnanennnnnsennseenneenne 90 Wind Parameters ecccvcse ete niisiis 97 Windscreen Mounting occ ee eee eee eee cess eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeae Windscreen Fitted Icon Windscreen Fitted Diffuse Field Icon ceee 42 Wired Connection cccccccssssccssssecssssessssseesseees 90 Wireless LAN Connection2 c c6ein See ee 89 WILAN cnccs aware etn ata aia aoit 89 Wrist Strap Mounting Thread cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 6 X XL View Z INDEX 333 334 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual a om l mM d d w a www bksv com Brtiel amp Kj r All rights reserved
7. From the D Link Corporation declaration of conformance for Wireless N 150 Micro USB Adaptor DWA 121 Appendix A Setup Parameters This appendix describes all the setup parameters included in a template For 2 channel setup some parameters are doubled one for Ch 1 and one for Ch 2 2270 only 223 224 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual A 1 Input Table A 1 Input parameters Parameter Values Comment Input Channel Ch 1 Determines whether Input Ch 1 orInput Ch 2 is used forthe measurement Ch 2 Available in Type 2270 1 channel templates only Loudness Free field Determines whether Loudness and Loudness Level are calculated based on Free field or Diffuse field conditions Diffuse field Set to Autoto follow the setting of Sound Field Correction For an unknown microphone type you can set Loudness to Auto the condition matching your request Available for microphone input only Trigger Input None This parameter should be set to match the equipment connected to the Trigger Input socket on the connector MATRON panel of the analyzer Handswitch Set it to None if not used Voltage Level Set Trigger Input to MATRON Handswitchif the analyzer is Voltage for being used in the MATRON system This setting should also Monitoring be used if you want to use the Handswitch ZH 0680 for manually triggering signal recordings Please note This can only be used together with analyzers with serial n
8. H L dnessL vel siin ste acne ccccentarae 119 315 Loudness Parameter ccseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaee 224 Loudspeaker ICON cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeee 26 156 Low Frequency 264 268 270 272 Low Frequency Option BZ 7234 seses 193 Low Frequency Range c cece eeeeeseeeneeeneees 173 Low frequency eee eeeeeeeeees EEE E Lweglf1 f2 ssssssssisssssrissssssissssniresnnrinssnnrsssnnnne LWUN1 Parameter LWUN7 Parameter Lyeq f1 f2 ates LXN1 Parameter LXN7 Parameter in LXUN1 Parameter c cccccccccssssceeeeescsssstteeeeeeeeees Main Menu ICON cccccccceeeeeessseeeeeeeesssseeeeeeeess Main Spectrum Icon Mains Power Supply cecceeceeceeseeteeseeeeeeeeeeeees Making your First Measurement 0e eee eee 19 Manual Calibration cccccccccsscccssseceessseeeesseeeeseees Manual Evente icin wen ieee Manual Event Marker a Manual Event Pushbutton sesseesesesesseesrreernenns Manual Ext Power Switch c ccccscccessseeeessseeeeeees Map Based Measurement Parameter ni Maps in Reverberation Time Software 0065 Markers ccecseeeeeeeeeeeeees 125 130 131 239 247 Editing sc iscttectessicvsecsetocetvisshveconecautteadesaetrastasioteet Evente ee neniiga Exclude Level Event Sound ae Use of PUSNDUTtONS 0 ccceeeeeeeteetetteeeteenees 131 With Types 78
9. In addition to measuring broadband parameters see Chapter 3 and spectra see Chapter 10 it simultaneously logs the following parameters see Chapter 11 e Broadband parameters including broadband statistics e Broadband parameters every 100 ms e Spectra including spectral statistics e Record the measured signal Finally the Enhanced Logging module can also log with a different period periodic reports for example every hour for reporting e Broadband parameters including broadband statistics e Spectra including spectral statistics The Enhanced Logging module can measure continuously limited only by data memory and power supply An overview showing the options available during a typical enhanced logging task has been provided in Table 12 1 Requires Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 t Requires Signal Recording Option BZ 7226 135 136 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Table 12 1 Overview of options available during a typical enhanced logging task Selection Period Broadband Broadband Spectral Spectral S Parameters Statistics Parameters Statistics Logged 1s 24h 1 to 10 None 0 3 None or All 45 or Full or All 5 or Full Logged 100 ms None Laeg Lar None None None 100 ms and or Las available available available Periodic 1m 24h All 53 Full All 5 None Reports or Full Total Elapsed All 67 Full All 5 Full Time Check the About sc
10. No Leg parameter logged Select a Leg spectrum for logging Sound Field Mismatch for Loudness Set the Loudness parameter in Input in accordance with the Sound Field Correction Frequency bands outside Noise Curves Levels are lower or higher than any noise curve band Noise Curves require use of Mic Select a microphone Display Noise Curve with Lzeq Noise parameters are calculated but Noise Curves can only be displayed together with Lzeq Noise Curve for 1 1 octaves only Noise parameters are calculated but Noise Curves can only be displayed for 1 1 octaves 10 4 Measurements are saved and can be viewed later in the same way as described for the Sound Saving Results Level Meter project in Chapter 3 121 122 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Chapter 11 Logging Optional Module Logging Software BZ 7224 enables you to measure and save data periodically on SD or CF cards You can also save to a USB memory stick with G4 analyzers The module is optimized for attended use which means that while measuring you can annotate any sound online as well as mark up to five different sound categories online The main benefit is that data is documented on site and is therefore ready for post processing and reporting back at the office using Measurement Partner Suite BZ 5503 or other post processing software such as Evaluator Type 7820 Protector Type 7825 or Microso
11. ccccsssccccecsessssscecececeessaesecececseseeaseeseescesesaeseescsseeseeasanees 34 Enhanced Logging Software Module BZ 7225 cccscccccccsssessseesecececseseseeeeecessesseaecesceesesseaeees 34 Signal Recording Option BZ 7226 c ccccccccssssssccccecsesesssseceecseseeaeseeccscsesesaesesceeseesaeseeseeeseaees 34 Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 ecsccccccssececsenceceeseeceeeaueeecseaaeceeseeeeceueeeseeaaeeeeseeeeesees 35 2 channel Option BZ 7229 Type 2270 Only ccccccccsssececsssceceescecessaececsssseecsseseceesaeeeesssaeees 35 Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 cccccccccccessesececececececeeececeeeeeeeseeeeeseseseseseseseseseseseeseeaeaegea 35 LOW Frequency Option BZ 7234 ccccssssscssscecececeneneseececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeseeeeesesesses 35 4 3 BUuilt 1h Hel Bic tose wees cece teeen tee eu en decned Cocees estee tunes SdcsudaSnedeviecs videSnen ed AEE NE ae rii E E EEA 36 Software and Hardware Versions cccscccesssececessececeeeececseececeeeeeecesaeceseeeeecseneeeceeaeeeseeneees 36 4 4 What is Measurement Partner Suite BZ 5503 oo cccsscceceessececseeeeceseececeeaeeeceeneecssaeeeseeaaes 36 4 5 Basic Principles when using the AnalyZer ccccccccssssecccccecsssscecceeceeseeeceseeeceseeaseeseesceeseneaeees Navigation Principles Star Navigation Concept cccccssssesecececsesseeseeecessesseaeeeeeseseeeeaeees THEUDIs play SEreem oti sicwwvovecsss oeshevede case sdedtn
12. 13 1 3 Playing the Recording Signal recordings are attached to the measurement project as annotations The annotations icon is displayed in the Status Field to indicate this Tap the paperclip to open the list of annotations Tap the annotation to play it back details in 3 and 6 144 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 13 2 Logging and Enhanced Logging Software You can use Signal Recording together with the Logging and Enhanced Logging Software You can record the sound for the whole measurement period or you can record sound for controlled parts of the measurement The recordings are attached to the profile as sound markers The signal recordings can be controlled by the Manual Event pushbutton the Back erase pushbutton an external trigger signal or by the level of the measured signal You can also control the signal recording using the stylus to mark the interesting part on the profile Please note e Signal recordings can only be done during measurements Signal recordings can only be done on projects saved on memory cards or with G4 analyzers from a USB memory stick 13 2 1 Setting up the Analyzer 1 Select a Logging Logging SLM or Enhanced Logging Project Template see section 3 2 1 for more details on templates 2 Depending on your memory device Insert an SD memory card in a SD card slot at the bottom of the analyzer Ifyou have G1 3 analyzers you can insert a CF memory card in
13. Fig 14 5 Selecting the bands for serial measurements Left Selecting the cad band for serial 0 100 Hz 0 28 s measurement 3 100Hz 0 26s Right The arrow is pointing to the s symbol which indicates the selected frequency band RBERATION TIN T30 T30 Pos wht tual 00 250 ik k k 100 T20 400 Hz 1 25 kHz 0 27 s T20 Pos 400 Hz 1 25 kHz 0 27 s e 4 0 27 S T20 Pos 400 Hz 1 25 kHz 0 27 s Please note A small s appears above the selected frequency bands Fig 14 5 3 When you have selected the frequency bands you want to re measure press the Start Pause pushbutton The analyzer will then start at the lowest selected frequency band generate noise at this band make the measurement and automatically step to the next selected band This will continue until all selected bands have been measured 4 Press the Save amp pushbutton to save and merge the bands with the measurement you have already done be sure to select the right position before saving Combine Parallel and Serial Measurements in an Automated Sequence You can speed up the measurement process if you start by investigating whether you need to use serial measurements at certain frequency bands or not If you need to measure some bands serially Main Menu gt Setup gt Measurement Control gt Measurement Mode and select Combined Then select the bands you want to measure serially see above Press the Start Pause p
14. Trigger Level Decay Time 1s lt gt le Impulse measurement 5i 060209 Fig 14 4 shows a typical RT measurement cycle performed by the analyzer where the different steps are described as follows 1 After Start the analyzer waits for the level to exceed the Trigger Level indicated on the analyzer in three places by the traffic light giving a short green flash every second 2 The impulse excitation is made for example a pistol is fired or a balloon is burst CHAPTER 14 Reverberation Time Software Optional Module Caution The use of hearing protection is highly recommended 14 2 3 The impulse measurement is started 1 s before the level exceeds the Trigger Level 4 The impulse measurement stops after the analyzer detects the background noise level again automatically measured by the analyzer 5 The analyzer performs backward integration of the impulse measurement 6 The reverberation time spectra EDT T20 and T30 are calculated and displayed on the screen The measurement can be in octaves or 1 3 octaves in parallel over a selectable frequency range In each frequency band the decay is sampled 200 times each second The impulse response is backward integrated according to the Schroeder method In theory the resulting decay will be equivalent to the average of a large number of decays made with the interrupted noise method Therefore the decays will be smooth
15. When the same type of transducers are used by both channels for example two microphones or two accelerometers or if you only display data from one channel then the spectrum display is the standard spectrum display Fig 16 7 Fig 16 7 Single channel spectrum 63 25 CHAPTER 16 2 channel Option BZ 7229 189 When the transducers at the two channels are of different types for example a microphone and an accelerometer the scaling of the two spectra can be set individually for easy comparison Ch 1 will use the standard Y axis at the left of the spectrum and Ch 2 will have its own Y axis to the right of the spectrum instead of the broadband values Tapping on the Ch 2 Y axis reveals the same possibilities for zooming and scaling the spectrum as for Ch 1 See examples in Fig 16 8 Fig 16 8 Displaying the results with different scaling for each channel UU d l l Ch 1 LAeq 160 Hz Ch 1 LAeq 160 Hz 48 1 dB Ch 1 LAeq Ch 2 Linear aha 160 Hz 0 Ch 2 Linear aa 160Hz 10 2 m s Ch 2 Linear 65 140 65 10 65 45 45 l 560m 45 7 pea Oo 25 aipjl _ _ 32m E Scale Do e al Te ll ee ea ART cise k 4k 20k MMO 12 5 63 cu2 9M 12 5 63 250 ik 250 ik amp 20k 250 ik l O i i Hd Mal i 12 5 63 16 3 3 Saving Results Measurements are saved and can be opened later in the same way as described for the Sound Level Meter project in Chapter 3 16 4 Setting Up 2 channel Logging and En
16. cee cece ees eceseeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeaes 203 U UA 0587 UA 0801 UA 1317 UA 1404 UA 1650 Update or Upgrade 0 eee eeneeeeeeeneeeeeenaes Updating Applications Upgrading Applications eee eee eeeeeeees 103 Upload to MP Cloud 2 0 eeeeceeeereeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaee 67 US Occupational Health Parameters 263 267 269 USB Conne ctiGn iriri aea erea 69 USB Intettace tc sie eee AE 6 9 USB Stick Troubleshooting scccscccesestesteeeserseseteseeoee 106 USB Type A uu ceceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeateneeeaeeaes 88 SOCKGt 6 92 Oa ate ee ee ote es 9 Use of Navigation PUSNDUtIONS ceeeeeeeeetteeeeteeees 44 Pushbuttons for Controlling Measurements 43 Users and Projects zi Users and Projects Parameter ccceeseteeeeees 83 V MOrSIONS danan Se ee erases Vibration Calibration ccccccccccssseceesssecesssseeeesseees View and Control Instrument Web Page VieW Arei annin i a i iea View Instrument Web Page ssssesseserrrerereerernree Viewing Annotations siveseei sisi eset innne i iniaiaiai in Data irsana tene ia Saved Measurement Viewing Data esseseeeeeseereesinerensinerinrinerrerinereerrerrnet NIOWS heinn i a e aariaa aA Voltage n MPSO6 47 trha n en e aa W Warim Staltre o 23 3 chi Nk aa lees 20 WY Sather as scicacec deni sssscicthdsvacedesasccsancvs dove sal sa Seakan i Scns oe 97 Weather Data
17. ANALYZER COMPONENTS ZG 0444 Charger for QB 0061 Battery Pack Calibration Type 4231 Sound Calibrator fits in KE 0440 Type 4226 Multifunction Acoustic Calibrator Type 4228 Pistonphone Type 4294 Calibration Exciter Type 4194 002 Calibration Exciter for Type 8344 MEASURING Type 3535 A All weather Case see Product Data BP 2251 Type 4964 Low Frequency Microphone Type 8344 Low Level Accelerometer AO 0440 D 015 AO 0646 AO 0697 D 030 AO 0697 D 100 AO 0701 D 030 AO 0702 D 030 AO 0722 D 050 AO 0726 D 030 AO 0727 D 010 AO 0727 D 015 JP 1041 UA 0587 UA 0801 UA 1317 UA 1404 UA 1672 UC 0211 UL 1009 UL 1013 UL 1017 Signal Cable LEMO to BNC Male 1 5 m 5 ft Sound Cable LEMO to Minijack 1 5 m 5 ft Microphone Extension Cable 10 pin LEMO 3 m 10 ft Microphone Extension Cable 10 pin LEMO 10 m 33 ft Accelerometer Cable LEMO to M3 3 m 10 ft Accelerometer Cable LEMO to 10 32 UNF 3 m 10 ft Accelerometer cable LEMO to MIL C 5015 5 m 16 ft Signal Cable LEMO to SMB for Tacho Probe MM 0360 3 m 10 ft Signal Cable LEMO to BNC Female 1 m 3 3 ft Signal cable LEMO to BNC Female 1 5 m 5 ft Dual 10 pole Adaptor Tripod Small Tripod Microphone Holder Outdoor Microphone Kit AutoDetect Insert for UA 1650 Low Frequency Adaptor SD Memory Card for Hand held Analyzers CF Memory Card for Hand held Analyzers for hardware versions 1 3
18. CEB OX The CE marking is the manufacturer s declaration that the product meets the requirements of the applicable EU directives RCM mark indicates compliance with applicable ACMA technical standards that is for telecommunications radio communications EMC and EME China RoHS mark indicates compliance with administrative measures on the control of pollution caused by electronic information products according to the Ministry of Information Industries of the People s Republic of China WEEE mark indicates compliance with the EU WEEE Directive Safety EN IEC 61010 1 ANSI UL 61010 1 and CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use EMC Emission EN IEC 61000 6 3 Generic emission standard for residential commercial and light industrial environments EN IEC 61326 Electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use EMC requirements CISPR 22 Radio disturbance characteristics of information technology equipment Class B Limits IEC 61672 1 IEC 61260 IEC 60651 and IEC 60804 Instrumentation standards Note The above is only guaranteed using accessories listed in this Product Data EMC Immunity EN IEC 61000 6 2 Generic standard Immunity for industrial environments EN IEC 61326 Electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use EMC requirements IEC 61672 1 IEC 61260 IEC 60651 and IEC 60804 Instrumentati
19. A 17 Generator eesse A 18 Post processing A 19 TONE ASSESSMEN tena E E E E a a a E E E APPENDIX B Measurement Parameters sscssscsssccscccsccnsscnsccessccsscssccnssonsenescesscsssesecessenssonsssessnessosssones 261 B 1 Total Measurement Microphone INput ccccccccccessscecssssececsssseceesseccsessececseseceeseeeeesseeees 262 For Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 Logging Software BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 262 B 2 Periodic Reports Microphone Input ccccccccssscccssssecessececeessesecsesaecesssseceesseseceesaeeecsseess 266 For Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 c cccccccsssssssccccecsesessscececcsesesaeseescecesasaeseeseeeseneaeees 266 B 3 Logged Measurement Microphone Input cccccsscccesssececssscceessececseseceeseseceeaeeeeessaeees 268 For Logging Software BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 268 B 4 Logged 100 ms Measurement Microphone Input cccccesccceesssccssscececsssceceesaeecesseeees 271 For Logging Software BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 271 B 5 Instantaneous Measured Parameters available at any time Microphone Input 272 Processed Parameters for Display Only Microphone Input cccccccsseceesssseceeseeeeesseees 273 B 6 Total Measurement Accelerometer and Direct Input ccccccccsssccssssececsssceceesseeecessaees 273 For Sound Level M
20. Fast min Slow min Logged Measurement Accelerometer or Direct input For Logging Software BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 Parameters measured within a logging interval up to five or all of the following parameters can be logged Linear Averaged Levels Linear Peak Levels e Peak Maximum Time weighted Levels e e Fast max Slow max Minimum Time weighted Levels Fast min Slow min General Parameters e e e Overload in Start time common to both channels in 2 channel templates Stop Time common to both channels in 2 channel templates Elapsed Time excl pauses common to both channels in 2 channel templates Special Parameters e Linear f1 f2 sum of power values for Linear frequency bands from f1 Hz to f2 Hz These parameters require a license for BZ 7223 and spectra measurement B 6 4 Measurement Parameters Low Frequency Parameters requires low frequency option BZ 7234 and accelerometer input aw aWoest MTW KBF max KBFry e Peaky Spectrum Parameters e Linear or aW requires low frequency option BZ 7234 and accelerometer input Fast max Slow max Fast min Slow min Logged 100 ms Measurement Accelerometer or Direct input For Logging Software BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging SoftwareBZ 7225 The following Broadband parameters can be logged every 100 ms e Linear e Fast Inst e Slow Inst Please note For 2 chann
21. G4 analyzers will automatically detect the security needed and prompt you fora password Please enter the password for the network If you already are connected to the network you can select to forget the network Available Networks Tap the line to get alist of available networks Tap a name in the list to connect to this network The name is inserted in the Name line above this line Each network name is preceded with Signal Strength information ranging from Excellent displayed as s downto Wo Signal displayed as no dots at all Security G1 3 Only Select the Security as required by the network Open Shared WPA PSKor WPA2 PSK Openand Shared are for Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP Infrastructure mode WPA PSK is for Wi Fi Protected Access WPA with Pre shared Key also called Personal mode WPA2 is an enhanced version of WPA Encryption G1 3 Only Select the Encryption as required by the network None WEP Enabled AES Enabled or TKIP Enabled Noneis for Open security WEP Enabledis for Open and Shared security AES and TKIP Enabled are for WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK security CHAPTER 8 93 Advanced Use of the Analyzer Tips and Tricks Encryption Key G1 3 Only Insert the Encryption Key required by the network The key will be displayed until you press Enter then it will be replaced by 8 4 Notifications The analyzer can send you a daily status or notify you if noise level exceeds a set thresho
22. Icons in the status field on the screen indicate whether the windscreen is detected or not For longer term outdoor measurements see Mounting the Outdoor Microphone Kit below Mounting the Analyzer onto the Tripod Extension Stem and Tripod To mount the analyzer onto the Tripod Extension Stem UA 1651 and Small Tripod UA 0801 1 Screw Tripod Extension Stem UA 1651 onto the threaded stud of the ball joint on Small Tripod UA 0801 Secure the ball joint roughly in a vertical position that is in line with the tripod until ready to follow the instruction in step 4 2 Screw the Extension Stem UA 1651 into the analyzer using the threaded socket at the lower back of the analyzer see item 18 in Fig 2 1 3 Set Small Tripod UA 0801 including the analyzer in the required position and adjust it to the required height Ensure that one of the three legs is pointing roughly in the same direction as your analyzer needs to point referred to as the front leg 4 Position the extension stem at an angle of 45 to the horizontal and vertically in line with the front leg of the tripod to ensure the whole setup is stable Please note The procedure is the same if Tripod UA 0587 is used instead of Small Tripod UA 0801 You are ready to start measuring see Chapter 3 16 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 2 5 3 Alternative Measurement Method Extended Microphone The measurement microphone can be placed a distance from the
23. Pa Preamplifier User 2250 Input Top Socket Calibration Type Manually adjusted Calibrator Comment 5 5 Transducer Database The specifications for Microphone Types 4189 and 4190 and Preamplifier ZC 0032 which come fitted in the top socket of the analyzer are described in a transducer database 1 To open the Transducer Database screen Fig 5 4 tap Main Menu gt Transducers Fig 5 4 TRANSDUCERS Transducer Database screen 56 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 2 To view the details in the database Fig 5 5 tap the transducer name number or tap Plus next to the name number Fig 5 5 Details in the Transducer Database TRANSDUCERS WK Top Socket 4189 1234567 A Serial No 1234567 Name 4189 Description Free field 1 2 Preamplifier ID No Microphone Type Nominal Sensitivity 50 0 mV Pa CCLD No Calibration History gt All the details for the currently selected microphone can be found in the database You can add other transducers by tapping on Add New Transducer selecting Microphone Accelerometer or Direct input from the drop down and filling in the details of your particular transducer parameters See section C 2 1 This is done by selecting the item from the drop down list that appears onsome parameter fields or by entering the data via the keyboard that appears on other parameter fields When adding a new microphone Type 4189 is the defau
24. The marker is displayed above the profile the cursors disappear and the profile unfreezes and progresses as it did before you tapped on the screen Please note If you select Sound Marker then the sound for this part will be recorded see Chapter 12 for details Marking Measurement While it is Paused The measurement parameter is displayed as a profile while the measurement is paused You can use the Stylus to Mark the Sound Categories Tap and hold the stylus in the profile display at the position where you want the marker to start This will display a cursor at the position of the stylus Then drag the stylus left or right to the position where you want the marker to end This will display a second cursor Next remove the stylus from the display and a drop down menu appears showing the five markers you have specified in the setup Select the marker you require The marker is displayed above the profile and the cursors disappear 11 3 3 Editing Markers on Profiles To widen a marker 1 Tap and hold the stylus on the profile display at a position within the marker range 2 Drag the stylus left or right to the position where you want the marker to end 3 Remove the stylus from the display and a drop down menu appears 4 Select the marker you want to widen from the drop down menu To narrow a marker 1 Tap and hold the stylus on the profile display at the position inside the marker range where you want it to stop 2 Drag the st
25. Using this software measurements on the analyzer can be controlled from your PC and displayed online using the same user interface on the PC as on the analyzer CHAPTER 7 71 Connection to PC or Smartphone or Measurement Partner Field App Data transferred to the PC are organized in Archives You can view the measurement data in the Archives 7 2 1 Connect to Your PC Connect the analyzer to your PC using one of the following e G1 3 analyzers The supplied Mini USB Cable AO 1476 A modem connection ALAN connection using a LAN cable Type 2270 only ALAN connection via CF card adaptor e G4 analyzers The supplied Micro USB Cable AO 1494 A modem connection ALAN connection The connection can be protected by requiring a login with user name and password see settings in section D 11 See Chapter 8 for descriptions on how to set up your preferences including PC connections 7 2 2 Post processing and Reporting Use the optional modules of the Measurement Partner Suite for data analysis and post processing For example data in the archives can be post processed directly in the Logging Post processing Tools BZ 5503 A module or Spectrum Post processing Tools BZ 5503 B module Furthermore data can be exported to various post processing tools like Evaluator Type 7820 for assessing environmental noise Protector Type 7825 for assessing workplace noise Qualifier Light Type 7831 for documenting reverberation t
26. bottom of the screen Tap the J icon to accept the changes and return to the previous screen The Image icon represents image annotations Tap the annotation name and select Openfrom the drop down that appears or tap the icon to open the Image viewer Tap J to return to the previous screen Select the Metadata tab to see all metadata attached to the project Fig 6 3 You can change the metadata just by tapping on them and entering new values You can also edit the settings for the metadata and reuse specific metadata on new projects by tapping on the Edit icon for the specific metadata further information in section 8 7 Fig 6 3 Example of metadata K Comment 1 21 05 2010 10 44 lt 1 Comment 2 21 05 2010 10 45 Note 1 21 05 2010 10 45 Note 2 21 05 2010 10 45 GQ Image 1 21 05 2010 10 45 KI Soundrec 1 21 05 2010 10 46 Annotations Metadata A 10 47 34 L Inserting Annotations Using Explorer In addition to inserting commentary text or image annotations on your current measurement see section 3 4 you can insert commentary text or image annotations on projects or jobs using Explorer Tap a job or project name and select Add note Add Comment or Add Image Type 2270 only from the drop down that appears 6 4 Measurement Partner Cloud MP Cloud is a service that allows you to securely upload projects including metadata to the cloud for storage sharing or transfer from the analyzer to PC Measurement
27. direct input up to 5 parameters Broadband Statistics Stored at each Logging Interval Full distribution or none sound input only Spectrum Data Stored at each Logging Interval All or up to three selectable spectra license for BZ 7223 required Spectral Statistics Stored at each Logging Interval Full distribution or none sound input only license for BZ 7223 required 209 210 Logging Time From 1 s to 31 days with 1 s resolution Measurement Total For the logging time in parallel with logging All broadband data statistics and spectra license for BZ 7223 required MARKERS One data exclusion marker and four user definable markers for on line marking of sound categories heard during the measurement Events can be set manually TRIGGERS Markers can be set and signal recordings can be started license for BZ 7226 required when a broadband level is above or below a specified level ANNOTATIONS On line annotations with spoken comments written notes or images Type 2270 only Calibration CHARGE INJECTION CALIBRATION CIC Injects an internally generated electrical signal in parallel with the microphone diaphragm A manual CIC can be performed whenever there is no measurement in progress Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual An automatic CIC can be performed at the start and end of a logging measurement Measurement Displays Profile Graphical display of selectable measurement data versus ti
28. e PCL Laser suitable for laser printers e Seiko DPU DPU S245 or DPU S445 mobile thermal printers from Seiko Instruments www seikoinstruments com PCL is the Printer Control Language developed by Hewlett Packard see www hp com For PCL printers you can use the Top and Left Margin parameters to position the print on the paper and use Width and Height parameters to set the size of the print Modem DynDNS Settings You can use the analyzer for monitoring in remote places and control it using Measurement Partner Suite BZ 5503 via a telephone connection wired or wireless using suitable modems or via network connections See the overview of possibilities in Table 7 1 When you connect via a modem or via a network connection you will see the contents of the analyzer in the Instrument Task as if you had made the connection via USB You then have the same possibilities for transferring data to the Archives and organising data on the analyzer as if you were connected via the USB connector The analyzer is connected directly to the Internet through a modem BZ 5503 or an Internet browser will then be able to connect to the analyzer through TCP IP using the analyzer s global IP address The setup of the modem connected to the analyzer is described in section 8 2 2 please refer to the BZ 5503 online help for details on how to make a connection CHAPTER 8 87 Advanced Use of the Analyzer Tips and Tricks 8 2 1 Connection t
29. 0 dB A notification is sent when the measured Ch 2 Leg for Level 2 Microphone input or Linear for Acceleration and Direct input for the latest Report Period exceeds the set Report Threshold Level 2 Only used in 2 ch Enhanced Logging Email To Character string The e mail address of the recipient of the e mail Example recipient gmail com SMTP Character string Name of SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Server Examples gmail smtp gmail com hotmail smtp live com SMTP Port Oto 65535 Port used by SMTP server Typically this is 25 but for Gmail Google Mail and Microsoft Hotmail it is 587 SSL TLS No Secure Socket Layer Transport Layer Security Yes Setto Yesif required by email provider otherwise Wo SSL TLS is required by Gmail and Hotmail Account Character string The Account is typically the email address used for sending the e mail Examples myaddress gmail com myaddress hotmail com Table D 10 Cont Notification settings Preferences Parameter Values Comment User Name Character string The User Nameis typically the email address used for sending the email Examples myaddress gmail com myaddress hotmail com If the email account is part of a domain then it might be necessary to specify the domain as part of the user name Example Domain UserName Password Character string Insert the password required for the account The password will be displa
30. 2 Controlling the Measurement The measurement is controlled in the same way you would control a normal Sound Level Meter measurement using Start Pause Continue 4 Back erase and Reset pushbuttons see Chapter 3 for more details If you have set the Charge Injection Calibration parameter to On then CIC is performed at the start of the measurement and at the end of the measurement An Exclude marker is set on the logging profile at the point where CIC is being performed The update of the Total parameters is stopped while CIC is being performed You can see the results of the CIC under Total parameters CIC Result 1 and CIC Result 2 11 2 1 Annotating a Project While using the logging software you can annotate measurements using the normal method of adding annotations to a project before or after a measurement or while the measurement is paused The annotations can then be viewed by tapping Paperclip or tapping Main Menu EJ gt Explorer from the list of options section 3 4 However if you choose to annotate the profile during the measurement the icon will appear below the profile not as an icon in the Status Field or attached to a project in Explorer as described previously In this case you view the annotation using the method described in section 11 3 1 11 2 2 Recording the Signal You can record the input signal during the measurement by pressing the Manual Event pushbutton Manual Event marker the Back erase pu
31. 24 bit for BZ 7222 23 24 25 30 33 only The signal recording can be controlled manually or by using an external trigger signal The recording can also be triggered when a measured parameter exceeds a preset level BZ 7224 and BZ 7225 only The recorded sound can be played back and listened to using the supplied Earphones HT 0015 Sound is recorded directly to a memory card With G4 analyzers sound can also be recorded to a USB memory stick The main benefit is that data is documented on site and is therefore ready for post processing and reporting back at the office using Measurement Partner Suite BZ 5503 or other post processing software such as Evaluator Type 7820 Protector Type 7825 or Microsoft Excel Check the About screen to see whether you have a license to run this module To access the About screen tap the Help icon gg then tap About See Chapter 9 for instructions on installing licenses 13 1 Sound Level Meter and Frequency Analysis Software You can use the Signal Recording facility together with the Sound Level Meter Software and the Frequency Analysis Software You can record the sound for the whole measurement period or you can record sound for controlled parts of the measurement The recordings are attached to the project as annotations named Soundrec N where N is the number of the recording for the project section 3 4 and section 6 3 2 for a description of how to use annotations Please note e Signal r
32. 5503 or an Internet browser using this IP address Normally when you browse to addresses using an Internet browser you do not use the IP address itself but a hostname for it for example you would use the hostname www google com instead of 74 125 77 99 This requires a DNS Domain Name System provider which is a kind of Internet phone book that translates hostnames to IP addresses for you CHAPTER 8 39 Advanced Use of the Analyzer Tips and Tricks However for a GPRS EDGE HSPA or even a DSL router often the global IP address is renewed at each new connection or at certain time intervals for example every two weeks In this case you will have to change the IP address in BZ 5503 or the Internet browser accordingly To avoid this a service like DDNS Dynamic Domain Name System can be used DDNS is a network service that provides the capability for a modem router computer system to notify a domain name system provider to change in real time ad hoc the active DNS configuration of its configured hostnames and IP addresses This will ensure that the hostname you use will always be updated to reflect the correct IP address The analyzer supports DDNS provided by the worldwide DDNS service provider DynDNS com The analyzer can then be configured to notify DynDNS com each time the global IP address is set or changed When BZ 5503 or an Internet browser connects to the analyzer it then uses a hostname defined by DynDNS com F
33. 6 dB 309 310 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Decibel dB The measurement unit for expressing the relative intensity of sound A direct application of linear scales in Pa to the measurement of sound pressure leads to large and unwieldy numbers As the ear responds logarithmically rather than linearly to stimuli it is more practical to express acoustic parameters as a logarithmic ratio of the measured value to a reference value This logarithmic ratio is called a decibel or dB The advantage of using dB can be clearly seen in the below illustration Here the linear scale with its large numbers is converted into a manageable scale from 0 dB at the threshold of hearing 20 Pa to 130 dB at the threshold of pain 100 Pa Our hearing covers a surprisingly wide range of sound pressures a ratio of over a million to one The dB scale makes the numbers manageable SOUND PRESSURE 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL 000111 Dose ProjDose DoseUQ ProjDoseUQ Exchange Rate Exposure Time Fast Max Fast Min Glossary The Noise Dose is the equivalent averaged A weighted Noise Level taking the Threshold Level into account using Exchange Rate 3 for an 8 hour period reference duration relative to the maximum allowed the Criterion Level expressed in percentage Example If the Criterion Level is 85 dB and a person is exposed to a const
34. 7 1 e Chapter 7 Connection to PC or Smartphone or Measurement Partner Field App This chapter describes connecting to your analyzer from a PC or smartphone including e e e An introduction to connection methods Measurement Partner Suite BZ 5503 for full control of the analyzer Use an Internet browser for online display and control of the analyzer Measurement Partner Field App MP Field App for streamlined functional control of the measurement data and annotations in the field Introduction Two different methods are available for connecting to the analyzer USB BZ 5503 connects to the analyzer through a USB cable Network The analyzer is connected to a network local or Internet via a modem LAN cable or Wi Fi adaptor BZ 5503 or an Internet browser and MP Field App on a smartphone will then be able to connect to the analyzer through TCP IP using the analyzer s global IP address In addition to connecting to the analyzer the analyzer itself can notify you by SMS or email based on various conditions For more information see section 8 4 Table 7 1 gives you an overview of the different connection possibilities including links to relevant chapters with more details Table 7 1 Connection overview Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Connect From Connection Type Settings in Preferences Available Notifications BZ 5503 USB Modem Disabled see section
35. 7820 00 eee eeeeeeeeeneeeseeeeees Event Marker ccceccccceessceeeeeneeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeneeeess Exchange Rate Exclude Marker Explorer Screen Exposure Time Ext Power 4 Ext Power Setting Extended Microphone External Event External Power Socket cccesesesteeeees F f1 Parameter ooo eee ecceccccecccescssssteeeeeeeseeseteeeeeeeseeseaea 246 f2 Paramete nnee isere eaii 246 Factory Default Resetting cece eeeeee 8 12 Fast Time Weighting ee FB 0679 Hinged Cover ceceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeteeereeeeatees 6 FFT Analysis Software BZ 7230 sese File Format File Speed Filter Calibration sccccesscccessearcessseevececcesevexeeessiees First Check Parameter Formatting a Memory Card ssec 107 Fourth Check Parametel ccccecseseseeeteeseeeees 232 Free field Icon es FIOQUCNCY sona annie Frequency Analysis 1 1208 1 3 OCtAVE iced a iin eels 115 Display Results 116 186 188 190 196 199 200 S t O E T Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 Frequency Weighting Frequency Weighting Parameters Full Spectral Stat for Reports Parameter 230 Pull V N iorram nase ATA 47 G GA eA ee ee EE Connector Panel General Parameters Generator Parameter s sce cveiivavsvosenscees Hetlindiecned io daar 255 Set UP 2ii akin nA a Meese 116 GIOSSALY areni resede nedat deaan eag iet 309 Good M
36. 8 2 BZ 5503 Internet Network or Modem GPRS EDGE HSPA Email browser or GPRS EDGE HSPA Dialup see section 8 4 smartphone with Modem Possibly settings in MP Field App Modem DynDNS see sections 8 2 and 8 3 BZ 5503 Internet Network Modem Disabled Email browser or smartphone with MP Field App Ethernet cable Possibly settings in Modem DynDNS and Network see sections 8 2 and 8 3 see section 8 4 BZ 5503 Internet browser or smartphone with MP Field App Network CF WLAN G1 3 analyzers only Wi Fi dongle or SD WLAN G4 only Modem Disabled Possibly settings in Modem DynDNS and Network see sections 8 2 and 8 3 Email see section 8 4 BZ 5503 Internet browser or smartphone with MP Field App Network DSL Modem Router Modem Disabled Possibly settings in Modem DynDNS and Network see sections 8 2 and 8 3 Email see section 8 4 Hint The online help for BZ 5503 contains additional information on how to connect an analyzer using the different connection types 7 2 Transferring Measurement Data to Your PC Measurement Partner Suite BZ 5503 is used for communication between your PC and the analyzer You can use this software to e Transfer measurement data and templates from the analyzer to your PC and vice versa e View data e Organize data on the analyzer e Create users on the analyzer e Upgrade software on the analyzer e Install software licenses on the analyzer
37. Adaptor UC 0211 Broadband excl Peak Microphone All broadband parameters except Lpeak are measured AZ simultaneously with two different frequency AC weightings select the weightings here BZ ae The settings G Wmand Wmbare available for Low Accelerometer Linear Linear Wm Linear Wmb Direct Linear Frequency Extended or Very Low Requires Low Frequency Option BZ 7234 227 228 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Table A 2 Cont Frequency setting parameters Parameter Values Comment Broadband Peak Microphone One broadband peak parameter Lpeak IS measured QNOX Accelerometer Linear Linear Wm Linear Wmb select the frequency weighting here P Please note X frequency weighting A or B A requires that the Broadband excl Peak parameter is set to AC or AZ B requires that the Broadband excl Peak parameter is set to BC or BZ The settings G Wmand Wmbare available for Low Frequency Extended or Very Low Requires Low Frequency Option BZ 7234 Direct Linear Spectrum Microphone The frequency analysis 1 1 octave or 1 3 octave will x be frequency weighted in accordance with this C parameter Z Note X frequency weighting A or B A requires that G the Broadband excl Peak parameter is set to AC or AZ B requires that the Broadband excl Peak Accelerometer parameter is set to BC or BZ Linear Linear Wm i Linear Wmb The
38. And with the options Signal Recording Option BZ 7226 Low Frequency Option BZ 7234 Please note e 2 channel Enhanced Logging is not available for G1 3 analyzers 16 1 Please refer to Building Acoustics Software BZ 7228 User Manual BE 1799 for a description of the Dual channel Building Acoustics Software e Ifyou have purchased your analyzer together with the software application s then the relevant license s comes pre installed on the analyzer e Ifyou purchased a separate software application for your analyzer you have to install the license on the analyzer This is done using BZ 5503 please consult the online help included with the BZ 5503 software for instructions on how to install a license Connecting Transducers Please refer to section 2 5 for connecting two transducers to the instrument and to Chapter 5 for creating the transducers in the transducer database and for calibrating 183 184 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Tap Main Menu EF gt Setup gt Input you will see two columns for the individual settings of the two channels See Fig 16 1 for how to set up the two transducers On the Setup screen you can also set up individual transducer correction filters like the windscreen correction Fig 16 1 Set up the transducers Input Input Trigger Input Channels Label Input Transducer Snd Fld Corr Wind S Auto Wind S Corr Range Setting Frequency Settings Statistics
39. Assessment gt Tone Assessment is set to Off 177 178 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual To reset all the relevant parameters to the default setup tap the OK button The default setup includes preset parameters that comply with the selected standard These are described in Table 15 1 To measure with the settings you set up manually tap the Cancel button Table 15 1 Default parameters Setup Parameter Default Value used by the automatic Selected standard ISO 1996 2 Annex D measurement setup check Adjustment 3 dB Last band in low frequency range 125 Hz Last band in middle frequency range 400 Hz Level difference low 15 dB Level difference middle 8 dB Level difference high 5 dB Selected standard Italian Law DM 16 03 1998 ISO 226 1987 Free field Please note Even if you have set the Tone Assessment to On Setup screen the calculation is not carried out until the Tone parameter is selected above the spectrum Hint You may find the Template Explorer accessed from Main Menu useful to save your own measurement setup 15 2 4 Signal Recording If a valid license for the Signal Recording Option BZ 7226 is present it is possible to record the sound while measuring Refer to 13 for information about the Signal Recording Option Please note When analyzer recordings are to be used for re analysis ona PC be sure to set Automatic Gain Control parameter to Off under t
40. BZ 7234 ccccssesscccccesssceecessssccccessseccceessseccecssseesscceseeesceessesesesseees 193 17 1 Sound Measurements and G weighting c ccccccccccessssssecececeeseseseceesceeseaseeeceseesesaseeeeesees 193 17 2 Setting up the Analyzer for G weighting ccccccccccccesessscecececeeseseeeeececesesaseeseeseeesenseaeees 194 Controlling the M aSUrEMEN cccccccccessessseccceceesesessesecececseeaeseeeescsesesaeseeesesesesaeseeseseseeeea 195 Displaying the Results cocece cccveevevedee seers iiei i EEA EARE a EEEE 196 17 3 Building Vibration Me asUreMent c cccccccesssssecccecsesecececececeesesesseeeescseseseseesesceeseaaseeeeesees 196 17 4 Setting up the Analyzer for Building Vibration MeasureMents cccccccccssessssceeeeeceessaees 198 Controlling the M aSUreEMEN c cccccccccsssssecececeesseessesecececseseaaeceeececeesesaeseeceeseseeaeseeseseeeeeea 199 Displaying the RESUItS inaenea ai iiare oe a EEE a E Eai 199 17 5 Setting Up the Frequency Analyzer Module for Very Low Frequencies ccccccsssssseeeees 199 Controlling the M aSUreEMEN cccccccccessessseccceceeseseesesecececsesaeseesesceeseeaesesesesesesaeseeseseseeeea 200 Displaying THERES UES vas ticceecdeewescceccdcchecenessacddonoventhadteds csuasuadeteceesusauuacslacededoancesle ieeseasnateetseaee 200 SAVING RESUITS weve coeveven n ti i Costs e Eai aA E be coed Coches eventos E E tees ceeveueestseWeovetees 201 CHAPTER 18 Specifications iiss
41. Cards See item 10 in Fig 2 2 G1 3 analyzers or item 9 and 10 in Fig 2 3 G4 analyzers The SD slots accept SD and SDHC Secure Digital High Capacity memory cards and are typically used to save measurement data Capacities upto 32 gigabytes are acceptable Please note G1 3 analyzers have only one SD Card slot G4 analyzers have two slots LAN Socket See item 12 in Fig 2 2 G1 3 analyzers or Fig 2 3 G4 analyzers All G4 hardware has one LAN socket with 100 Mbit connection With G1 3 analyzers only Type 2270 is equipped with a 10 Mbit LAN connection The LAN Socket provides high speed direct communication with a LAN It is used to synchronize measurement and setup data with a host PC The yellow LED on the right is on when there is a link The green LED on the left blinks when there is activity on the LAN connection CHAPTER 2 Assembling your Analyzer 2 4 Hardware Setup Fig 2 4 Type 2250 2270 Hardware Overview UA 1404 Outdoor A UA 1650 Microphone Kit 90 mm Windscreen with AutoDetect l i 4231 4189 4190 Microphone fq ly Sound y Calibrator ZC 0032 Microphone Preamplifier AO 0697 D 100 KE 0441 Microphone JP 1041 Protective Ext Cable 10 m Cover AO 0697 D 030 ri a Microphone apior UA 1654 Ext Cable 3 m V 5 extra Styli UA 1317 l Microphone UA 1673 Holder UL 1050 rar Adaptor for Wi Fi Dongle for Standard UA 0801 Hand held Analy
42. Cont Generator parameters Parameter Values Comment Escape Time 0 to 60s Set the Escape Time to allow the operator to leave the room before the generator is turned on and the measurement starts Build up Time 1to 20s Set the Build up Time to allow the sound pressure in the room to settle after the sound source is switched on Bottom Frequency 50 Hz to Top 1 1 octave 63 Hz 8 kHz Frequency 1 3 octave 50 Hz 10 kHz Please note The settings of Bottom and Top Frequency control the bandwidth of the noise from the internal noise generator Top Frequency Bottom Frequency to 10 kHz 1 1 octave 63 Hz 8 kHz 1 3 octave 50 Hz 10 kHz Available for Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 single channel and Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 and microphone input only t Available for Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 only A 18 Post processing Table A 18 Post processing parameters APPENDIX A Setup Parameters Parameter Values Comment Ensemble Averaging No Yes Set to Yesto average each of the position decays into an average decay called the ensemble average or room average The averaged decays of the room can then be displayed in the Decay View T30 Room T20 Room and EDT Room vill be calculated from the room average Set to Vofor no ensemble averaging There will be no decays available for the room T30 Room T20 Room and EDT Room will be calculated
43. Display ReSults eee eee eee eeeeeeseeeeeeeeees Manual Measurement 0 c eee eeeeeeeeeees MOASULING ccseciseceesteritevscneavenrdivecscevearcestenddseneves Set U Pasa an i AAs eae heh Smileys and Remedies Using Enhanced Logging Template 180 Using Logging Template eee 180 With Signal Recording 178 Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 35 171 Top Freq for Special Leq Parametet 005 228 TOP Socket minie EE 6 9 Total Measurement Parameters CIG Resullt i 23 24 n aaa a Equivalent Continuous Sound Level For BZ 7222 tiahne section tebds For BZ 7223 v nonne A NR RNE For BZ 7224 0 eecceccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneenaes For BZ 7225 General ISO EU Occupational Health 0 0 c eee Low frequency Parameters 264 268 270 272 Maximum Time weighted Sound Levels 262 Minimum Time weighted Sound Level 263 Peak Sound Level ccccceeeseeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 262 Sound Exposure Level ccscesceeseeeseeeeees 262 Special Spectrum Statistics to Calculate Percentile Levels eskoa 0110 ias PET ented dev uncucstlats 265 US Occupational Health c eceeeeeeeeees 263 Weather Data Parameters 265 Total Parameter c cccee 127 138 Touch SCIEN 3 5 ase eee ts 5 40 TroubleShooting cece eee eeee esse teeeeeeeees 108 Touch sensitive Screen ccccecececeeee
44. From Standby lt 10 s for prepolarized microphones WEIGHT AND DIMENSIONS 650 g 23 oz including rechargeable battery 300 x 93 x 50 mm 11 8 x 3 7 x 1 9 including preamplifier and microphone User Interface USERS Multi user concept with login Users can have their own settings with jobs and projects totally independent of other users PREFERENCES Date Time and Number formats can be specified per user LANGUAGE User Interface in Catalan Chinese People s Republic of China Chinese Taiwan Croatian Czech Danish English Flemish French German Hungarian Japanese Italian Korean Polish Portuguese Romanian Russian Serbian Slovenian Spanish Swedish Turkish and Ukrainian CHAPTER 18 Specifications HELP Concise context sensitive help in Chinese People s Republic of China English French German Italian Japanese Polish Romanian Serbian Slovenian Spanish and Ukrainian UPDATE OF SOFTWARE Update to any version using BZ 5503 through USB or update via Internet REMOTE ACCESS Connect to the analyzer using Measurement Partner Suite BZ 5503 using Measurement Partner Field App iOS or Android smartphone app using the 2250 2270 SDK Software Development kit using a REST interface through HTTP or using an Internet browser supporting JavaScript The connection is password protected Two levels of protection e Guest level for viewing only e Administrator level for viewing and full contro
45. Full Spectral Statistics per Logging Period or not 9 Under Markers you can specify the names of the five available markers The markers are predefined as follows Marker 1 Exclude can be controlled by pressing the Back erase pushbutton 2 Marker 2 Manual can be controlled by pressing the Manual Event pushbutton lt lt Marker 3 Level can be controlled by the Level Trigger detection Marker 4 Marker 4 Marker 5 Marker 5 Marker 6 Sound is set when recording signal typically sound requires Signal Recording Software BZ 7226 All markers can be controlled by the stylus in the Profile display You can set a Pre marker Time between 0 and 5 seconds This will start markers 1 2 or 3 the set number of pre marker seconds before the point where the Back erase pushbutton the Manual Event pushbutton or the Level Trigger respectively are pressed See section 11 3 2 Requires Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 125 126 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 10 Under the Level Trigger parameters choose the settings for triggering the number 3 marker Level for starting a signal recording and for sending an SMS or email see section 8 4 and 12 Set Level Trigger Control to On to enable the level trigger facility or Offto disable the facility Set Trigger Parameter to the parameter you want to monitor for example Laeg see Table A 11 for the tot
46. Linear Fast max Slow max Fast min Slow min Off These parameters can be set if Spectrum Parameters Selected X frequency weightings A B C Z or G controlled by Setup gt Frequency Settings gt Spectrum parameter Please note The parameter values shown are for single channeltemplates For 2 channel templates Type 2270 only the values are available for both Ch 1 and Ch 2 For Logging BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging BZ 7225 templates only requires Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 A 9 Markers Table A 9 Markers APPENDIX A Setup Parameters Parameter Values Comment Marker 1 Text string Default set to Exc ude This marker can be set using the stylus in the profile or the Back erase pushbutton during a measurement Marker 2 Text string Default set to Manual This marker can be set using the stylus in the profile or the Manual Event pushbutton during a measurement Marker 3 Text string Default set to Leve This marker can be set using the stylus in the profile or if the conditions for the Level Trigger are met during a measurement Marker 4 and Marker 5 Text string These markers can be set using the stylus in the profile display Marker 6 Text string Default set to Sound This marker is set if a signal recording is made during a measurement Pre marker Time Oto5s Specifies number of seconds marker 1 marker 2 or marker 3 will be set ahead of the point where the Back er
47. Mode 1 0 0 eeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees Star Next to Template eee ceeeeeeeseeeeeeneenees 24 Star Navigation CONCEPt eeceeseeeeseeteeeeeeneeeeeenes 37 Start Duration Parametel cccccseeeseeeseeeteeeees 244 Start Level Parameter oe Start Slope Parameter ccccccceeeeceeeeteeeeeeeeees 244 Start Time Parameter 0 cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 244 Start Pause Pushbutton ee eceeeeeseeeeeeee 5 21 43 Start up Initial Sound Level Meter Screen 0 ee 20 Statistics Parameter c ccccccccsseeeesseeeeeeee 229 235 Statistics to Calculate 0 ccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 270 Statistics to Calculate Percentile Levels 264 267 Status Codes In Tone Assessment Software eeee 181 Status Field avcssceccses corssiveseesves nean iiia 41 in Logging Profile eee eee eee eeeeeeeee 128 in Reverberation Time Software c00c0 160 Status Indicator eee ee ccc ceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeneees Stop Duration Parameter T Stop Level Parameter ccccecceeeeeeteeeeeeeees Stop Time Parameter cccccecceeseeseteeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Stopped ICON eee Storage Settings Screen Store Pushbutton Usage inina Switch On and Charge Setting Switching Off Switching ON ssesseesesesisiesieriersieisrisrnersrrsinrernsrennens Synchronize with Clock Parameter cee 243 T Table Format C
48. NMT Server communication used by Noise Monitoring Software BZ 7232 see User Manual for Noise Monitoring Terminal Types 3639 A B and C BE 1818 308 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual A weighting filter aWCrest aW aW 1s B weighting filter C weighting filter Criterion Level Appendix E Glossary Frequency weighting corresponding approximately to the 40 dB equal loudness curve that is to say the human ear s response at low to medium sound levels It is by far the most commonly applied frequency weighting and is used for all levels of sound Crest factor given by Peaky ay over the entire measurement period Time averaged RMS weighted acceleration value averaged over the entire measurement period with frequency weighting Wm or Wmb Maximum time weighted acceleration value during the latest second with frequency weighting Wm or Wm and 1 s exponential time constant Frequency weighting corresponding approximately to the 70 dB equal loudness curve that is to say the human ear s response at medium sound levels Frequency weighting corresponding to the 100 dB equal loudness curve that is to say the human ear s response at fairly high sound levels Mainly used when assessing peak values of high sound pressure levels Criterion Level is the maximum averaged sound level allowed for an 8 hour period Used for calculation of Dose ProjDose DoseUQ and ProjDoseUQ where U ForS and Q 4 5 or
49. Remaining estimate tap the Battery icon to get this information does not match the real time remaining for example the analyzer switches off automatically because of lack of power while the Time Remaining estimate indicates at least 2 hour then you should manually re calibrate the capacity of the battery pack This is done using the following method 1 Drain all the power from the battery a b c d e f Switch the analyzer on Disconnect external power Disconnect the analyzer from the PC Set Main Menu gt Preferences gt Power gt Standby After to Never To drain the battery faster set Backlight On to A ways same menu and select the maximum level of display backlight tap Backlight Ej at the bottom of the screen Leave the analyzer until the analyzer switches itself off 2 Charge the battery fully at least 10 hours a b c Connect the Mains Power Supply ZG 0426 to the analyzer Switch the analyzer on and leave it on and remember to reset the Standby After and Backlight On to your preferred settings Tap the Battery icon for the battery condition This will indicate Calibrating Battery initially Let the battery charge until the battery charge indicator just below the power socket starts flashing green hardware versions 1 3 or changes from red to green G4 analyzers and the Calibrating Battery indication disappears from the pop up window 9 4 4 Touch Screen If tapping
50. SDHC Memory Card for Hand held Analyzers User Manual MM 0256 A MM 0316 A Weather Station Kit Weather Station Kit Included with MM 0256 A or MM 0316 A e MM 0256 002 Six Parameter Weather Station and mounting kit e MM 0316 002 Two Parameter Weather Station and mounting kit e AO 0657 USB Cable e AO 0659 Cable M12 8 pin F to Lemo 1 B 8 pin M 10 m 33 3 ft e BR 1779 Weather Station Field Guide e DB 4364 Weather Station Pole Adapter e KE 4334 Weather Station Carrying Case e QX 0016 Screwdriver e QX 1171 2 5 mm Hex Wrench e UA 1707 A Weather Station Tripod Adaptor e ZH 0689 Weather Station USB Adaptor MEASURING WITH REVERBERATION TIME SOFTWARE BZ 7227 Type 2734 A Type 2734 B UL 0256 Type 4292 L KE 0449 KE 0364 Type 4224 Type 4295 KE 0392 AO 0523 D 100 AO 0524 D 100 AQ 0673 UA 1476 POST PROCESSING Type 7831 Type 7830 INTERFACING BZ 5503 A BZ 5503 B BZ 5503 C Power Amplifier Power Amplifier with built in UL O256 Wireless Audio System Wireless Audio System OmniPower Sound Source Flight Case for Type 4292 L Tripod Carrying Case for Type 4292 L Sound Source Omnidirectional Sound Source Carrying Case for Type 4295 Cable from Type 2250 2270 to Power Amplifier 10 m 33 ft Cable from Type 2250 2270 to Type 4224 10 m 33 ft Cable from Power Amplifier to sound source 10 m 33 ft Wireless Remote Control Qualifier L
51. Settings gt BB Peak W frequency weightings A B C or Z controlled by Setup gt Frequency Settings gt Spectrum Comments continue on next page 245 246 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Table A 11 Cont Trigger parameters Parameter Values Comment Accelerometer Linear Peak Fast max Slow max Fast min Slow min Linear f1 f2 aw LW KBFmax PeakW Cont Trigger Parameter Direct Linear Peak Fast max Slow max Fast min Slow min Linear f1 f2 f1 Lower freq range controlled by Setup gt Frequency Settings gt Bottom F for Special Leq f2 Upper freq range controlled by Setup gt Frequency Settings gt Top Freq for Special Leq Please note The parameter values shown are for single channeltemplates For 2 channeltemplates Type 2270 only the values are available for both Ch 1 and Ch 2 Level Trigger 2 Exactly the same parameters as Level Trigger 1 Level Trigger 3 Exactly the same parameters as Level Trigger 1 Level Trigger 4 Exactly the same parameters as Level Trigger 1 For Enhanced Logging BZ 7225 templates only t Up to four individual trigger settings can be set for non overlapping time periods of the day Requires license for Signal Recording BZ 7226 A 12 Units Table A 12 Unit parameters available for Accelerometer or Direct input only Parameter Values Comment Engineering Unit No Select
52. Setup Parameters Table A 4 Cont Measurement Control parameters for BZ 7222 to BZ 7225 Parameter Values Comment Synchronize with Clock Yes Select Yesto synchronize the logging and reporting intervals with whole minutes or hours for example if Logging Period No is set to 00 01 00 1 minute and Report Period is set to 01 00 00and you start the measurement at 8 12 33 then the first logging interval will be from 8 12 33 to 8 12 59 27 seconds the second will be from 8 13 00 to 8 13 59 60 seconds etc and the first Report interval will be from 8 12 33 to 8 59 59 48 min and 27 seconds the second will be from 9 00 00 to 9 59 59 1 hour etc Select Vo if you want every logging and reporting interval to be exactly the specified Logging Period T for LXeq T mov 00 01 00 to Sets the averaging time T in minutes of the moving Laeg and 01 00 00 moving Lceg When the averaging time T has elapsed the Laeg T mov and Lceq T mov Parameters will contain the Laeg and Lceg of the latest T minutes updated every second in addition you also have ALegtmov LCeq T mov LAeg T mov The Lxeq T mov S not stored with the total data but can be logged BZ 7224 and BZ 7225 The Laegt mov max LCeg T mov max and the difference between the C and A weighted values for the complete measurement period are stored Please note There are two sets of these parameters allowing two simultaneous moving averages for example one with 15
53. Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 also provides connectivity between your PC and other sound analysis software 4 2 2 Frequency Analysis Software Module BZ 7223 This software module allows real time frequency measurements in 1 1 and 1 3 octave bands making it a simple matter to for example select suitable hearing protection qualify noise from heat and ventilation systems and assess tonality 4 2 3 Logging Software Module BZ 7224 This software module allows logging of broadband and spectral data to obtain a time history for later analysis for example for use in environmental noise as well as workplace noise assessment It allows free selection of up to 10 parameters to log at periods from 1 s to 24 h Results are logged directly to the SD memory card or CF card if using hardware versions 1 3 4 2 4 Enhanced Logging Software Module BZ 7225 This software module is optimised for long term monitoring It has the functionality of the Logging and Frequency Analysis software and in addition it can measure continuously save data in manageable portions every 24 hours make periodic reports that is every hour and measure Lan and Lgen etc 4 2 5 Signal Recording Option BZ 7226 This option allows recording of the input signal typically sound in either 16 bit or 24 bit resolution during measurement The signal recording can be controlled manually or by using an external trigger signal The recording can also be triggered when a
54. Start Pause will start anew measurement using the setups from the project You can save the setup information in a template by tapping the Template Bar at the top of the screen see section 4 5 8 Viewing or Listening to Annotations and Metadata Use Explorer to locate the project with the annotations you want to view hear then tap the project name and select Annotations from the drop down that appears or tap Paperclip and select the Annotations tab This will show all annotations attached to the project Fig 6 2 ANNOTATIONS x REA Example of an Project010 l annotation attached to a project KI Comment 1 21 05 2010 10 44 lt 1 Comment 2 21 05 2010 10 45 E Note 1 21 05 2010 10 45 Note 2 21 05 2010 10 45 GQ Image 1 21 05 2010 10 45 KI Soundrec 1 21 05 2010 10 46 Annotations Metadata E 10 47 34 The KJ icon represents a verbal annotation or commentary Tap the annotation name and select Play from the drop down that appears or tap the icon to play the commentary using the headphone output Hint You canalso rename delete copy or move annotations to and from other projects orjobs CHAPTER 6 65 Data Management The Text icon represents written annotations or notes Tap the annotation name and select Open from the drop down that appears or tap the icon to open the Notes editor View the comments and if required edit the comments using the simulated keyboard that appears at the
55. Status Field Spectrum Broadband 20 34 38 Status Field The Status Field has been extended to include an extra line of information below the two existing lines of information covered previously in the Sound Level Meter and Frequency Analyzer see Fig 11 3 This extra line of information allows you to Select whether the results of the 7ota measurement from the Logged measurement or from the Logged 100 ms measurement are displayed Select 7ota to display the measurement parameters of the Total measurement in all the views the Broadband and Spectrum tabs will then display parameters or spectra similar to the Sound Level Meter or Frequency Analyzer The Profile tab will be empty because the Total measurement contains only a single set of parameters Select Logged to display the measurement parameters from the logging intervals The cursor in the profile selects which logging interval is displayed in all the views Select Logged 100 ms to display the Laeq Lar or Las in the profile from the 100 ms logging intervals This setting does not display spectra or parameters in other views View the start time of the measurement for Tota or the start time of the current logging interval for Logged or Logged 100 ms if measuring and the profile is not frozen or the start time of the logging interval pointed out by the cursor Tap the Start Timein any of the tabs to select data from another logging interval CHAPTER 11 Logging Optional Mod
56. Time and Logging Period as required Set Synchronize with clock to Yesif you want the logging to synchronize with whole minutes or hours For example if Logging Period is set to 1 minute and you start the measurement at 8 12 33 then the first logging interval will be from 8 12 33 to 8 12 59 27 seconds the second will be from 8 13 00 to 8 13 59 60 seconds etc Set Synchronize with CHAPTER 11 Logging Optional Module clock to Wo if you want every logging interval to be the specified Logging Period exactly Set Charge Injection Calibration to On if you want to validate the complete measurement chain by performing CIC at the start and end of the logging measurement refer to section 5 7 6 Under the Logged Broadband parameters choose which broadband parameters you want to log in accordance with the Measurement Control parameters You can choose to log Full Statistics per Logging Period or not You can also choose to log a the measured Broadband Parameters or a Se ected number of parameters If you choose Selected then you can specify up to 10 parameters 7 The Logged Broadband 100 ms parameter allows you to log Laeg with an elapsed time of 100 ms and a logging period of 100 ms Lap and or Las with a logging period of 100 ms irrespective of the other logging parameters 8 The Logged Spectrum parameter allows you to choose which spectra to log You can specify to log A None or up to 3 Selected spectra You can also choose to log
57. UC 0211 44 1 147 4 4964 29 6 119 0 4964 UC 0211 32 6 137 3 MEASUREMENTS Spectra for Display and Storage BZ 7223 required aW Fast max Slow max Fast min Slow min Spectra for Display Only BZ 7223 required Fast Inst Slow Inst Single Values for Display and Storage aW aW crest MTVV KBF max KBF rm Peak Tpeak Single Values for Display Only aW 1s KBF Low Frequency 1 1 and 1 3 octave Analysis Frequency Analysis CENTRE FREQUENCIES 1 1 oct Band Centre Frequencies 1 Hz to 16 kHz 1 oct Band Centre Frequencies 0 8 Hz to 20 kHz 217 218 Standards Conforms with the following National and International Standards e IEC 61260 1 2014 1 1 octave Bands and 1 3 octave Bands Class 1 e IEC 61260 1995 07 plus Amendment 1 2001 09 1 1 octave Bands and 1 8 octave Bands Class 0 e ANSI 1 11 1986 1 1 octave Bands and 1 8 octave Bands Order 3 Type 0 C e ANSI 1 11 2004 1 1 octave Bands and1 3 octave Bands Class 0 e ANSI ASA 1 11 2014 Part 1 1 1 octave Bands and 1 3 octave Bands Class 1 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Sound Measurements Low frequency sound measurements require use of a low frequency microphone This can be the Type 4193 or Type 4964 both together with Low Frequency Adaptor UC 0211 Vibration Measurements Briiel amp Kj r recommends Low level Accelerometer Type 8344 for low frequency vibration measurements Software Specifications Measurement Partn
58. Wo to display values in dB Yes Select Yesto display values in m s Accelerometer input or V Direct input Please note Use Preferences gt Regional to select whether the Vibration unit should be m s2 S or g US UK Signal Recording Table A 13 Signal Recording parameters APPENDIX A Setup Parameters Parameter Values Comment Recording Control Off Determines how recording of the measured signal is controlled Automatic Set to Automaticto start the recording when the measurement Manual Event Exclude Event External Event Level Trigger Event Timer Event All Events Image Event is started and record throughout the measurement only limited by the Maximum Duration Set to Manual Event to start recording manually while measuring when the Manual Event pushbutton is pressed and record until pressing the pushbutton again however take Maximum and Minimum Duration into account Set to Exclude Event to start recording manually while measuring when the Back erase pushbutton is pressed and record until pressing the pushbutton again however take Maximum and Minimum Duration into account Set to Externa Event to start recording using external equipment connected to the Trigger Input Socket Set to Leve Trigger Event to record while the level trigger conditions are fulfilled however take Maximum and Minimum Duration into account Set to Timer Event BZ 7225 only to record
59. a and Lep av Please note Exposure Time can be changed after the measurement has been done Reference Time 00 01 00 to 5 00 00 00 Set the Reference Time as required for calculation of Sound Exposure Level or Time Weighed Average with a reference time other than 8 hours Used for calculation of Lep g v and TWA Table A 16 Occupational Health parameters APPENDIX A Setup Parameters Parameter Values Comment Threshold Level 0 to 140 dB Any sound levels below the threshold value do not contribute to the Dose measurement data The time resolution for this calculation is 1 s for calculation of Dose and ProjDose and 10 ms for calculation of TWA TWA DoseUQ and ProjDoseUQ Used for calculation of Dose ProjDose TWA TWAv DoseUQ ProjDoseUQ U Time Weighting for Lav F or S Q Exchange Rate for Lav 4 5 or 6 dB Criterion Level 0 to 140 dB Criterion Level is the sound level allowed for an 8 hour period and would yield a 100 dose The criterion level must be set according to the legislation with which you will have to comply Used for calculation of Dose ProjDose DoseUQ ProjDoseUQ U Time Weighting for Lav F or S Q Exchange Rate for Lav 4 5 or 6 dB PeaksOver Level 0 to 200 dB Any peak levels that exceed the level set here will be counted Used for calculation of XPeaks gt NNNaB X A B C Z or G set by Setup gt Frequency Setting
60. aaoo a EET A A S Parameters Playback Setting en ean e a a a 126 rA E a EE E E E EAT 131 With PULSE Multi analyzer seee 149 With Reverberation Time s src 157 With Tone Assessment eeeeeereeenee 178 Signal Recording Option BZ 7226 34 106 141 Signal Recording Timer sses 137 Sllw acciauitarcuian EEEN 119 236 318 SILSs E EEE 119 236 318 SLM Sound Level Meter sesers 31 Slot for Compact Flash CF Cards eeeeeeseeeees 12 for Secure Digital SD Cards ei Slow Time Weighting eceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee Small Tripod 0 0 ee ceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaes Smileys Codes and Remedies in Tone Assessmenrt 182 In Frequency Analysis Software In Reverberation Time Software In Tone Assessment Software cee SMS Notifications ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee while ONNE Fas ss eatea aerea ae EEE enr cater Sockets Trigg rlNp t lt i cceerevtercesecpeneseieeeraeenestineteensenstdvaececs 9 Software Version aneii inar 36 Sound Calibrator cccccccccseceessseeeesseeeesseeeeees 52 53 Sound Category sirara aee 131 Sound Definition 319 Sound Exposure E ccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 33 Sound Exposure Level ccccceeseeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 33 Sound Exposure Level Parameters 262 266 269 Sound Level 0008 319 Sound Level Calibration ccc
61. analyzer is connected through LAN or by a GPRS EDGE HSPA modem see section 8 2 2 and section 8 3 Go to Preferences gt Notifications gt E mail and setup details for the e mail account under the To parameter The details consist of the SMTP server name the SMTP Port used whether SSL TLS is required or not the Account the User Name and Password for the account please consult section D 10 Appendix D and your email provider for more details 96 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Set Notification to ma and a notification will be sent by email when any of the alarm conditions are met You can test the system by tapping on Main Menu gt Send Notification via E mail Example of email Subject E mail from 2479719 Abbey Road Test Manual e mail Test Manual e mail 29 04 2009 12 51 16 Instrument 2479719 Abbey Road SD Card 383 MB 483 MB Internal Battery Charging Trigger Input Voltage 13 5V Measurement Status Running No of Signal Recordings 13 CIC Result Passed LAF 45 8dB 8 5 Web Server To connect to the analyzer using an Internet browser the following conditions must be fulfilled e Theanalyzer must be connected to a network as described in section 8 2 2 section 8 2 3 and section 8 3 e The Internet browser must support JavaScript The Web page of the analyzer has been tested on the following Internet browsers Microsoft Internet Explorer from version 7 Mozilla Firefox f
62. and one peak detector C or Z weighted switchable As for A or B weighted Overload Detector Monitors the overload outputs of all the frequency weighted channels MEASUREMENTS FOR SOUND INPUT X frequency weightings A or B Y frequency weightings C or Z V frequency weightings A B C or Z U time weightings F or S Q exchange rate 4 5 or 6 dB User Manual N number between 0 1 and 99 9 For Display and Storage Start Time Elapsed Time Lye Lysmax Lysmax Lysmin Lysmin Lxieq LAFTeg Lep d Dose VPeaks gt NNNaB TVpeak TWAv Lheq T1 mov max Lceq T2 mov max Stop Time Lxeq Lye LxFmax LyFmax LxFmin LyFmin Lyieq Lartegltaeq Lep dv Proj Dose VPeaks gt 137dB Lavua DoseUQ Laeq t2 mov max AL eq T1 mov max Overload Lyeq Lceq7LAeqk Lximax Lyimax Limin Lyimin Lateq taeq Time Remaining E Lypeak VPeaks gt 135dB TWA Proj DoseUQ Lceq T1 mov max AL eq T2 mov max Weather Data requires weather station Wind Dir avg Wind Dir min Wind Dir max Wind Speed avg Wind Speed min Wind Speed max Amb Temp Rainfall Amb Humidity Amb Pressure Only for Display as Numbers or Quasi analog Bars Lys Lys Lxs sPL Lys sPL Lyn OF Lynd Lyng OF Lyyna Lxn7 Or Lxun7 Std Dev Lceq T1 mov AL eq T2 mov LxF LyF LXF SPL LyF SPL Lxn2 Or Lxun2 Lyns Or Lxuns LVpeak 1s Laeq T1 mov Lceg T2 mov Instanta
63. as averages of the T30 T20 and EDT respectively for all the positions Wide Band RT Bottom 50 Hz to Wide Band RT Top 1 1 octave 63 Hz 8 kHz 1 3 octave 50 Hz 10 kHz The settings of Wide Band RT Bottom and Wide Band RT Top control the range of frequency bands used in the averaging of the wide band parameters available below the Spectrum and Decay graphs Example Set Wide Band RT Bottom to 100 Hzand Top to 2 kHz then the average of the frequency bands from 100 Hzto 2 kHz will be calculated for the current position as 730 100 Hz 2 kHz 720 100 Hz 2 kHz EDT 100 Hz 2 kHz and for the Room as 730 Room 100 Hz 2 kHz 720 Room 100 Hz 2 kHz EDT Room 100 Hz 2 kHz Wide Band RT Top Wide Band RT Bottom to 10 kHz 1 1 octave 63 Hz 8 kHz 1 3 octave 50 Hz 10 kHz 257 258 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual A 19 Tone Assessment Table A 19 Tone assessment parameters Parameter Values Comment Tone Assessment On Set Tone Assessment to On to enable tone assessment functionality then select the Tone Off parameter above the spectrum to display the results Tone Standard ISO 1996 2 2007 Set the Tone Standard in accordance with your DM 16 03 1998 requirements ISO 1996 2 2007 Annex D is the objective method for assessing the audibility of tones in noise simplified method This method uses 1 3 octave spectra DM 16 03 19
64. average level The equivalent continuous sound level Leq is known around the world as the essential averaged parameter Leg is the level that had it been a steady level during the measurement period would represent the amount of energy present in the measured fluctuating sound pressure level It is a measure of the averaged energy in a varying sound level It is not a direct measure of annoyance though extensive research has shown that Leq correlates well with annoyance Leq is measured directly with any SLM If an A weighting filter is used it is expressed as Laeq the measurement of the equivalent continuous sound level using the A weighted filter network A full range of measurement parameters is given in Appendix B What is the Hand held Analyzer The hand held analyzer is a versatile hardware platform suitable for covering a wide range of different applications Together with Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 it isa Class 1 modular precision integrating averaging sound level analyzer with an easy to use interface for quick and simple measurement setups This highly versatile hand held analyzer platform includes a range of optional software modules that are enabled through easily activated software license keys The combination of software modules and innovative hardware makes the analyzer a dedicated solution for performing all your high precision measurement tasks The following sections are optional software modules covered
65. bands from 160 Hz to 400 Hz with a level difference for a detected tone greater than 8 dB e High frequency range includes the 1 3 octave bands from 500 Hz to 10 kHz with a level difference for a detected tone greater than 5 dB With BZ 7231 software frequency ranges and the limit for the level differences in low middle and high range can be set by the user Tone assessment is carried out for all the measured frequency bands including those below 25 Hzand above 10 kHz The level difference limit is extrapolated from the low and high range to cover the complete measurement range If tones are detected outside the range from 25 Hz to 10 kHz the quality indicator yellow smiley indicates Tone out of ISO range detected ISO 1996 2 Annex D does not specify the size of the adjustment In the default setting of the BZ 7231 Briel amp Kj r has chosen to set the value to 5 dB Calculating the Level Difference Between One Band and the Adjacent Bands BZ 7231 software calculates the level difference between a 1 3 octave band and two adjacent 1 3 octave bands with lower levels The difference is calculated between the band in the middle and the highest of the adjacent bands 174 15 2 Fig 15 2 Example display from Evaluator Type 7820 showing an Li Emin spectrum and loudness level contours 15 1 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Tone Assessment According to Italian Law Tone Assessment in Italy is per
66. be calculated and displayed For 2 channel templates e Single values for display Ch1 Ch 2 Lyeg Ch 2 Ch 1 Lyeg Ch 1 Ch 2 Lyeg Ch 2 Ch 1 Lyeg e Spectra for display SChL Chez Lweg Ch2 Ch 1 Lyeg Total Measurement Accelerometer and Direct Input For Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 Logging Software BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 The following parameters are measured within the Elapsed Time Linear Averaged Levels e Linear Peak Levels e Peak Tpeak 273 274 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Maximum Time weighted Levels e Fast max Slow max Minimum Time weighted Levels e Fast min Slow min General Parameters e e Overload in Start time common to both channels in 2 channel templates Stop Time common to both channels in 2 channel templates Elapsed Time excl pauses common to both channels in 2 channel templates Special Parameters e Linear f1 f2 sum of power values for Linear frequency bands from f1 Hz to f2 Hz Low Frequency Parameters requires low frequency option BZ 7234 and accelerometer input e e e e aw AW crest MTV KBF max KBF rn Peaky Spectrum Parametersa e e e Linear or aW requires low frequency option BZ 7234 and accelerometer input Fast max Slow max Fast min Slow min In addition to the parameters saved within the da
67. can be exported to Predictor LimA Type 7810 Acoustic Determinator Type 7816 Evaluator Type 7820 Protector Type 7825 or Qualifier Light Type 7830 7831 POST PROCESSING Measurement Partner Suite is a suite of modules including post processing tools for data acquired with Type 2250 2270 The following post processing modules are available e Logging Module BZ 5503 A e Spectrum Module BZ 5503 B e WAV File Analysis Module BZ 5503 C These three modules help to assess logging data and measured spectra such as calculating contribution from markers on a logging profile or correcting spectra for background noise TYPE 2250 2270 SOFTWARE UPGRADES AND LICENSES The software controls Type 2250 2270 software upgrades and licensing of the Type 2250 2270 applications INTERFACE TO TYPE 2250 2270 USB LAN or Internet connection USB Connection e Hardware versions 1 3 USB ver 1 1 e Hardware version 4 USB ver 2 0 LICENSE MOVER To move a license from one analyzer to another use BZ 5503 together with License Mover VP 0647 Not all data are available in all exports The data exported are dependent on the type and target of the export LANGUAGE User Interface in Chinese People s Republic of China Chinese Taiwan Croatian Czech Danish English Flemish French German Hungarian Japanese Italian Korean Polish Portuguese Romanian Russian Serbian Slovenian Spanish Swedish Turkish and Ukrainian Order
68. can be included excluded from Room average SOUND LEVEL SPECTRUM LZF spectrum plus A and C broadband bars Y axis Range 5 10 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 or 160 cB Auto zoom or auto scale available Cursor Readout of selected band Quality indicator for each frequency band REVERBERATION TIME SPECTRUM One or two spectra can be displayed Y axis Range 0 5 1 2 5 10 or 20 s Auto zoom available Cursor Readout of selected band Quality Indicator for each frequency band REVERBERATION TIME SPECTRUM TABLE One or two spectra can be displayed in tabular form DECAY Decay curve for a position or the room average available for each frequency band Display of evaluation range and regression line Readout of Curvature in Y axis Range 5 10 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 or 160 dB Auto zoom or auto scale available MEASUREMENT CONTROL Measurement Sequence Supports measuring e at all receiver positions before using another source e at a receiver position for all sources before measuring at a new position e at subsequent receiver positions without source information or e at manually selected source and receiver positions During measurement the instantaneous sound level spectrum is displayed After measurement the reverberation time is displayed Interrupted Noise Excitation Measurements are started manually and can be automatically stored on completion of measurement The noise generator is turned on and off aut
69. card is inserted in the top SD slot USB Mem if a memory stick is inserted in the USB Standard A socket If Multi User is enabled see section 8 1 4 Multi user Facility then each user can access data on any of the devices However a user cannot see or access jobs for other users To go down one level that is exit the Memory level tap the job name Internal Diskin this case and select Open from the drop down list or tap Memory next to Znternal Disk Tap EX to create a new job folder The first job folder name will be Job 01 subsequent job folders will be labelled Job 02 Job 03 etc You can rename the job folder name by tapping on the name and selecting Rename from the drop down list Use the keyboard to key in a new name accept by tapping Enter 4 To go down one level open a job tap the job name in the list and select Open from the drop down list or tap the job folder icon to the left of the job name You can move a job project and its content to another job by tapping the job name project name and selecting Cutfrom the drop down list Then navigate to the job you want as the new holder of the moved job project and tap Paste E or navigate to the level above tap the job name and select Paste from the drop down list In order to copy a job project do as described above but use Copyinstead of Cutfrom the drop down list Select Delete from the drop down list in order to delete the job project and all of its conte
70. cccccscccosessieeesesdedcscdesdecusosesssiscccdecdsedsslsssslsccds cosstdestssesccesdsssecsdechdssssescddesesbatsissises 203 APPENDIX A Setup Para meteis ccccssecccsscccsseeccsecccesccneesccnececesseeceseesesseseenconenscouecscosessonseesensesessecuensess 223 Ao INPUT a e eaaa a a aa e a o aaa a inaia 224 A2 Frequency SettihgS cenieni aroe ieii e aeaaea na inaia oak AAAA TENE iaaa atA Aiia tarer 227 A3 Statistics aonn e e nathan even a E A R e Peden e e vatMvedderent 229 A 4 Measurement Control for BZ 7222 to BZ 7225 ccccccssssceceesnececeeeecesseeeecesaeeeceeaaeeeeseeeeeees 230 A 5 Measurement Control for Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 cccsssceceesteceeseeeees 233 A6 Logged Broadband 1O0 MS siccccsvaeecdecseveccuenedecvdeseceey cite veer eves ever edee suntesde dev evese cade Sout dea vanteveeres 235 AT Logged Broddband si ccvcececccnsesa coors cxunategcsievees cee dgeies eracauncescePecntenncedacaiedea ctenssaiederncreedecoe sees A8 Logged SPECTRUM s 5 caseesMevsedaceebice vuekaccaceebsiienacdobeab bevastedtsedemebedneatsdotecbbednchedochebsavecseaastalnaste BS MarKensiees som scans E E A E AAO Level Trig pe tivacecescccvcstccxcvetesxstcedecuciesecct a e i i e i aa a ii ea ia ea a PTD Trigger eei e e Ea i E a a E E AEE aE EEEE A PA S a T E EE E E E E E EA E E ETE trees oh a E Signal SA Na E E A E A EE E A EA A 14 Output Socket Signal A 15 Lgen Periods 00 esses A 16 Occupational Health
71. cccceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeeees Add Note to Current Measurement eeee Adding Comments on Profiles a Adding Notes on Profiles cece eeeeeeeee Adjust Gain of Annotation Advanced use of the Analyzer Tips ANG TICKS cviscecces iiipin Alarm Settings cecceceeseeceeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeaes Alhambra Colour Scheme Alternative Measurement Method eeeeeeeee 16 Analyzer ASSOMDIING cccceesesescsccceseesscttoesssceesneesseneosses Basic Principles 0 0 eee eee een eeeeeeneeeeaees Cleaning eiaa aa Components Display Get to Know Handling Instructions Storing ee Analyzer Parameters Analyzer Reset e cece eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeee Annotating Gs PIOJOCE cas secs Sevsusteeditessecteheavner aA aaa the Profile during Measurement 322 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Annotations oo eee eect ceee cece eee eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeee 64 Editing iign 134 Gain Adjustment 85 In Reverberation TiMe sesesseserreerrerereees 159 Inserting Annotations Using Explorer w 65 Inserting Using Explorer 00 w 65 Paperclip Icon 41 Profile nases 127 Sound Categories seeren 133 Viewing or Listening to uu eee eeeeeeeeeees 64 Annotations Icon ue AQ 0440 i niani era en ees AQ 065 72 4 ci Jad e N a aE AQ 0697 i isnende AO 0697 Microphone Extension Cable AO 0
72. cece eeeeeeseeeeaeeseeeeeaeeeaes 17 Outdoor Microphone Kit cccceceeeeeeeteeeees 16 WINASCIEEN ee eeeceeeeteceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeaeeeteeaeeeeenaeeeess 15 Mounting Thread For Wrist Strap ceceeceeseseeseeeeeeseeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeaes 6 MAp Sa tte A ices sctuaceaascttas ainecestieaS Seatiensns bette T 6 Moving Equivalent Continuous Sound Level 33 313 Moving Jobs Projects MP Cloud zahi aea i t N Navigating in JODS eee cee ceeeeneeeeeeeeseeteneeeaes 62 Navigation Principles Star Navigation Concept eeceeeeeereeteereeees 37 Navigation PUSNDUttONS ceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 5 44 NC Decisive Band Parameter eeeeeeee 273 Definition NG Parameter ies t evireviccrestatavteviretata Defvinition accra Alan ain NCB Classification Parameter Definition iharaira NCB Parameter c ccccccccceesseeessseeeeseeeeseee Definition Network Connection Network Settings Parameters aee aa New Applications How to Install ThEM ccccecseeceeeessssteeeeeeeees 103 New User Set Up cc cecceceseeeceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneees 84 Next Calibration Date ccccccccceeeceeeseeeeeeeeteeeees 58 Night Colour Scheme ceceeceeceeneereeteeeeeeteeeeeeeee 80 NMT Server Settings 307 No Windscreen Fitted Diffuse Field Icon we 42 No Windscreen Fitted Free field ICOn cseeee 42 No Windscreen ICON
73. current project see section 6 1 1 Tap it to open the Explorer To change the path navigate to the desired job path and tap the icon to save this path as the default measurement path As in the project template will appear next to the project name to indicate that the project has not been saved Press the Save pushbutton amp if you want to save the measurement or changed settings Smiley if applicable PC B connected to Measurement Partner Suite BZ 5503 via USB or a network connection LAN connected to a network through an Ethernet cable Wi Fi 3 connected to a network via Wi Fi 9 indicates a lost connection Commentary spoken commentary is being recorded together with an indication of the available recording time Recording 59 measurement signal is being recorded Paperclip an annotation is attached to the project Tap the icon to go to the Annotations screen 42 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Second Line e Measurement state represented as icons Stopped m Running gt and Paused e Elapsed time of the measurement e Feedback on the action of pressing the following pushbuttons Reset Back erase 2 Start Pause and Save amp e Indication that the measurement microphone is uncalibrated In this case the word Uncal appears in the Status Field Six icons are used to represent whether or not and accelerometer or microphone is used weather a windscr
74. data are uploaded using an encrypted HTTPS connection and are immediately available for post processing by authorized users For more information on data sharing and post processing see Measurement Partner Suite BZ 5503 Online Help 66 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 6 4 1 Connecting the Analyzer to MP Cloud In order to be able to connect an analyzer to MP Cloud you must have An MP Cloud account cloud bksv com e An Internet connection LAN Wi Fi etc see Chapter 7 Connect an Analyzer to MP Cloud You can connect the analyzer to the cloud directly on the analyzer or set up the connection remotely using Measurement Partner Suite BZ 5503 To set up the connection using Measurement Partner Suite see Measurement Partner Suite BZ 5503 Online Help To connect directly through the analyzer 1 Connect to the Internet Chapter 7 2 Tap Cloud fi in the Shortcut bar then MP Cloud Fig 6 4 The Cloud icon 60 20 20 00 00 00 00 00 50 B You can also navigate to the MP Cloud settings by tapping Main Menu EG gt Preferences gt MP Cloud 3 Tap Account and select Logged in Instructions shown in Fig 6 5 will pop up Fig 6 5 First MP Cloud login instructions 4 Navigate to cloud bksv com using an Internet browser and log in INFORMATION First log in to your MP Cloud account on cloud bksv com using an Internet browser to pair the account with this instrument using the se
75. disassemble or expose battery pack to fire or water Caution Use specified battery charger only Charging below 0 C 32 F is not recommended If you charge the battery pack below 0 C the lifetime of the batteries will be reduced Do not charge battery pack in temperatures above 60 C 12 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Battery Charge Indicator See item 7 in Fig 2 2 G1 3 analyzers or Fig 2 3 G4 analyzers A battery charge light LED indicates when the battery pack is being charged from external power e WithG1 3 analyzers The LED is a steady green light when external power is applied and the battery is charging and a flashing green light when charging has finished e With G4 analyzers The LED is red when external power is applied and the battery is charging green when the battery is completely charged and blue to indicate that the unit is in stand by and battery powered Reset Button See item 8 in Fig 2 2 G1 3 analyzers or Fig 2 3 G4 analyzers Located above the USB connector it is used to reset the analyzer if you have problems with the analyzer and cannot get it to operate To reset press the button with the point of the stylus see chapter 9 for troubleshooting Slot for CompactFlash CF Cards Hardware versions 1 3 only See item 9 in Fig 2 2 This slot accepts CF sized cards and can be used for memory or for example a modem Slot for Secure Digital SD
76. field where you type in the Project Name Prefix will appear at the top or bottom of the pop up keyboard depending on how many settings you have expanded in the list The project suffix number will be generated automatically Fig 8 7 Storage Settings screen 8 1 5 CHAPTER 8 85 Advanced Use of the Analyzer Tips and Tricks 12 01 12 Headphone Settings The Headphones allow you to control the output to the headphone socket on the connector panel Commentary annotations on measurements can always be heard on the headphones regardless of the options chosen in Headphones In addition to the commentary annotations you can listen to the measured signal for monitoring purposes Select between A4 B weighted C weighted or Z weighted A B weighting is determined by setting the parameter in Setup gt Frequency Settings gt Broadband excl peak The measured signal covers approximately 120 dB from approximately 20 dB to 140 dB witha Type 4189 or Type 4190 microphone of nominal sensitivity The output of the headphone socket covers approximately 75 dB Use Gain for Meas signa to adjust the output level to suit the listening conditions If the signal has a very high dynamic range or the levels are unknown you can set Automatic Gain Control to On this will convert the 120 dB input range to 40 dB output range enabling you to hear signals of any level clearly Individual gain settings are provided for the commentary annot
77. i The XL View tab increases the size of the first parameter readout to a 4 digit full screen display including decimal point The Spectrum tab which only appears as a tab if Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 is enabled shows two different spectra parameters being measured simultaneously In the example in Fig 10 2 Lzfmax and Lzp are being viewed at the same time Please note The Reference Spectrum i and Main Spectrum at icons indicate which spectrum belongs to which parameter 1 Select which spectra to view by tapping the parameter fields in the two lines above the spectrum display These lines also include readouts of the spectrum values highlighted by the spectrum cursor Tap the spectrum at the frequency of interest or just tap anywhere in the spectrum area and then move the cursor to the position of interest using the Left and Right arrow pushbuttons To the right of the spectrum two broadband bars of the same parameters are also displayed Fig 10 2 Displaying the results spectrum screen Bandwidth 1 3 octave Start Time 29 11 2006 13 29 15 Spectrum Asia te Ege q 7 2 Adjust the X axis the horizontal frequency axis below the graphical display by tapping on the scale and accessing the drop down menu Fig 10 3 e use Set Lower Display Limit to set the lower frequency limit of the X axis e use Set Higher Display Limit to set the upper frequency limit of the X axis e use Reset Display R
78. impulses while the analyzer is placed on atripod at one receiver position Receivers Firstis best for Interrupted Noise excitation you can move the analyzer between the receiver positions while the sound source remains in the same place The Overview tab will then look like Fig 14 11 Fig 14 11 REVERBERATION TIME Overview tab showing CF Card NT Project 010 one source and one i receiver position Spectrum Decay y 16 56 24 Note the Add Source Fig and Add Receiver icons on the headline for the map Tap Eto add new sources and tap fj to add new receivers on the map 165 166 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Fig 14 12 REVERBERATION TIME Overview tab showing two sources and three receiver positions wm A730 lt 1 25 kHz gt You can move the sources or receivers on the map by tapping on the source receiver see Fig 14 13 select Move from the drop down menu that appears then tap at the position where you want the source receiver see Fig 14 14 Fig 14 13 REVERBERATION TIME Tap a source to get a drop down with options Spectrum Decay 7 17 11 19 CHAPTER 14 Reverberation Time Software Optional Module 167 Fig 14 14 REVERBERATION TIME Sources and receivers moved to places on the map in accordance with their physical lt 1 25 kHz gt position ina room The dark green fields on the map indicate the selected Source Receiver relation The next measurement will be
79. including Preamplifier ZC 0032 is normally connected directly to this connector If required however one of two microphone extension cables AO 0697 D 030 3 m or AO 0697 D 100 10 m can be fitted between the input stage and the main microphone input socket to extend the distance to the desired length For Type 2270 the microphone is connected to input Channel 1 In addition you can use the Dual 10 pole Adaptor JP 1041 for accessing both input Channel 1 and input Channel 2 USB Interface See item 1 in Fig 2 2 G1 3 analyzers or items 1 and 11 in Fig 2 3 G4 analyzers The USB Interface provides high speed direct communication with your PC s USB port to synchronize measurement and setup data e G1 3 analyzers Use the supplied Mini USB Cable AO 1476 e G4 analyzers Use the supplied Micro USB Cable AO 1494 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Connect to a Wi Fi Network via USB G4 Only Insert Wi Fi dongle UL 1050 into the standard USB Type A socket item 13 Fig 2 3 on the analyzer to connect to Wi Fi network See section 8 3 1 for more information Connect to a Printer via USB For G1 3 analyzers use the supplied Adaptor AO 0657 to connect to a printer that supports PCL language via the USB socket ForG4 analyzers use the standard USB Type A socket item 13 Fig 2 3 on the analyzer to connect to printers or other external USB devices See section 8 1 6 for more information printe
80. marker will only indicate this part Please note When selecting an interval for storing or setting a marker the profile display freezes but the signal recording is still updated in the internal buffer The part of the buffer available on the screen will decrease and you will see the small triangle move to the right Be sure not to wait too long in selecting the Sound markerfrom the drop down menu otherwise the signal recording will disappear from the internal buffer 13 2 4 Playing the Recording You playback the sound simply by selecting part of the marker as described in section 11 3 3 and choose Play Sound from the resulting drop down menu The following drop down menu will then appear Fig 13 2 147 148 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Fig 13 2 LOGGING Playing the P recording the drop down menu Select one of the four ways of playing a sound Se ectionwill play the part you have selected Repeat Selection will play the selected part until you press Cance on the pop up menu 7o End will play the sound from the position you selected the sound marker to the end and finally A will play the entire signal recording regardless of your selection point Fig 13 3 Playing the recording output level pop up When you have selected the method of play back a pop up appears explaining how to adjust the output level in the headphone and how to stop the play back Tap the Minimize ico
81. measured parameter exceeds a preset level BZ 7224 and BZ 7225 only The recorded signal can be played back and listened to using the supplied Earphones HT 0015 The signal is recorded directly to the SD memory card or CF card if using G1 3 analyzers Requires Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 CHAPTER 4 35 Getting to Know Your Analyzer 4 2 6 Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 This software module allows measurement of reverberation time using Impulsive excitation and backwards integration of the impulse or using Interrupted Noise from the built in noise generator Measurements can be made in a number of positions in the room and the average reverberation time for the room is calculated 4 2 7 2 channel Option BZ 7229 Type 2270 only This option allows a number of software modules to measure two channels simultaneously e Sound Level Meter BZ 7222 Frequency Analysis BZ 7223 Logging BZ 7224 Enhanced Logging BZ 7225 and Building Acoustics Software BZ 7228 modules e Signal Recording Option BZ 7226 will be able to record in both channels of a two channel measurement 4 2 8 Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 This option allows the assessment of tones on site according to selected methods The option described in this manual is based on the 1 3 octave method Please refer to User Manual BE 1778 for detailed information about tone assessment based on FFT spectra When used with BZ 7223 Frequency Analysis BZ 7224 Logging
82. measurement This includes of course overload indications you would like to erase If used when the current measurement is running then the measurement will be paused The Status Field displays Pause Back erase briefly and then displays the shortened elapsed time along with the Paused icon For BZ 7224 and BZ 7225 Software Pressing the Back erase pushbutton will start drawing an Exclude Marker on the display see section 11 3 2 Pressing it again will stop drawing the marker on the display toggle function 4 5 4 On screen Feedback and Traffic Light Feedback is given on screen in the Status Field Fig 4 2 and the Traffic Light indicates important states of the analyzer Table 4 1 Table 4 1 State Light Scheme Traffic Light Indications During power on or loading template Nothing E Stopped Ready to measure Short yellow flash every 5 s b Awaiting trigger searching for Short green flash every second calibration signal gt Running measurement Steady green light everything OK Paused Measurement not saved Slow yellow flash on 1 2 s off 1 2 s A Overload Fast red flash 4 5 5 Use of Stylus and Navigation Pushbuttons The stylus and navigation pushbuttons are used for setting up the analyzer navigating through the screens and managing the results CHAPTER 4 45 Getting to Know Your Analyzer Anumber of items that appear on the screen parameter values or icons can be selected upd
83. min averaging time and one with 1 hour averaging time Charge Injection On Set to Onfor making a CIC at the start and end of Logging An Calibration Exclude marker is set on the profile and 7ota parameters are Off not updated during the CIC Available for microphone input only Daily CIC None Determines whether CID is performed one to four times a day or not at all An Exclude marker is set on the profile and Periodic Reports and Total parameters are not updated during the calibration The results are saved together with the Total parameters Three times Available for microphone input only Once Twice Four times 231 232 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Table A 4 Cont Measurement Control parameters for BZ 7222 to BZ 7225 Parameter Values Comment First Check 00 00 00 to Set time of day for first CIC check 23 59 59 i Please note The Check times must be separated from each other by at least one minute They should also differ by at least one minute from the time set in the Save Project Data at parameter Available for microphone input only Second Check 00 00 00 to Set time of day for second CIC check 23 59 59 Available for microphone input only Third Check 00 00 00 to Set time of day for third CIC check 23 59 59 Available for microphone input only Fourth Check 00 00 00 to Set time of day for fourth CIC check 23 59 59 Available for microp
84. on the screen The logged data are displayed as two profiles The Profile Overview with the entire profile and the Profile with 100 logging samples The Profile Overview An overview of the entire profile is displayed across the screen on the topmost part of the graph area The overview is based on Lyegis X A or B depending on the Frequency Settings gt Broadband excl Peak setting The Y axis is auto zoomed When you have logged for more than 4 minutes then each pixel on the X axis will cover more than 1 s The overview will then display from the minimum Lyeg1 to the maximum Lyxeq 1s within the interval covered by the pixels on the X axis Tap in the Profile Overview to select the part of the entire profile to display in the Profile below The Profile The Profile displays a hundred samples of the logged data Select which parameter to view by tapping the parameter field in the line above the profile 129 130 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Markers are displayed between the profile and the profile parameter Marker 1 Exclude is the topmost positioned marker The name of the marker is displayed if the marker overlaps the cursor position If a signal has been recorded then a Sound Marker Marker 6 is displayed above the profile the marker covers exactly the time of the signal recording You can browse through markers using the J buttons in the profile The whole or any part of the signal record
85. pushbutton to reset a measurement that is to reset all detectors averagers maximum and minimum hold etc If the measurement is paused Paused is displayed in the status field then the measurement reverts to a stopped state after a reset Stopped W is displayed with a zeroed readout If the measurement is running then the measurement will be automatically restarted after the reset Start Pause Pushbutton Use the Start Pause pushbutton for controlling the measurement The function of this key depends on the current measurement state Table 4 1 Table 4 1 C reni Start Pause Function of Next Measurement Measurement pushbutton functions State Start Pause Pushbutton State E Stopped Start the measurement gt Running gt Running Pause the measurement Paused Paused Continue the measurement gt Running 44 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Save Pushbutton Use the Save pushbutton amp to save the measurement data together with the current project template including all the screen settings and setup information and the calibration documentation Pressing Save will affect the pause and running states In both cases the measurement state will be stopped shortly after pressing the pushbutton Stopped icon m displayed Back erase Pushbutton For BZ 7222 and BZ 7223 Software Use the Back erase pushbutton to erase the last 5 seconds completely from the
86. recognized your analyzer and connect 7 4 automatically However the smartphone may assign a differentIP address to the analyzer If so repeat steps 5 and 6 to connect Internet Browser for Online Display and Control of the Analyzer When the analyzer is connected to a network see Fig 7 2 you can connect to the analyzer from a PC or smartphone using an Internet browser supporting JavaScript Analyzer Settings You access preferences by tapping on Main Menu gt Preferences the screen shown in Fig 8 1 will appear Tap Remote Access or select next to Remote Access and set the Web Server parameters to Enabled Define sets of User Names and Passwords e One set for guest use view only e One set for administrator use of the analyzer view and full control See section 8 5 and section D 11 for more details Connect to Analyzer When you enter the Paddressor host name of the analyzer see sections 8 2 and 8 3 inthe address or location bar of the Internet browser the following screen appears CHAPTER 7 75 Connection to PC or Smartphone or Measurement Partner Field App Fig 7 2 eee we poiddwindamesw Sloe Type 2250 home page GOW E http bkflemmingathome dyndns org X 4 X Google 2 l de http ektiemmingathome dyndns org fh gt B ey Ey Page v G Tools v Briel amp Kj r We help our customers improve the quality o sound and vibration and related human comfort Downlo
87. s 52 ViDration Eea E ase eeshs cee ices 55 Calibration Interval ccccccccesssecessssecessseeeessseeeess 58 Calibration REMINdEe ccccccccsscceessecesseeeessteeeens 57 Calibration Reminder Tab cccccssccessseccesseeeees 57 Calibration Setup eee eeceesssccesesseeeeeeseeeneeeeeeeeaees 289 Calibrator So nd Level tosissanne 52 Camera Camera Icon Card Slot CR ec eevee ee eS ts SA 8 Care Cleaning and Storage s es 112 GFCards 22350 fe 2co cscs ANA Recommended Troubleshooting Character Keyboard Charge Injection Calibration Parameter 534 Charging the Battery for the First Time CCa meee cer eeeerre pe reer eee ere 58 127 138 THEON innin aaia ari eias 58 With Active Level Trigger ssesesereererneee 138 CIC Ratio 58 59 GIC Refs Date iie snini iaa 59 CIC Reference Ratio ccccccccsccccsseceessseceesseeeeessees 59 CIC Result Parameters ni niron i Ra 265 CIC Result 1 CIC Result 2 CIC Result 4 Cleaning the Analyzer s e 112 Clock Display ieira naa aana 43 Cloud Gold St ren iaai 20 Colour SCHEMES c ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeaes 80 Commentary Icon z Commentary Pushbutton cece eee eeeeeeeee 5 26 Comment icc aaa r dete wes 64 Adding on Profiles z MICrOPNONGE eeeeseseesseeseseeeserseseteseesonsensaetseesonee 5 Compact Flash Gard SIO easar ait
88. saved The next line contains icons for saving the settings Tap Save E to save the settings in the current template Tap Save As 9 to save the settings in a new template Use the keyboard that pops up to define the name of the template The rest of the screen is used for listing the defined templates with an icon a template name and possibly an Annotations icon paperclip 1 Tap a template icon to open and use the template 2 Tap a template name to get a drop down list with the options Open open and use the selected template Clone create a copy of the selected template Delete delete the selected template Rename rename the selected template Add Note or commentary to the template View Annotations on the template 3 Tap Paperclip to get the list of annotations attached to the project The Full tab at the bottom of the screen allows you to view the complete list of project templates while the Quick tab allows you to access the more frequently used project templates Tap Edit on top of the screen to enter Edit Mode This mode allows you to copy parameters from the Full tab view to the Quick tab simply by tapping on the parameters in the Full tab and to remove parameters from the Quick tab by tapping on the parameters on the Quick tab 50 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual When you have finished tap the Edit again to exit Edit Mode Please note e Annotations on tem
89. set the division between the Low and Middle frequency range the division between the Middle and High frequency range and the limits for the level differences between adjacent bands For tone assessment according to DM 16 03 1998 the tones are tested against loudness contours Select between ISO 226 1987 Free field 1987 Diffuse field and 2003 Free field RESULTS Tones are indicated above the spectrum when Tone is selected as spectrum parameter The resulting adjustment can be viewed on the Value panel It is not saved with the measurement QUALITY INDICATORS On the display a quality indicator smiley will indicate that a hint is available for tone assessment quality Click on the indicator to see the hint Software Specifications Low Frequency Option BZ 7234 Low Frequency Option BZ 7234 is enabled with a separate license It adds G weighting and Building Vibration parameters to Sound Level Meter Frequency Analysis Logging and Enhanced Logging Software and adds low frequency 1 1 and 1 3 octave analysis to Frequency Analysis Logging and Enhanced Logging Software G weighting Specifications for G weighting apply to Type 2250 2270 fitted with one of the microphone Types 4193 or 4964 both with or without the Low Frequency Adaptor UC 0211 and Microphone Preamplifier ZC 0032 Standards Conforms with the following National and International Standards e ISO 7196 1995 e ANSI 1 42 2001 R2011 Analysis DE
90. the Frequency Settings Low Frequency Low Frequency Option On parameter set to On Low Frequency Broadband excl Peak Linear Wm Broadband Peak wm Spectrum Linear Bandwidth 1 3 octave Bottom F for Special Leq 20 Hz Top Freq for Special Leq 200 Hz Measurement Control Units Signal Recording 5 Set Low Frequency to Extended 6 Set Broadband excl Peak to LinearWm simultaneous measurement with the two frequency weightings Linear and Wm Broadband Peak to Wm 7 Frequency Analyzer module only Set Spectrum Weighting to Linear or Wm as required 8 Tap Main Menu gt Units gt Engineering Unit and select Wo in dB or Yes in m s Please note If you want readouts in g instead of m s tap the Main Menu Eq gt Preferences gt Vibration Unit and select US UK 9 Tap EJ to exit CHAPTER 17 Low Frequency Option BZ 7234 17 4 1 Controlling the Measurement The measurement is controlled in the same way you would control a normal Sound Level Meter measurement using Start Pause Continue Back erase and Reset pushbuttons see Chapter 3 for more details 17 4 2 Displaying the Results Tap on the broadband result readouts to select parameters from the Low Frequency group to select the building vibration results Fig 17 6 Fig 17 6 FREQUENCY ANALYZER Selection of Low Frequency building vibration results 1 8s Inst 5 92m m s TT 31 62y 31 17 5 Setting Up the Frequency Anal
91. the states Fu or Charging if externally powered Entering one of the set states might then indicate a power failure Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual space drops to or below a specified percentage of the total disk space Trigger Input WhenvoltageatTrigger Indicates no external power or external battery getting low Voltage Input drops to or below Set Setup gt Input gt Trigger Type to Voltage for Monitoring a specified level Set the voltage limit in Preferences gt Notifications gt Alarm Settings gt Trigger Input Voltage Connect the external battery or external power to this input in addition to the External Power Socket to get an alarm if the voltage drops to or below the specified level Disk Space When remaining disk Indicates disk space getting low needs to be swapped with an empty disk Set the percentage in Preferences gt Notifications gt Alarm Settings gt Disk Space Level Trigger When level trigger conditions are fulfilled Indicates sound level exceeds trigger level specified in LOGGING or ENH LOGGING template Report Level When Laeq Of the latest Report Period exceeds Report Threshold Level Indicates that the sound level Lae for the latest Report Period exceeds Report Threshold Level Please note e Ifyou specify a very low Report Threshold Level you will receive a notification at the end of each Report Period e Onl
92. the Compact Flash slot hardware versions 1 3 e the USB Standard A Socket hardware version 4 Supports DynDNS for automatic update of IP address of host name PRINTER INTERFACE PCL printers Mobile Pro Spectrum thermal printer or Seiko DPU S245 S445 thermal printers can be connected to USB socket MICROPHONE FOR COMMENTARY Microphone which utilizes Automatic Gain Control AGC is incorporated in underside of analyzer Used to create voice annotations for attaching to measurements CAMERA TYPE 2270 ONLY Camera with fixed focus and automatic exposure is incorporated in underside of analyzer Used to create image annotations for attaching to measurements Image Size e Hardware versions 1 3 640 x 480 pixels e Hardware version 4 2048 x 1536 pixels Viewfinder Size 212 x 160 pixels Format jpg with exif information Inputs Outputs COMPACTFLASH SOCKET Hardware Version 1 to 3 only Connection of CF memory card CF modem CF to serial interface CF Ethernet interface or CF WLAN interface SECURE DIGITAL SOCKET e 1 x SD socket for hardware versions 1 3 e 2 x SD sockets for hardware version 4 Connect SD and SDHC memory cards LAN INTERFACE SOCKET Hardware Versions 1 to 3 Type 2270 only e Connector RJ45 MDI e Speed 10 Mbps e Protocol TCP IP Hardware Version 4 Types 2250 and 2270 e Connector RJ45 Auto MDIX e Speed 100 Mbps e Protocol TCP IP INPUT SOCKET 2 TYPE 2270 ONLY Connector Triaxial
93. the frequency Input and statistics Frequency Settings parameters Low Frequency Option off Low Frequency Normal Bandwidth 1 3 octave Bottom F for Special Leq 20 Hz Top Freq for Special Leq 200 Hz Channels Ch 1 Ch 2 BB ex Peak AZ A Z BB Peak A A Spectrum A A Statistics Measurement Control z 16 3 1 Controlling the Measurement The measurement is controlled in the same way you would control a normal Sound Level Meter measurement using Start Pause Continue 4 Back erase 2 and Reset pushbuttons see Chapter 3 for more details The two channels are controlled and measured simultaneously thus some of the housekeeping parameters are common for the two channels e g Start Time and Elapsed Time 187 188 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 16 3 2 Displaying the Results The results are displayed as bar graphs and measurement parameters on the Measurement screen in three tabs Spectrum Broadband or XL View Extra Large by selecting the appropriate tab Fig 16 6 Fig 16 6 Displaying the results Spectrum Broadband and XL Ch 1 LAF Ch 1 LAF Mp m I 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Ch 2 LAF 46 1 dB LLLI l al l l 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Ch 1 T 63 1 dB Ch 2 LAeq pea oe 63 1 dB Ch 1 LAFmax 80 8 dB Ch 2 LAFmax 77 7 dB ae 59 6 dB Preset Time 00 00 30 Spectrum XL Vie 20 40 60 Ch 2 LAF i Spectrum Broadband EXI t x 21 27 06 t 21 30 52
94. the list to cancel the selection Pushbutton Usage Use the Navigation pushbuttons Up Arrow 1 or Down Arrow 1 to select the value you want and press the Accept pushbutton v gt to activate it Use the Left Arrow to cancel the selection 46 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Number Keyboard When activating a number a number keyboard appears Fig 4 4 Fig 4 4 SOUND LEVEL METER Number keyboard LAF l l l l 20 40 60 80 100 120 Tap the digits or use Up Arrow i Down Arrow T to increment decrement the number Use Left Arrow Right Arrow to select other digits if necessary Press the Accept pushbutton or tap Y on the number keyboard to enter the number for the parameter Tap IX on the number keyboard or outside the number keyboard to cancel the change of value Character Keyboard When activating a text value a standard full character keyboard appears on the screen Fig 4 5 Fig 4 5 TRANSDUCERS Character keyboard ia Yi 4189 1234567 CHAPTER 4 Getting to Know Your Analyzer BE The character keyboard has all the functionality of a normal keyboard enter text as required by tapping the individual keys with the stylus Tap 4 to accept the changes or tap outside the keyboard to cancel 4 5 7 How to Personalise your Setup Setup contains all the settings for the measurement and some settings for post processing Tap Main Menu Eq gt Setup Fig 4 6 Fig 4 6 T
95. the position where you want the annotation to start This will freeze the display and display a cursor at the position of the stylus Then drag the stylus a little to the left or right and raise it again A drop down menu appears and below the five markers you can select Add Comment or Add Note or Add Imageto add a spoken comment or write a note or capture an image When finished the Comment or Note or Image is inserted in the profile the cursors disappear and the profile unfreezes and progresses as before tapping on the screen Annotating While the Measurement is Paused The measurement parameter is displayed as a profile while the measurement is paused Use of Stylus to Annotate the Sound Tap and hold the stylus in the profile display at the position where you want the marker to start This will display a cursor at the position of the stylus Next drag the stylus a little to the left or right and remove the stylus from the display A drop down menu appears and below the five markers you can select Add Comment Add Note or Add Image Type 2270 only to add a spoken comment 134 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual write a note or capture an image When finished the Comment Note or Image is inserted in the profile and the cursors disappear Use of Pushbuttons Using the Commentary pushbutton during a pause means that the comment annotation will be added to the project instead of the profile The annotations can be view
96. the threaded stud on the tripod ball joint and position the holder as required 3 Push the microphone and preamplifier combination carefully into the microphone holder so that it grips onto the body of the microphone and preamplifier Ensure that the microphone cable sits properly in the plastic guide You are ready to start measuring see Chapter 3 2 5 4 Measuring for Convenience Measurements that need to be done at short notice with no particular accuracy can be carried out by simply holding the analyzer or using any combination of hardware components and accessories shown in Fig 2 4 2 5 5 Measuring Using Accelerometers For vibration measurements you need an accelerometer as the measurement transducer The accelerometer is connected to the rear socket of the analyzer Please refer to Chapter 3 of FFT Analysis Software User Manual BE 1778 for detailed information about selecting the right accelerometer and how to mount it correctly 18 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual J 19 Chapter 3 Making your First Measurement This chapter describes e Point and shoot measurements e Basic measurements e Saving your data e Documenting the results It assumes you have just received your analyzer and are turning it on for the first time If the analyzer has been used before and the previous user has initiated the Multi user Facility then the screens that are displayed may not follow the sequence describe
97. trigger conditions are fulfilled when level crosses Stop Level in accordance with Start Slope for at least Stop Duration seconds set Stop Level here Stop Duration 0 to 420 s Stop trigger conditions are fulfilled when level crosses Stop Level in accordance with Start Slope for at least Stop Duration seconds set Stop Duration here Table A 10 Cont Level Trigger parameters APPENDIX A Setup Parameters Values continue on next page Parameter Values Comment Parameter Microphone Select which parameter to monitor for the level LXeq trigger The parameter is based on 1 second LYeq measurements and checked every second regardless LAeq T1 mov of the logging period and logged parameters LAeq T2 mov o L a X frequency weightings A or B controlled by LGeq Setup gt Frequency Settings gt BB ex peak LG10max parameter LG10min LVpeak Y frequency weightings C or Z controlled by LXFmax Setup gt Frequency Settings gt BB ex peak SS parameter LYFmax LY Smax V frequency weightings A B C or Z controlled by LYImax Setup gt Frequency Settings gt BB Peak parameter LXFmin LXSmin LXImin Please note The parameter values shown are for LYFmin single channel templates For 2 channel templates LYSmin Type 2270 only the values are available for both LYImin Ch 1 and Ch 2 LXF SPL LXS SPL LXI SPL LYF SPL LYS SPL LYI SPL 241 242 Hand held Analyzer Ty
98. using just one single shot Setting up the Analyzer 1 Select the REVERBERATION TIME project template see section 3 2 1 for more details on templates The project template is displayed at the top of the screen 2 Tap Main Menu gt Setup Set the Bandwidth and Bottom and Top Frequency of the measurement as required 3 Set Map Based Measurement voin the Measurement Control setup the reverberation decays will then be numbered from Pos 1 to N See how to measure with position management in section 14 2 1 4 Set Automatic Save Wo if you want to inspect the reverberation time and decays before manually saving the measurement otherwise select Yes to automatically save the decays after each measurement 5 Set Measurement Mode to Parallel for measuring all bands in a spectrum simultaneously Serial for measuring selected bands only to be saved and merged with a previously measured Parallel spectrum Combined for measuring Parallel and then Serial in an automated sequence When doing the Serial measurement the bandwidth of the generator will match the selected band thus increasing the output power for the band and increasing the signal to noise ratio for the band 6 The analyzer automatically detects the decay time and stops the measurement at the end of the decay however under special conditions for example when measuring with high background noise the decay time cannot be detected and the
99. weighted acceleration or voltage value averaged over the entire measurement period with frequency weighting Linear 315 316 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual LGeq LGpea k L610 LG10omax LGiomin MTVV CPeaks gt 140dB NC NC Decisive Band The G weighted equivalent continuous noise level used to assess infrasound Maximum peak sound level with G weighting Instantaneous time weighted sound level with G weighting and 10 s exponential time constant Maximum time weighted sound level measured with G weighting and 10 s exponential time constant Minimum time weighted sound level measured with G weighting and 10 s exponential time constant ay expressed in dB with reference 10 m s Maximum of the aw 1s values The number of 1 s peak sound levels over 140 dB C denotes that the C frequency weighting is used Three peak counters are available one with a user definable value set to 140 dB by default one with 137 dB and one with 135 dB value Used for assessing possible damage to human hearing caused by very high short duration noise levels The European Noise at Work Directive 2003 10 EC defines the following limit and action values Limit Value 140 dB corresponding to 200 Pa Upper Action Value 137 dB corresponding to 140 Pa Lower Action Value 135 dB corresponding to 112 Pa Noise Criteria is used to rate steady state continuous noise in a room from all types of
100. with the stylus on the screen seems to be getting more inaccurate you can adjust the touch sensitive screen as follows 1 Tap Main Menu Eq gt Preferences gt Display 2 Tap Adjust Touch Screen and follow the on screen instructions CHAPTER 9 109 Updating and Upgrading Applications Maintenance Calibration and Troubleshooting 9 4 5 Reset Options Reset Button Caution Unsaved data or setups will be lost when you reset the analyzer If your analyzer stops responding to pushbutton presses or taps reset and reboot the analyzer by pressing the Reset button located on the connector panel see section 2 2 with the stylus If you still experience problems try resetting your analyzer as described below Analyzer Reset 1 Reset the analyzer to a default factory installed state For G1 3 analyzers Reset the analyzer to a default state where the user is set to 2250 for Type 2250 and 2270 for Type 2270 and the project template is set to SOUND LEVEL METER The existing SOUND LEVEL METER project template will be overwritten as will the preferences for user 2250 or 2270 To reset the analyzer to the default state a Press and hold the Power on pushbutton for at least five seconds powers off b Press and hold down the Commentary and Save amp pushbuttons while switching on the analyzer The display in Fig 9 3 will be shown Fig 9 3 Maintenance Mode initial screen for G1 3 analyzers Maintenance
101. you need most that is those you will need to perform save and document your measurements Tapping Main Menu allows you to navigate to e Explorer e Add Note to Current Measurement e Setup e Add Image to Current Measurement e Preferences Type 2270 only e Transducers e Template Explorer e Calibration e Timer Setup In addition Main Menu Ej also allows you to perform the following actions e Lock Keys and Screen e Log Off Explorer The Explorer screen is accessed by tapping Main Menu eq gt Explorer or by tapping the project name and gives you access to the analyzer s Data Project Manager This allows you to view the overall project structure including job folders and projects and to view all the individual measurements When you have finished tap J to return to the Measurement screen You can tap any measurement file to open the saved measurement and if there are any voice text or image annotations attached these can be viewed by tapping Paperclip visible next to all measurement files with attachments When you have finished reading listening or viewing the attachments tap EJ to return to the Explorer screen Setup The Setup screen is accessed by tapping Main Menu gt Setup and gives you access to the various setup parameters such as frequency weightings control of the measurement bandwidth statistics and the type of input currently connected You can change these as required see section 4 5 6 The Full tab a
102. 0 0 dB Key in a gain value 1 5 dB resolution for the commentary annotations Use to assign the newvalue forimmediate response at the output or use the up down navigation keys to increment decrement the value in steps of 1 5 dB Please note Maximum gainis limited to 0 dB for 16 bit wav files 297 298 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual D 6 Printer Settings Table D 6 Printer settings Parameter Values Comment Printer Used None Select Mone if you do not have a printer connected to the analyzer S Select MPS for a Mobile Pro Spectrum thermal printer from AM TECH PCL Select PCL for a printer accepting PCL printer language PCL Inkjet Select PCL Inkjet for an inkjet printer PCL Laser accepting PCL language Select PCL Laser for a laser printer Seiko DPU accepting PCL language Select Seiko DPU for the DPU S245 or DPU S445 thermal printer model from Seiko Instruments See 8 for more details Top Margin 0 0to 20 0 cm Use Top Margin to position the print on the paper Left Margin 0 0to 20 0 cm Use Left Margin to position the print on the paper Width 1 0to 15 0 cm Use Width to set the size of the print Height 1 4to 20 0 cm Use Height to set the size of the print D 7 Modem DynDNS Settings Table D 7 ModemDynDNS settings Preferences Parameter Values Comment Modem Disabled GPRS EDGE HSPA Dialup Set to Disabled if you do not have a modem conn
103. 0 0000 Frequency Hz 130809 Low Frequency Option BZ 7234 together with BZ 7222 BZ 7223 BZ 7224 or BZ 7225 and a low frequency microphone Type 4193 or Type 4964 possibly with Low Frequency Adaptor UC 0211 refer to Table C 5 Note for Type 4193 and Type 4964 measures the following timed broadband parameters in addition to the standard measured parameters e LGeq G weighted equivalent continuous noise level LG10max maximum time weighted sound level measured with G weighting and 10 s exponential time constant LG10min minimum time weighted sound level measured with G weighting and 10 s exponential time constant e LGpeak maximum peak sound level with G weighting TGpeak time when the G weighted peak sound level occurred The following instantaneous values are also available e LG10 instantaneous time weighted sound level with G weighting and 10s exponential time constant e LGpeak 1s maximum peak sound level with G weighting during the latest second Setting up the Analyzer for G weighting 1 Mount your low frequency microphone and low frequency adaptor if used on the preamplifier and connect it to the top socket see section 2 5 2 The first time you use the transducer it needs to be created in the transducer database section 5 5 and calibrated section 5 3 2 Select the SOUND LEVEL METER FREQUENCY ANALYZER LOGGING LOGGING SLM ENH LOGGING
104. 0 60 80 100 LAeq T LCpeak Hcc z LAF90 0 cB LAF max aace Measurement Mode Manual Broadband t CHAPTER 3 21 Making your First Measurement 1 Check that the SOUND LEVEL METER project template is displayed at the top of the screen Fig 3 1 For more information on templates see What is a Project Template at the end of this section Fig 3 2 Changing the project template Na me EJ FFT ANALYZER alt FREQUENCY ANALYZER ala FREQUENCY ANALYZER ADV J LOGGING LOGGING SLM fi NOISE MONITORING REVERBERATION TIME SOUND LEVEL METER ADV SOUND LEVEL METER BASIC Quick 12 48 16 2 Tap Measurement Mode in the View Area and set to Manual Fig 3 3 Please note The bar graph showing the sound pressure level Lap is now live but parameters such as Laeg are not This is because Lap is an instantaneous value always available for display whereas Leg is a measured value that needs to be averaged over a period of time Therefore it cannot be displayed before you have started a measurement using the Start Pause pushbutton Fig 3 3 SOUND LEVEL METER Setting the d NT Job f l measurement mode LAF 54 7 dB LL 20 40 60 80 20 LAeq dB LCpeak Soc LAF90 0 Stes LAFmax dB Measurement Mode Broadband 3 Press the Start Pause pushbutton to start the measurement Notice the Running icon on the screen and monitor the red yellow green status indicators
105. 18 Rear Socket ccccccesseccessseeeesseees 11 57 106 284 Recalibration of Battery Charge Indicator 108 Recalling Measurements ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeee Saved Measurements Recording ICON eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeenaeeeeeeaaeeeesaeees Recording Signals 00 Re create Deleted Template Reference Spectrum Icon As Reference Timesi iriri irani iiir Regional Settings esceceseeceeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaes Regional Settings Screen Regular Recalibration ccccscceseeeeeeesneeeeeneeees Re installing Software c ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Reminder Pop up ccssccsssscsescesssessscessersenessees Reset Analy ZOficcccerecstepvtisascvsctcecetcocsevesteantessers Button at Bottom Measurement OPTIONS puit enia eee areas Pushbutton o oo ec eee eeee eee eeeeeeereeteaeenaees to Factory Default Resolution of Readings Result Selector 0 ceceesceeeeeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeteseeaeeeeeeaees 138 Results Display in Enhanced Logging Software 138 Display in Frequency Analysis Software 116 186 188 190 196 199 200 Display in Logging Software seee 127 Display in Reverberation Time Software 159 Display in Tone Assessment Software 178 Re using Setups from Projects Reverberation Time ccccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeee ANDOAIN Sinnenas g
106. 2 2 Tap Check for updates 3 Follow the procedure described in section 9 2 1 or section 9 2 2 Please note Only software packages equal to or above SW24 can downgrade to another package Software packages down to SW21 are available for update through Internet 106 9 3 9 4 9 4 1 9 4 2 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual How to Move a License If you have more than one analyzer you may want to share application software between the analyzers You can do this by moving the license from one analyzer to another by using Measurement Partner Suite BZ 5503 together with the License Mover VP 0647 If you lend out your analyzer you may want to temporarily uninstall applications not needed This can be achieved by moving the license of the application to License Mover VP 0647 When needed again you move the license back to your analyzer Please consult the on line help included with the BZ 5503 software for instructions on how to move a license Troubleshooting Measurements If your measurement seems to be wrong then e Check the cabling if any e Check that the microphone including preamplifier is correctly mounted in the top socket or correctly connected to the extension cable e Checkthat the Input parameter is set to Jop Socket Rear Socketin agreement with how you are going to use the input This is found by tapping Main Menu gt Setup gt Input e Check that the transducer you have mounted
107. 2 Free field Microphone e ZC 0032 Microphone Preamplifier e AO 1494 USB Standard A to USB Micro B Interface Cable for hardware version 4 1 8 m 6 ft e AO 1476 USB Standard A to USB Mini B Interface Cable for hardware versions 1 3 1 8 m 6 ft BZ 5298 Environmental Software including Measurement Partner Suite BZ 5503 UA 1650 90 mm dia Windscreen with AutoDetect UA 1651 Tripod Extension for Hand held Analyzer UA 1673 Adaptor for Standard Tripod Mount DH 0696 Wrist Strap KE 0440 Travel Bag KE 0441 Protective Cover FB 0679 Hinged Cover Type 2250 only FB 0699 Hinged Cover Type 2270 only HT 0015 Earphones UA 1654 5 Extra Styli QB 0061 Battery Pack e ZG 0426 Mains Power Supply e UL 1050 USB Wi Fi dongle for Hand held Analyzers for hardware version 4 Software and Accessories Available Separately SOFTWARE MODULES BZ 7223 Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7224 Logging Software including memory card BZ 7225 Enhanced Logging Software including memory card BZ 7225 UPG Upgrade from Logging Software BZ 7224 to Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 does not include memory card BZ 7226 Signal Recording Option BZ 7227 Reverberation Time Software BZ 7229 2 channel Option Type 2270 only BZ 7228 Building Acoustics Software BZ 7230 FFT Software BZ 7231 Tone Assessment Option 219 220 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 BZ 7233 Sound Intensity Software Type 2270 only BZ 7234 Low Frequency Option
108. 2 channel Option BZ 7229 and the 2 channel modules for Sound Level Meter Frequency Analysis Logging Enhanced Logging and Building Acoustics software and Sound Intensity Software BZ 7233 are pre installed on Type 2270 However a valid license is required to run the software Ifyou have purchased the analyzer together with the software application s then the relevant license s will come pre installed on the analyzer If you purchase a separate software application for your analyzer then you have to install the license onto the analyzer This is done using Measurement Partner Suite BZ 5503 please consult the online help included with the BZ 5503 software for instructions on how to install a license Tap on the analyzer s screen then About to get a list of installed software and licenses How to Update Upgrade Applications and Install New Languages Briiel amp Kj r recommends that you always use the most current software available New versions of the analyzer software are available for download via the Bruel amp Kj r website www bksv com To do this use Measurement Partner Suite BZ 5503 or connect the analyzer directly to the Internet to download Some software versions will be free updates and some will be upgrades requiring that a new license is purchased Update Upgrade using BZ 5503 BZ 5503 can be used for updating or upgrading new software applications on your analyzer It can even downgrade to specific software versi
109. 20 and 7825 00 eee eee eee 131 Marking Sound Categories lt Maximum Time weighted parameters ssseseseeee 33 Maximum Time weighted Sound Levels 33 262 Parameters e t asedii aie e 266 269 Measurement Control Parameters for BZ 7222 to BZ 7225 00 eecccesseetteeeteeeteeeteeeee 230 for Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 233 Measurement Feedback in the Status Field 22 Measurement Microphone ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 Connectinguisiis acnAnmicnunaini nai 15 DISCONNECCHING ieissar diirai 15 Mounting the assessessesrissussrueseasrnecnneridsensnnsennnnsreas 15 Placing the csecsccssressesscceeneeeeseseneesseeesnenteeeeeses 14 Measurement Mode Parameter 23 230 Measurement Parameters 261 Measurement Partner Cloud ccccceseeeeeeeee 61 65 Measurement Partner Suite cccssceceeseeees 31 65 Measurement Partner Suite BZ 5503 28 36 50 70 103 106 111 123 141 171 Measurements 120 Alternative Method 16 Convenient wi l7 Default Job Path 63 Documenting 2d Making your First 00 0 eee eee eeeeeee esse eeeeeeeees 19 OMQanisSing naisina ia 61 Preparing ROCAIING s cccvcsesssccerecesivercecciecesennavencescnedveurcives Tone ASSESSMENT cee eects eeeee tee eeneeeeeees 178 with Graphical Position Management 165 Memory Devices Formatting civcvcscceccen
110. 2270 User Manual Table C 3 Cont Calibration history parameters Parameter Values Comment 2 User Text string 2 Input Top Socket Rear Socket 2 Calibration Type External Internal 2 Calibrator Serial No Text string 2 Comment Text string 2 Analyzer Serial No Text string N Calibration date amp Time YYYY MM DD hh mm ss Current N Sensitivity Double Current N Preamplifier ID No Text string Current N User Text string Current N Input Top Socket Rear Socket Current N Calibration Type External Internal Current N Calibrator Serial No Text string Current N Comment Text string Current N Analyzer Serial No Text string Current Analyzer Parameters C 3 Calibration Setup Table C 4 Calibration setup parameters Parameter Values Comment Sound Level Calibrator 4231 Select which calibrator to use Custom Calibration Level for Custom 0 00 to 200 00 dB Set calibration level for custom calibrator Sound Level Calibrator re 20 Pa Serial No for 4231 Text string Serial number will be documented in calibration history Serial No for Custom Sound Text string Serial number will be documented in Level Calibrator calibration history Acceleration Calibrator 4294 Select which calibrator to use 4924 002 Custom Calibration Level for custom Acceleration Calibrator Oto 1000 m s2 Set calibration level for custom calibrator Please note When displayi
111. 270 User Manual Appendix C Analyzer Parameters This appendix describes the parameters that are common to all users of the analyzer 283 284 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual C 1 Current Transducer Table C 1 Current transducer parameters Parameter Values Comment Transducer Name and serial number of This parameter selects which that is connected to 7op Socket Ch 1 for Type 2270 transducer transducer is connected to the Top Socket displayed in Setup gt Input Type 2250 or Setup gt Input under Ch 1 Type 2270 and at the top of Transducers Database Transducer that is connected to Top Socket or Ch 2 for Type 2270 Name and serial number of transducer Type 2270 only This parameter selects which transducer is connected to the Top Socket or Ch 2 displayed in Setup gt Input under Ch 2 and at the top of Transducers Database Transducer that is connected to the Rear Socket Ch 1 of Type 2270 Name and serial number of transducer Type 2270 only This parameter selects which transducer is connected to the Ch 1 Rear Socket displayed in Setup gt Input under Ch 1 and at the top of Transducers Database Transducer that is connected to Rear Socket or Ch 2 of Type 2270 Name and serial number of transducer This parameter selects which transducer is used in the Rear Socket displayed in Setup gt Input Type 2250 or Setup gt Input u
112. 3 BZ 7224 and BZ 7225 FFT Based Tone Assessment with BZ 7230 Only STANDARD Tone assessment is based on the measured FFT spectrum in accordance with ISO 1996 2007 Acoustics Description assessment and measurement of environmental noise part 2 Determination of environmental noise levels Annex C informative Objective method for assessing the audibility of tones in noise Reference method SPECTRA ASSESSED Any displayed sound FFT spectrum FFT Ref or MAX may be assessed Assessment is made as post processing that is when measurement is paused or stopped SETUP ACCORDING TO STANDARD Setups in violation of the standard are indicated as such on the display you may then accept to apply the default setup Tone assessment will be made if possible in spite of standard violations Tone Seek Criterion 0 1 to 4 0 dB in 0 1 dB steps TONE AT CURSOR A sinusoidal tone is available at the Headphone output to help confirm identified tones Frequency the frequency is selected by the Main cursor 215 216 Gain 70 dB to 10 dB Options The generated tone can be mixed with the input signal TONE ASSESSMENT CURSOR All tones found are indicated in the display The Tone cursor is initially placed at the most prominent tone and can then be stepped through the tones found You can also use the Main cursor to step through the tones RESULTS Results are displayed in the Tone panel and in the Value panel They are n
113. 3 G1 3 Available in Type 2270 only Hardware version 4 G4 Available in both Types 2250 and 2270 Fast seamless transfer of data recordings and photographs back to the office Both high speed interfaces USB or LAN can be used when the analyzer is located in close proximity to the PC However if the analyzer is remote from the host PC the LAN interface has the further advantage of data download from anywhere within the same LAN network Both interfaces are not just used for data download but also for remote monitoring and remote control 24 G4 Mark Indicates that the hardware is version 4 Without this mark your hardware is an earlier version CHAPTER 2 7 Assembling your Analyzer Analyzer Inputs Outputs Hardware Versions 1 3 G1 3 Connector panel of Type 2270 G1 3 070138 1 Mini USB Interface Socket Use the supplied Mini USB Cable AO 1476 to connect 2 Earphone Socket Use the supplied Earphones HT 0015 to connect 3 Output Socket A triaxial LEMO connector use the supplied LEMO to BNC cable AO 0440 D 015 to connect 4 Trigger and Tacho Input Socket A triaxial LEMO connector use the supplied LEMO to BNC cable AO 0440 D 015 to connect For tacho probe connection other cables may be used see section 2 3 3 for more information 5 Input Socket or for Type 2270 only Input Ch 2 Socket A triaxial LEMO connector depending on the transducer used a number of cables are availab
114. 3 and measurement of spectra Measurement Parameters Weather Data requires connection to a weather station common to both channels in 2 channel templates Wind Dir avg Wind Dir min Wind Dir max Wind Speed avg Wind Speed min Wind Speed max Amb Temperature Amb Humidity Amb Pressure Amb Rain Gauge Up to three or all of the following Spectrum parameters can be logged and displayed on the spectrum display Lweg LwFmax Lwsmax Lwemin Lwsmin The Statistics can be logged in Periodic Reports to Calculate Percentile Levels as spectra B 4 B 4 1 Logged 100 ms Measurement Microphone Input For Logging Software BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 The following Broadband parameters can be logged every 100 ms Lyeq Please note For 2 channel templates up to four of the six parameters from the two channels can be logged Type 2270 only These parameters require license for BZ 7223 and measurement of spectra 271 272 B 5 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Instantaneous Measured Parameters available at any time Microphone Input Instantaneous Time weighted Sound Levels Lx e Lys Ly Ly e Lys e Ly Sound Pressure Levels maximum time weighted sound levels once per second e LXF SPL LXS SPL LXUSPL e LYSPL e LYS SPL e LYUSPL Peak Sound Levels maximum peak sound level once per second e LVpeak 1s Low frequency Paramete
115. 33 Weather Data cccccccccecsssssseeeeesessssteeees 33 272 Instantaneous GPS datta ccceceeseeeseeeeeeeteeeeees 34 Instantaneous Measured Parameters 33 34 272 Instantaneous Time weighted Sound Levels 272 Peak Sound Level c ccccccccessceeessseeeesseeeeeees 272 Sound Pressure Level cccceeeseeeeeeeteeeeees 272 Instantaneous Time weighted parameters 34 Instantaneous Time weighted Sound Level Parameters 272 Internal Battery Pack eee eee eteeeeneeeeeenees 6 Internet Browsers Connection Via eececceesececessceecssseeessseeeesseeeeesees 96 SUPPOME a a a E arr NEE irana 96 Interrupted Noise Method c cece eeeeeeeeeees 156 Reverberation Time cccccescecceecsssesteeeeeeeeees 152 IMtFOGUCTION 0s ccccscisssesecorecenscusectcteccennensccceneasensesnees 1 ISO 1996 2 Annex D Tone Assessment Calculations cc 172 ISO EU Occupational Health Parameters 263 267 J De ae pissin A A Pan ee EA 314 LAN Connection Ascasiave A aan adenine LAN Interface LAN Sock tisic menes n chi oe ieee IE ale 0 0 gt ee Install ee Last Calibration Date Latitude eee 326 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Level Trigger 1 Parameters Level Trigger 2 Parameters Level Trigger 3 Parameters Level Trigger 4 Parameters Level Trigger Parameters Level Triggers Levening License Mover V
116. 5 minutes and the analyzer will reboot when finished Any unsaved logging data will be saved and the analyzer is ready to use again 6 Connect to the analyzer again and verify the new software version by tapping J on the analyzer s screen then About To continue the measurement press the Start pushbutton CHAPTER 9 Updating and Upgrading Applications Maintenance Calibration and Troubleshooting Please note If you have set up your analyzer for email notifications see section 8 4 you will get an email in step 4 when the analyzer is paused and you will get a new e mail in step 5 when the analyzer has rebooted and is ready for connection again Fig 9 1 About screen showing the Check for updates on the Web link Check for updates on the Web gt License valid The above software modules can be in one of two states active not active Active means the software is running and using the current Project Template Copyright 2004 2009 by Briiel amp Kjaer Sound amp Vibration Measurement AJS All rights reserved 0 Fig 9 2 Software Update Software update screen showing the Check for updates button Server update bksv com 2250 latest Software Update l 9 2 3 Downgrade to an Earlier Version It is possible to downgrade to an earlier version of the software 1 Change the atest part of the server address Fig 9 2 to the requested software package for example SW2
117. 697 D 100 eee eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 16 ROTAT Ohian hinea i niin ae headache 7 Applications How to Update Upgrade Them ee 103 Installing Updating and Upgrading OOM alist ce eet uae eas A EEE Pre installed sic ctiviccccsecrcdireasivdreiiecrdedencrenrstve Temporarily Un install 3 Arcade Colour SCHEMGC cseceeceeeeeseeeeeereeteeeeeenees Assembling your Analyzer ccceceeeeeeeceeeteneeeneees Asterisk Next to Template cccsecssssssseesssesserseseeeseenes 24 Automatic Measurement c cece eeeeeeeeeeeees 101 Automatic Update of Software eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 104 Auxiliary Parameters in Reverberation Time Software 163 AVEVAJO eee Averaging Time A WEIQNKING cee eee eteeeseecseeteeeeeaeeteaeeeseeeeaees B Back erase Pushbutton cccccceceeseesetteeeeeeeees 5 44 Backlight Dit ccviecrcvccsccrssecaeesrencencevservetenteen eet cave 81 Backlight Icon 0 43 108 Bandwidth Parameters 0 cccecesseeeseeseeeeeeees 229 Basic Principles when using the Analyzer 37 Battery Charge Indicator eeeeceeeereeeeereeeeeee 7 12 Recalibration Battery ICOM sci ciiid aiii Battery Pack QB 0061 0 eeeeeceeseeeeeeteteeeeeteneeeeeeaes 14 Troubleshooting Battery power Status ICON 11 43 Bottom F for Special Leq Parameter seee 228 Broadband Frequency Weighting oa Broadband VIEW ccccccsce
118. 72 mov max Sound Exposure Level Lx Lwe Peak Sound Level LVpeak TVpeak Maximum Time weighted Sound Levels LXFmax Lysmax LXImax LYfmax Lysmax LyYlmax Measurement Parameters Minimum Time weighted Sound Levels e e e e LYE min Lysmin LyImin LYFmin Lysmin Lyimin ISO EU Occupational Health Parameters e e e E Dose ProjDose VPeaks gt xxx dB VPeaks gt 137 dB VPeaks gt 135 dB US Occupational Health Parameters e e e LavRQ TWA TWA DoseRQ ProjDoseRQ General Parameters e Overload in Start time common to both channels in 2 channel templates Stop Time common to both channels in 2 channel templates Elapsed Time excl pauses common to both channels in 2 channel templates Serial Number of analyzer Version Number of software used to measure the data 263 264 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Special Parameters Lyreg also called Lyrm LyIeq Lateg Lseq Larreg also called Larrms LaFTeq Aeq e SIL average of Lzeg octave band levels 500 Hz 1000 Hz 2000 Hz and 4000 Hz e PSIL average of Lzeg octave band levels 500 Hz 1000 Hz and 2000 Hz e SIL3 average of Lzeg octave band levels 1000 Hz 2000 Hz and 4000 Hz Lyeg f1 f2 sum of power values for Lweg frequency bands from f1 Hz to f2 Hz Noise Indicators Lday Leening Light Laen L
119. 96 2 Annex D ssssesssssesssessrssssrererssesreerersessesrrereess 172 ISO 1996 2 Annex D Tone Assessment Calculations eseseseseseseseseseserererererererererererrrrrreeee 172 15 2 Tone Assessment According to Italian LaW cc cccccccccssssssececececsesscesececeeseeseeeescseseeaeaeeeeeens 174 Selecting the Tone Assessment Option ccccecsecccccessesssceececeeseeeeeceescesesaeseeeesceeseasaeeeeeees 174 Setting up a Measurement Manually ccccssscecccccecssseceeecscsesseeeeceescesesaeeeeeescsesesasaeeeeeens 176 Setting up the Measurement using the Default Setup sssssssssssssssrrsssrrrerssssesrrerressesrrereess 177 Signal Recordihg orrera ieia iiie a a a a e E E E A a R ia E iA 178 15 3 MGASUPIN e se0 coc ceccirseeresceseatenoweteven bles gute doecunpldautuesoveeawebiuahawatudnn dla ateeceatusnncaatseeretesDentoendoeegeet 178 Result Display crine e e a a caadeaihesscdecgevaduas baxadecealeadeasbedess os 178 15 4 Logging Software BZ 7224 Template cccccccsssscccccecsesssaesecececeeseesececeesesessecescseseasaeeeeeees 180 15 5 Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 Template cccccssssccccessessseeeceeesesseaeeeescessesseaeeeeees 180 15 6 Status Codes SiMMileys asna eiaa Sead eile y Eaa eee Eee aa AN E E sates 181 15 7 Recalling Saved Measurements csccccccecesssssscecececeesenseeceesceeseeeeesececesesasaeeeesesesesaseeeeeeees 182 CHAPTER 16 2 channel Option BZ 7229 cc cecssccocsesssc
120. 98 assesses tone using 1 3 octave spectra according to Italian Law Ministero dell Ambiente Decreto 16 marzo 1998 Adjustment 0 0 to 20 dB This is the adjustment you should add to Lypeg if audible tones are found in the spectrum The resulting adjustment can be read below the spectrum Please note The adjustment is fixed to 5 dB in the DM 16 03 1998 standard Low Freq Last Band 12 5 Hz to 315 Hz Set the frequency for the last band of the low frequency range of the assessment Default is 125 Hz The low frequency range is from the lowest measured frequency band to the value of the Low Freq Last Band parameter Please note Only available if Tone Standard is set to ISO 1996 2 2007 Middle Freq Last Band 160 Hz to 20 kHz Set the frequency for the last band of the middle frequency range of the assessment Default is 400 Hz The middle frequency range is from one band higher than the Low Freq Last Band parameter to the value of the Middle Freq Last Band parameter Please note Only available if Tone Standard is set to SO 1996 2 2007 Table A 19 Tone assessment parameters APPENDIX A Setup Parameters Parameter Values Comment Level Difference Low 0 1 to 100 0 dB Set the required level difference for detecting a tone in the low frequency range Default is 15 dB Please note Only available if Tone Standard is set to SO 1996 2 2007 Level Difference Midd
121. Alternatively tap the icon to the left of the project name to open and view Fig 3 8 EXPLORER Viewing your measurement in Explorer _ 3 4 Document your Measurement Adding Annotations Tap upper right corner of the screen Fig 3 7 to open the Annotations screen with metadata on the Metadata tab and annotations on the Annotations tab Fig 3 9 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Hint If the icon is not visible you have no metadata or annotations at all Move the field selector Fig 3 9 into the line using the arrow keys and move it right until the icon is revealed ANNOTATIONS a The Metadata tab of Project 006 the Annotations screen XJ Operator John Wright A XJ Location Hall C XJ Type MX 47 AJ No 246301 XJ Condition Avg Speed XJ Test No 6 XJ Status OK Annotations Metadata A x 08 27 21 Metadata are text or numbers which are easily set and changed using the keyboard or selected from a user defined picklist The metadata are stored together with the measurement on the project Refer to section 8 7 for a more comprehensive description of using metadata If you have defined some metadata on the Metadata tab you will get a reminder to update that metadata each time you save a project Tap the Yes button to open the Metadata tab you can also opt to disable the reminder Tap EJ to close the Annotations screen Spoken Metadata This is done before dur
122. Colour Schemes Display Screen Display Settings eceeeeceeceeeeereeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeees Displaying Noise Indicators Document your Measurement 25 Domain Name System Downgrade to an Earlier Version Fe DSL Modem Router ccccsccccsssceecseceesseeeessteeeees Dual 10 pole Adaptor JP 1041 i is Duration Parameter ccccccccccccsssssteeeeeeessssteeeeees 324 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Dynamic Domain Name System n se 89 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 89 DynDNS wisieet ncn diane ik een 88 DynDNS SettingS ceeceeseseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 86 E Earphone Socket Economising On Power Edit Mode 00 eccceeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeae Editing Annotations on Profiles eee 134 EH 2152 7 ElapSed TIME areir as 42 Electrical Calibration ecceseeeseeeceteeeeeeteenreeeeeaes 51 E mail Notifications 1295 Email Notifications 0 0 eee ceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 93 Enhanced Logging Display Results 0 0 0 eee eee eeneeeneeeeees OPON Sa eae hie ei Set UP eisrean erata aera With Tone Assessment Enhanced Logging Measurement Screen 138 Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 Equivalent Continuous Sound Level Parameters vssieeccceeeetalesuieeenietalavetane Ethernet Cable ciie sudden ane ees Ethernet Interface ne Evaluator Type
123. F rmate meise A irana aena SEa EIEEEI RE Date Separator eececeseecceseeeeeeeeteeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeene DING ETE ENAA ESEE TE EEE I EEE Decay Graphs in Reverberation Time Software 163 Decay Tab in Reverberation Time Software Decay TIM ecencsicccetcettivccecsceretvesectvencercensen Decibel dB tsica creicectirtecnvtei wicca Decimal Places Number Of sic i005 53 Sas he eee 293 Decimal Point cceccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeteeneeeees 82 Default Measurement Job Path 0 eee ee eeeeeeneeeeees 63 Tone Assessment Measurement 0 eeee 177 Definition of Frequency Ranges Definition of Reverberation Time Delete Timer ICON c cccececeeeeseseeeeeeeeeteeneeeeeeaees Delete Reconfigure Templates and Users 111 Deleting Jobs Projects Description of Inputs Outputs cceeeeeeeeeeeeteees 7 Description of Jobs and Projects cee 61 DHCP iinis r aa aa 89 Diffuse field ICON seesseseeeseneeseensrrrsrrreerrresrresernees 42 DIRAC Room Acoustics Software Type 7841 157 Direct Input COn secs cdiscecetecsestceeseeerteredetseccnetevestenvanes 42 Disconnecting Preamplifier and Measurement Microphone 15 Display Enhanced Logging Results eee 138 Frequency Analysis Results 116 186 188 190 196 seeecheea ie detnrane rani se 199 200 LOCKING EE T 50 Logging Results 127 Reverberation Time Results 159 Tone Assessment Results 178 Display
124. Introd tti ma eaa aaae aE E RE A EE RA A aa 151 Definitio Ne hse e a E e E EEEE A OEE APE EE eA EEE OSEN eka 151 How Do We Measure Reverberation Time s cccesssecessececeeseeeeceeaeeeceeeeeeeseeeceenueeeseeeeens 152 14 2 Setting Upthe Analyze asie nsii a Tacs Ar T a Ea o Enele predea ieii eE 155 interrupted Noise M ethos inier a a a a i a e aiaa 156 Maa oN EAEAN Eao To EE ENEE AA S A E E 156 Signal RECOLING eae EE E E EEEE AA EEEE E E E AE 157 Controlling the Measurements ienne e sad a A re Sa E r E 157 Serial MeASUREMENES E ioe beniaesiasdeedandaccsis lueetes 157 Annotating Projects and Positions cccccccsssssscccssssssssececscsesssssaesecsescsesssesecsssessesaeseeseesas 159 14 3 Displaying the ReSUItS ccccsscccccecsssesssseceecsesssaesecececseeaseeeeceseesssaesecsesesessaeseesceeseseaaeeeeees 159 VE IVIOW T EA AE E A Seen icles INDUS Presa Wins eee dE NUS EAE A 159 Spect Masri eonia aeiia oiala anaa a los dada ai aaa linea teudtadettaacdendalaeabacaedeess 161 DILE N EE AE A O A E EA Goren Seer 163 14 4 Measurements with Graphical Position Management cccccccccecssssssseecesessaeseeeeeeeeseeaees 165 145 QUAY INGIGATONS a a a chai os a eck e E a a a E 169 14 6 Saving and Recalling R SUuItS ccccssssccccsessssscececesesssaeseeeeeceesesaeseeeesceeseaeseeseesseeeeeeeseeeees 170 CHAPTER 15 Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 1 3 OCtAVE olo AAE E EEEE T EE 171 15 1 Tone Assessment According to ISO 19
125. LEMO Input Impedance gt 1 MQ Direct Input Max input voltage 14 14 Vpeak CCLD Input Max input voltage 7 07 Vpeak CCLD Current voltage 4 mA 25 V TRIGGER SOCKET Connector Triaxial LEMO Max Input Voltage 20 Vpeak Input Impedance gt 47 kQ Precision 0 1 V OUTPUT SOCKET Connector Triaxial LEMO Max Peak Output Level 4 46 V Output Impedance 50 Q HEADPHONE SOCKET Connector 3 5 mm Minijack stereo socket Max Peak Output Level 1 4 V Output Impedance 32 Q in each channel Power EXTERNAL DC POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS Used to charge the battery pack in the analyzer Voltage 8 24 V DC ripple voltage lt 20 mV Current Requirement min 1 5A Power Consumption lt 2 5 W without battery charging lt 10 W when charging Cable Connector LEMO Type FFA 00 positive at centre pin EXTERNAL AC MAIN SUPPLY ADAPTOR Part No ZG 0426 Supply Voltage 100 120 200 240 V AC 47 63 Hz Connector 2 pin IEC 320 BATTERY PACK Part No QB 0061 Rechargeable Li lon battery Voltage 3 7 V Capacity 5200 mAh nominal Typical Operating Time e Single channel gt 11 h screen backlight dimmed gt 10 h full screen backlight e Dual channel gt 10 h full screen backlight Use of external interfaces LAN USB Wi Fi will decrease battery operating time Connecting a weather station or a GPS receiver can decrease battery operating with up to 20 Connecting Wireless Adaptor UL 1050 c
126. Menu eq You can view set which transducer is connected to the analyzer and add new ones if required Details can be changed for existing transducers or entered for new ones see section 4 5 6 When you have finished viewing or updating the details tap EJ to return to the Measurement screen When a transducer is selected you can tap the Calibration History link at the bottom of the transducer details and open the Calibration History screen Fig 4 1 This screen includes the calibration history for the transducer that is microphone that is currently selected When you have finished viewing or updating the details tap EJ to return to the Transducers screen Calibration The Calibration screen is accessed from the Main Menu eq and gives you access to the analyzer s calibration procedure To calibrate the analyzer follow the instructions in the Status Field For more information refer to section 5 2 When you have finished calibrating or viewing the details tap EJ to return to the Measurement screen The Calibration tab at the bottom of the Calibration screen allows you to perform and monitor the calibration while the Details tab allows you to view the details of the calibration and the calibrator that are being used to calibrate the analyzer While you are viewing the Details tab you can tap the Calibration History link at the bottom of the calibration details and open the Calibration History screen Fig 4 1 This screen includes the calibrat
127. OR ENH LOGGING SLM project template CHAPTER 17 Low Frequency Option BZ 7234 The project template is displayed at the top of the screen if it does not display the correct template tap the Project Template Bar at the top of the screen and select the correct template from the drop down menu See section 3 2 1 for more details on templates 3 Tap Main Menu gt Setup gt Input gt Transducer and select appropriate microphone 4 Tap Main Menu Eq gt Setup gt Frequency Settings gt Low Frequency Option and tap On This will enable extra options for the Low Frequency parameter Frequency Analyzer module only and for the frequency weighting parameters Fig 17 2 Fig 17 2 Example of additional Input parameters with the Frequency Settings Low Frequency Low Frequency Option on parameter set to On Low Frequency Extended Broadband excl Peak A G Broadband Peak G Spectrum A Bandwidth 1 3 octave Bottom F for Special Leq 20 Hz Top Freq for Special Leq 200 Hz Statistics Measurement Control Signal Recording 3 o 5 Set Low Frequency to Extended 6 Set Broadband excl Peak to 4 G simultaneous measurement with the two frequency weightings A and G Broadband Peak to Gif you need to measure the G weighted peak 7 Frequency Analyzer module only Set Spectrum Weighting to 4 G Zor G as required 8 Tap EJ to exit 17 2 1 Controlling the Measurement The measurement is controlled in the
128. On G1 3 analyzers the GPS receivers can be connected using USB Adaptor AO 0657 The first time you connect the GPS receiver to the analyzer or if it has been several days since you last connected them be sure to be in an open area with a clear view to the sky such as a park or empty field Wait for GPS initialization to complete This may take a few minutes depending on factors such as the distance from the previous coordinates GPS signal strength and surrounding terrain tall trees and buildings can block the satellite signals Once the Latitude and Longitude from the Spec a parameter group display data a fix has been initialized the LED on the GlobalSat GPS will also start to flash In some cases initialization can take up to several minutes depending on the conditions mentioned above before complete GPS data are displayed on the screen The GPS may get a faster fix if connected through a small USB cable delivered together with the GPS Ifa GPS receiver is connected when data are saved in a project a GPS note is automatically created as an annotation with the GPS information See more details on GPS notes in section 3 4 Preparing your Measurements You can prepare your measurements in advance by making job folders setting up the correct measurement parameters in the templates defining settings for metadata and by making checklists see example in Fig 8 8 either as memos containing addresses and phone numbers of relevant
129. OnN csrereisoniiiiniiieiririnesi iare 119 Tables in Reverberation Time Software 160 Tacho IMPUT e epei cavcesesteesrestee Tacho Probe Connection Topeak iai eniaint eraa kiaia Ea Rea ra Aer EANA SEREAS EAEra R Template EXplorer sessesssssssssrsresrerrisernerenrrnernerrnsenae Templates Asterisks ccceeeeeeee Delete or Reconfigure t Temporarily Un install Applications 00 TOXt ICOM oniar nnana ia Text Messages Theory of CIC Third Check Parameter ae Threshold Level mnsrsissiississirarnesni iiia a Time for Peak srir de tl ae Time for Peak Sound Levels Tcpeak Time Remaining cssccsesescsseseneesncessocenesressecseoees Time Weighted Average TWA sesesseeererreere Time Weightings cccccseesseecstcsssensereereeees Time Zoea cnatan a a a Timed Measured Parameters Timer Event Parameter cccecseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeee Timer Period Parameter ccccccseeteeeeeeeeeeeereee Timer Setup Screen Timers Delete SOUP stadia ine E EE ean Ge Ge When Analyzer O1n ceceeeeceeseeeeereeereeneeeneeaees with Switch on Time c cecceseeeeeeeeeeseeeeees INDEX 331 Tone ASSESSMEM eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeteeaeeeteseeess 116 According to ISO 1996 2 Annex D 6 172 According to Italian Law ou eee eeeee 174 Default Setup
130. P 0647 cecsceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees LICENSES sissies How to Move Them Link local ceceee Lhight Peer eee eee eee e eee e tree reer rere errr ere reer eee eee e er eee ere eee Locking Pushbuttons and Display 0 0 eeeeeeeeees 50 the Template csssscsssccssessesssesesseseseesseeseoees 47 Logged Broadband 100 ms Parameters 235 Logged Broadband Paramete s cssseeeees 235 Logged Measurement Parameters Broadband Parameters eeeeeeeeeeeees Equivalent Continuous Sound Levels For Enhanced Logging Software ek For Logging Software ceeeseeeeeeeeee Maximum Time weighted Sound Levels 266 Minimum Time weighted Sound Levels 266 269 Parameters Available Per Logging Interval 270 Parameters to be Logged and Displayed On Spectrum Display eeeeceeeeereeeeeeeeeeees 271 Sound Exposure Level c seeeeee 266 269 SPOClal ssrin orpine eiit Statistics to Calculate LOGGING se iayaiino etii e eia Display Results 0 00 eee eeeeeeeneeeneeeeees Options Set Upean MAG ie cae With Signal Recording 144 With Tone Assessment ecccceeeeeeeeeeeeee 180 Without Frequency Analysis Software 124 Logging Period Parameter 230 Logging Post processing Tools BZ 5503 A 71 Logging Software BZ 7224 seee 34 106 123 LONGIUDC saiecisiees aincivesnetdiettarnteneivneecnema tees 28 Loudness
131. Recording 17 Set Recording Control to Automaticif you want to record the signal during the measurement The recordings can be played back afterwards for identifying the cause of measurements differing from each other or if Excitation is set to Jmpu se for further analysis of the measured impulse response by post processing software like DIRAC Room Acoustics Software Type 7841 The recordings will contain the signal from when you press the Start pushbutton until the measurement stops The recording will be attached to the measurement as an annotation Please note Signal Recording requires a license for Signal Recording Option BZ 7226 To exit the Setup screen tap the EJ icon 14 2 4 Controlling the Measurement The measurement is controlled in the same way you would control a normal Sound Level Meter measurement using Start Pause Continue 4 Back erase and Reset pushbuttons see Chapter 3 for more details Note the following exceptions e Pressing Start initiates a measurement cycle slightly more complex than a standard SLM measurement see Fig 14 3 and Fig 14 4 for details The results are the same however a set of measurement data in this case the reverberation decays at one position e Creating a new reverberation time project The measured data is stored at a position and you can have several positions in one project Therefore starting a complete new project cannot be done by pressing Reset and then Sta
132. Repair Hardware Maintenance and Repail cccsccccccscssssssscceceesesnsceseccceeseaseesesceeseeaseeeecesesesaeeeeecs Rental E EE EE E E E E AE EEE E raining modorra eaa a aR aea l aaa ae a EAE ae aa aaae Ean CHAPTER 10 1 1 or 1 3 octave Frequency Analysis Optional Module scscccssssssssssecesesssssssseeeeees 115 TOA Setting upithe ANa VAE E a ar aeaaea aa A E aeae a e nEs Lae e aeaa 10 2 Controlling the Measurement 10 3 Displaying the Results SMIIOYS nie niin iie 1KO SAVING LE E E E EE E E E E E E CHAPTER 11 Logging Optional Modul lt cicsiscsesiseseccvisisissssssesasetedetesecassieaeleacdsce onuesbaes aaa irani sir a Sanaa Raken iss 123 T11 Settihe up the ANa VAE a a e a ama rro aaa ae e AA aa E T a eA enari Aia 124 11 2 Controlling the Measurement cccecsccecessessscecececsessessesecscecseseecesecsceeaseseeeesesesesasaeeeeeees 127 Annotating a Projectoren eaa i a a i e aa E ia exlen ERE i Ea aE E iah 127 Recording the Signials cscsceccncsiseesvesaceocesbassevacdoseesbavactebaccasbevsasecees souasbednseesasenseuddsoesdseabuabhededecs 127 113 Displayirig the Results ccccevccscesestcte vesscscacncenceevesadacteavesesedascaceseaseuneadgcddacuvesucdeesedoedavnanacdeenss 127 The Profile TaD iyvicccesucecceeseedeivacecesleviedesstdesyiivedessceasweseedecedvecoeteddetusetatdeveledesthddecustiddedversenssea 128 Marking Sound Cate gOrlesics sscccenrcrcciecerencsunvesi
133. Repeat Off On Set to Onto start anew measurement automatically after saving the previous measurement and after fulfilling the trigger conditions Parameter only available if Excitation Jmpulsive and Yes Measurement Mode Parallel Serial Combined Parallel measures all bands in the spectrum simultaneously Seria measures selected bands and Combined first measures Parallel and then Serial in an automated sequence A 6 Logged Broadband 100 ms Table A 6 Logged Broadband 100 ms parameters APPENDIX A Setup Parameters 2 channel templates 2270 only Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 Off Accelerometer or Direct Linear Fast Inst Slow Inst Off Parameter Values Comment Single channel Microphone The selected parameter s will be logged every 100 ms Parameter 1 to Parameter 3 Aeq LAeq or Linearwill have an averaging time of 100 ms LAF LAS For Logging BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging BZ 7225 templates only A 7 Logged Broadband Table A 7 Logged Broadband parameters Parameter Values Comment Full Statistics Yes Determines whether the full broadband statistics are logged or not No Available for microphone input only Broadband Parameters All Determines whether A broadband parameters are logged or a Selected part is logged up to 10 Selected parameters for microphone input otherwise up to 5 parameters 236 Hand h
134. Select optimum value for After 2 min how long the backlight is dimmed before it is After 5 min switched off After 10 min After 30 min Never Standby After 1 min Select optimum value for on period before the After 2 min analyzer is set automatically to standby After 5 min After 10 min After 30 min Never Ext Power Charge battery only G4 analyzers only Determines whether the Switch on and charge analyzer automatically switches on and charges the battery when connected to external power or only charges G1 3 analyzers This is determined by a small switch at the back of the analyzer Remove the internal battery pack to access the switch Please note If the analyzer is externally powered then the settings will be ignored Preferences D 3 Regional Settings Table D 3 Regional settings Parameter Values Comment Decimal Point J Select your preferred decimal point Date separator Select your preferred date separator Date Format yyyy MM dd HH mm ss dd MM yyyy HH mm ss MM dd yyyy HH mm ss yy MM dd hh mm ss XX dd MM yy hh mm ss XX MM dd yy hh mm ss XX Select your preferred date format HH 24 hour AA 12 hour XX AM or PM Time Zone GMT 12 Select the time zone of your region GMT GMT 13 Language English A number of different languages are available for the analyzer G1 3 analyzers Select your preferred language if it is not on the list then
135. Std Dev Standard Deviation parameter is calculated from the statistics Measurement Display and Control MEASUREMENT DISPLAYS SLM Measurement data displayed as numbers of various sizes and one quasi analog bar Measured sound data are displayed as dB values vibration data as dB values or in physical units SI units m s2 or US UK units g direct data as voltage in dB or V housekeeping data as numbers in relevant format Instantaneous measurement Ly or Fast Inst is displayed as a quasi analog bar MEASUREMENT CONTROL Manual Manually controlled single measurement Automatic Preset measurementtime from 1 sto 24 hrin1s steps Manual Controls Reset Start Pause Back erase Continue and Store the measurement manually CHAPTER 18 Specifications Auto start A total of 10 timers allow set up of measurement start times up to a month in advance Each timer can be repeated Measurements are automatically stored when completed BACK ERASE The last 5 s of data can be erased without resetting the measurement Measurement Status ON SCREEN Information such as overload and running paused are displayed on screen as icons TRAFFIC LIGHTS Red yellow and green LEDs show measurement status and instantaneous overload as follows e Yellow LED flash every 5 s stopped ready to measure e Green LED flashing slowly awaiting calibration signal e Green LED on constantly measuring e Yellow LED flashing slowly paused measureme
136. Switch the analyzer off by pressing If held in for 1 second the analyzer goes into standby mode if held in for more than 4 seconds it switches the analyzer off The analyzer will automatically switch off when it has been in standby mode without external power for more than 30 hours 30 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 4 1 E Chapter 4 Getting to Know Your Analyzer This chapter describes the basic features and functions of your analyzer including What a sound level meter SLM is e What the hand held analyzer can do e How to get help e What is Measurement Partner Suite MPS e How to navigate through the user interface What is a Sound Level Meter An SLM is an instrument that is designed to measure sound levels in a standardised way An SLM comprises a microphone a preamplifier a main processor and a read out unit The microphone converts the sound signal into an equivalent electric signal The electric signal that the microphone creates is at a very low level so it is made stronger with the help of a preamplifier before it is processed by the main processor Processing includes applying frequency and time weightings to the signal as specified by international standards such as IEC 61672 1 to which the analyzer conforms Frequency weighting adjusts how the SLM responds to different sound frequencies This is necessary because the human ear s sensitivity to sound varies according to the s
137. TECTORS G weighted replacing C Z weighted broadband detectors with one 10 s exponential time weighting one linearly averaging detector and one peak detector MEASUREMENTS Y time weightings F or S Spectra for Display and Storage BZ 7223 required Lasmax LGFmax LGFmin Leeq LGSmin Spectra for Display Only BZ 7223 required Les LGF Leyn1 Leyn2 Leyn3 Leyna Leyns Leyne Leyn7 Single Values for Display and Storage Leeq LG10max LG10min LGpeak TGpeak Single Values for Display Only L610 LGpeak 1s MEASURING RANGES G weighted Linear Operating Range at G filter reference frequency 10 Hz Single Range Microphone Low dB High dB 4193 41 0 161 0 4194 UC 0211 44 1 151 4 4964 29 6 149 0 4964 UC 0211 32 6 139 3 CHAPTER 18 Specifications Building Vibration Specifications for Building Vibration parameters apply to Type 2250 2270 fitted with an accelerometer Standards Conforms with the following International Standards e ISO 8041 2005 e DIN 45669 1 2010 09 Analysis DETECTORS Wpm weighted or Wmp Weighted detectors run in parallel with the Linear weighted broadband detectors Wm is the band limiting part of the Wn weighting High Range Microphone Low dB High dB 4193 41 6 161 0 4194 UC 0211 51 8 151 4 4964 30 3 149 0 4964 UC 0211 41 7 139 3 Low Range Microphone Low dB High dB 4193 41 0 131 0 4194
138. Table A 13 Stop Level 100 to 200 dB Stop trigger conditions are fulfilled when level crosses Stop Level in accordance with Start Slope for at least Stop Duration seconds set Stop Level here Table A 11 Cont Trigger parameters APPENDIX A Setup Parameters Parameter Values Comment Stop Duration 0 to 420 s Stop trigger conditions are fulfilled when level crosses Stop Level in accordance with Start Slope for at least Stop Duration seconds set Stop Duration here The Stop Duration will be limited by the internal recording buffer size and the Recording Quality and Resolution Table A 13 Trigger Parameter Microphone LXeq LYeq LAeq T1 mov LAeq 72 mov LCeq T1 mov LCeq T2 mov LGeq LG10max LG10min LVpeak LXFmax LXSmax LXImax LYFmax LYSmax LYImax LXFmin LXSmin LXImin LY Fmin LYSmin LYImin LXF SPL LXS SPL LXI SPL LYF SPL LYS SPL LYI SPL LWeq f1 f2 Values continue on next page Select which parameter to monitor for the level trigger The parameter is based on 1 second measurements and checked every second regardless of the logging period and logged parameters X frequency weightings A or B controlled by Setup gt Frequency Settings gt BB ex peak Y frequency weightings C or Z controlled by Setup gt Frequency Settings gt BB ex peak V frequency weightings A B C or Z controlled by Setup gt Frequency
139. USER MANUAL Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 With Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 Logging Software BZ 7224 Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 Signal Recording Option BZ 7226 Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 2 channel Option BZ 7229 Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 and Low Frequency Option BZ 7234 BE 1713 3 English ni a ES Bruel amp Kj r Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 with Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 Logging Software BZ 7224 Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 Signal Recording Option BZ 7226 Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 2 channel Option BZ 7229 Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 and Low Frequency Option BZ 7234 User Manual Valid for all hardware versions and from software version 4 5 Health and Safety Considerations This apparatus has been designed and tested in accordance with IEC EN61010 1 and ANSI UL61010 1 Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement Control and Laboratory Use This manual contains information and warnings which must be followed to ensure safe operation and to retain the apparatus in safe condition Safety Symbols and Signal Words Used A The apparatus will be marked with this symbol when it is important that you refer to the associated danger or warning statement given in this manual The manual uses this symbol when a danger or warning statement is ap
140. Z 7229 e Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 e Low Frequency Option BZ 7234 The manual explains how to perform a basic sound measurement which parameters you can measure and how the hand held analyzer should be operated In addition some practical hints and guidelines are provided including all relevant technical specifications Finally a glossary is added to help with specific terminology found in this manual This manual is intended for all hardware versions from 1 to 4 All hardware versions support the latest application software covered in this manual 1 2 How to Use this Manual 1 2 1 Conventions Used in this Manual Analyzer refers to Type 2250 or Type 2270 if the description is valid for both types Instructions and descriptions that refer to the analyzer pushbuttons are shown with the pushbutton icons as seen on the analyzer See Chapter 2 for a list of pushbutton icons and their functions 2 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Icons Buttons and Tabs Used on the Screen Indicated by bold type face for example tap Main Menu icon Parameter Values Text and Variables Parameter values instructions descriptions appearing on the screen and variables are indicated by italics for example Internal Disk Menu Parameters and Screen Navigation Indicated by bold type face for example Setup gt Frequency Settings gt BB Peak Keyboard Entries Keyboard entries and combinations are indicated
141. a 7 Add any spoken comments to the measurements by pressing the Commentary pushbutton and add any written comments by tapping Main Menu gt Add Note to Current Measurement 8 To view and organize your data tap Main Menu gt Explorer Please note You are not required to set any measurement ranges the analyzer has a dynamic range of more than 120 dB from 140 dB down to the noise floor of the microphone if the microphone has nominal sensitivity If you need more help the following section goes into the measurement process in more detail If not please continue to Chapter 4 3 2 Making a Measurement 3 2 1 Switching On Switch on the analyzer by pressing The start up time depends on the state the analyzer was in when last switched off and it may take up to 2 minutes from a cold start or up to 10 seconds if the analyzer is already in Standby mode that is from a warm start A cold start is a re boot of the analyzer from ROM This normally occurs after the analyzer has been turned off for some time either by the user or following an automatic power down A warm start takes the analyzer quickly from Standby mode to fully operational without having to re boot The battery needs to be charged for this to happen see section 2 5 1 Please note 3 2 2 Select Template and Measure After initialization the screen shown in Fig 3 1 appears Fig 3 1 Sound Level Meter displayed in the template line 20 4
142. a eiere teea ohne taarna iE 12 CPC aNd Siiani a eri A 12 Modems a a E enti R 88 Conformance Test Certificate 0 ec eee 114 Connect RS 232 Modem G4 HArQWALe aae itore eeina ra srera Pae ei aeaeaei aani Paia 88 Hardware 1 3 eninin aiii iana 88 Connect to APriora RE ae 10 AM AlYZOP naeio 90 Analyzer via Internet Browser 1 96 GPS Receivers 0 0eeee 97 Mobile Phone 1 69 PG indus vcd 69 Weather Stations ceeeceeeeeeeseeereeneeereeeeneeeees 97 Connecting Microphone Extension Cable 16 Preamplifier and Measurement Microphone 15 Connector Trhiaxial LEMO akihaha 10 Connector Panel GPa E E AEE E E E seta 7 E EAE sted EEE A EAE AAE EAA 8 Continuous Logging Parameter 136 Controlling Measurements ccseseesscessscecseeeseecseesseenseeeesnens the Frequency Analysis Measurement a the Reverberation Time Measurement 157 Conventions Used in this Manual eeeeseeeereees 1 Copying Jobs Projects eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaees 63 Cover FHI QO siete teenies teehee aa teaver ensserseesuers 6 Grit rion Level ic 1ec2cce onini 309 INDEX 323 Crossover Cable cccccscccssssecssscecsssseeessesesessaeees Current Transducer Parameter G weighting fes chive ide ieee D Daily CIC Parameter oo eeeeceeeeeseeseeeeeteeeeeeneeenes 231 Daily Noise Exposure Levels Lep q or Lex gh 33 Data Management Da te
143. ads Service Help Br el amp Kj r Hand held Analyzer amp View Instrument E View and Control Instrument Done Internet Protected Mode Off 100 Click the Help link to get more detailed help on using the Web page Click the Service link for updating the software or for rebooting the analyzer Click the View Instrument button to enter the web page for viewing the analyzer only You might be prompted for the Guest Username and Guest Password defined for the Web server see section 8 5 Click the View and Control Instrument button to enter the web page for full access to the analyzer You will be prompted for the User Name and Password defined for the web server Fig 7 3 Prompt for username P EA Eo and password AY The server 192 168 0 150 at 3SK Analyzer requires a username and password Warning This server is requesting that your username and Password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentcaton without a secure connection cer name G X Rassword one Vi Remember my password oc cane 76 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual The View Instrument Web Page Fig 7 4 shows the View Instrument Web page where you have an online display of your analyzer You can use the online display for monitoring the measurement only you cannot change the display or setup parameters or start and stop measurements etc Fig 7 4 Online display for monitoring only Flemming a
144. ai Decay Tab Definition Display Results ve Impulsive Excitation Method s 154 Interrupted Noise Method ees 152 Overview Tab Parallel Measurements Serial Measurements Spectrum Tabra ninnaa taeda Typical Measurement Setup eeeeeeees 153 INDEX 329 Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 35 151 RUMDIC rnae ein Ea eee 317 318 Running ICOM aasi aaa ariei eai 42 RV Parameter Noise Grit rl nasciani 317 S Save Enhanced Logging Results s Frequency Analysis Results c eee Logging Results cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaes Measurement 055 us Periodically with Logging Reverberation Time Results SOttinGS paier chet aetna cence Save AS ICON eecceecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesnaeenseeeee Save lCOn esiin ninn Save Project Data at Parameter Save Pushbutton 0 2 0 ceeeeseeeeeeteeeeeeeeees Saved Measurement VICWING oo eee ee eee ecee eee eeeeeeeeeeseeseaeseeesneeeeaeeeaes 25 SOOM ie erae aa nike etnies 5 40 SD Cards TroubleShooting cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeneeees SDHC Memory Cards Second Check Parameter 232 Secondary Microphone 5 Secure Digital Card Slotss dancunihinnkascniinniiGds 12 High Capacity Memory Cards eeeeeereereees 12 Selecting Default Measurement Job Path Tone Assessment Option Serial Measurements Automated Sequence Server Se
145. al list of parameters Set Start Slope to Rising if you want to start when the Trigger Parameter exceeds Start Level and stop when it goes below Stop Level or to Fa ingif you want to start when the Trigger Parameter goes below Start Level and stop when it exceeds Stop Level Set Start Duration for the number of seconds the Trigger Parameter must fulfil the trigger condition before the trigger point is acknowledged Set Stop Duration for the number of seconds the Trigger Parameter doesn t fulfil the trigger condition anymore to acknowledge the end point of the trigger see the relationship between the trigger parameters in Fig 11 2 Fig 11 2 Relationship between trigger parameters Laeq 100 dB 90dB Trigger Parameter Lpreq Start Slope Rising 80dB 70dB Start Duration lt gt 60dB l l lt _ gt Stop Duration I I 50dB Start Level 50aB l 40dB Stop Level 40 dB l Trigger Point 30 qB Trigger Point 20 dB 10 dB lt ys l lt gt 0 Pre recording BZ 7226 only Post recording BZ 7226 only Time in secs 050208 1 11 Under the Signal Recording parameters choose the settings for recording the signal while making a logging see Chapter 12 12 Under Input specify Trigger Input if you want to start the signal recording using an external trigger signal See details in Appendix A To exit the screen tap EJ CHAPTER 11 Logging Optional Module 11
146. an decrease battery operating time up to 35 Battery Cycle Life gt 500 complete charge discharge cycles Battery Aging Approximately 20 loss in capacity per year Battery Indicator Remaining battery capacity and expected working time may be read out in and in time Battery Fuel Gauge The battery is equipped with a built in fuel gauge which continuously measures and stores the actual battery capacity in the battery unit Charge Time In analyzer typically 10 hours from empty at ambient temperatures below 30 C To protect the battery charging will be terminated completely at ambient temperatures above 40 C At 30 to 40 C charging time will be prolonged With External Charger ZG 0444 optional accessory typically 5 hours Note It is not recommended to charge the battery at temperatures below 0 C 32 F or over 50 C 122 F Doing this will reduce battery lifetime CLOCK Back up battery powered clock Drift lt 0 45 s per 24 hr period Storage INTERNAL FLASH RAM NON VOLATILE For user setups and measurement data e Hardware versions 1 3 20 MB e Hardware version 4 512 MB EXTERNAL SECURE DIGITAL MEMORY CARD SD and SDHC Card For store recall of measurement data EXTERNAL COMPACT FLASH MEMORY CARD G1 3 Only CF Card For store recall of measurement data USB MEMORY STICK Hardware version 4 only For store recall of measurement data Environmental WARM UP TIME From Power Off lt 2 min
147. an start stop and pause your measurement from a safe distance For vibration measurements the Fast inst profile is shown Fig 7 1 No SIM 10 30 100 a MP Field App showing h Op the instantaneous LAF LAF Running 10 30 45 AMNA apts MA 20 10 29 51 10 30 14 10 30 36 K amp O E p te 7 3 1 Annotations MP Field App supports the following annotation types Note e Voice commentary e Image e Video e GPS All annotations are uploaded to MP Cloud for merging with the project in Measurement Partner Suite CHAPTER 7 73 Connection to PC or Smartphone or Measurement Partner Field App It is also possible to annotate your measurements directly on the analyzer using notes voice commentaries and images Type 2270 only These are transferred to Measurement Partner Suite along with your measurement data 7 3 2 Connect the Analyzer to MP Field App To connect using a smartphone hotspot On the smartphone 1 Create a personal hotspot Consult your smartphone help for instructions specific to your device On the analyzer 2 Switch on the analyzer 3 Plug in Wi Fi Dongle UL 1050 preferred or WLAN SD card UL 1021 for G4 analyzers or WLAN CF card UL 1019 for G1 3 analyzer Please note The CF card requires additional input See section 8 3 for additional information 4 Tap Main Menu gt Preferences gt Network Set IP Address and select Automatically Available Networks and select the hotsp
148. analyzer by connecting an extension cable and fitting the microphone to a microphone holder or to Outdoor Microphone Kit UA 1404 The analyzer should be set up using the following assembly instructions This is to ensure that the accessories have limited acoustical influence on the analyzer during measurement All the components described below are shown in Fig 2 1 and Fig 2 4 Mounting the Outdoor Microphone Kit For long term outdoor measurements Outdoor Microphone Kit UA 1404 will be required as an alternative to the windscreen If this is the case mount the kit onto the microphone and preamplifier combination according to assembly and mounting instructions in the User Manual for the Outdoor Microphone Kit BE 1077 Connecting a Microphone Extension Cable The optional extension cables that are recommended for use with Type 2250 2270 are e AO 0697 D 030 3 m long e AOQ 0697 D 100 10 m long Please note Connecting a recommended microphone extension cable has no acoustical effect on the analyzer s measurement and has no effect on calibration However although it is not essential to re calibrate it is good measurement practice to calibrate the whole measurement chain including microphone extension cable before starting a measurement To connect a microphone using an extension cable 1 Gently screw the microphone onto Preamplifier ZC 0032 see items 1 and 2 in Fig 2 1 2 Insert the preamplifier into the female plug of the exten
149. and BZ 7225 Enhanced logging it allows you to assess tones ina measured 1 3 octave spectrum according to ISO 1996 2007 Annex D or assess tones in a measured 1 3 octave spectrum according to Italian Law Ministero dell ambiente Decreto 16 marzo 1998 4 2 9 Low Frequency Option BZ 7234 This option enables e Measurements down to 0 4 Hz using Bruel amp Kj r low frequency microphones and adds G weighting parameters in accordance with ISO 7196 1995 e Measurements of building vibration parameters using Bruel amp Kj r low level accelerometers in accordance with ISO 2631 2 2003 ISO 8041 2005 DIN 45669 1 2010 09 and DIN 4150 2 1999 06 e 1 3 octave frequency analysis down to 0 8 Hz 1 1 octave down to 1 Hz This option can be used together with Sound Level Meter BZ 7222 Frequency Analyzer BZ 7223 Logging BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging BZ 7225 software modules and the 2 channel Option BZ 7229 4 3 4 3 1 4 4 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Built in Help If you need more detailed information at any time during operation tap the Help icon J on the analyzers screen The resulting screen will explain that particular item in much more detail You can scroll up and down the explanatory text using eitherthe and 4 pushbuttons or the scroll bar on the screen Return to the normal display screen by tapping EJ If you need to view any of the previous 10 screens you have visited in the help system
150. and Projects Settings c cccccccccsssssseseecsessssssececsceeseeaeeecececeessaeseeecscseeeaeseseesseseaeeeeees 296 Head PHOne Settings s sisvccscteccctinwoeds ctenrsescaweoesdasesauanbeeds cdsesnnceceeecvessusachiedeededseancatseeee fuundhedeedes 296 Printer Settings eieaa iaaii aaea aai gustiiiebssbecsnsstolbeblseossstovbebssvesesbouuas betes 298 Modem DynDNS Settings ccccccssecssssccssecessecssecesseecssececseecssecessecesseccasecssecsaeceeeeeceaeeeeeees 299 N twork Setting S neir reiii ei ta RE eena EEKE PETNE EAA AREE AEE aT E iaa 300 Measurement Partner Cloud Settings cccccccccsssssesccecsesssesececeeseseeaeseeeeesseeseseeseeeseaeaeees 302 Notification Settih gS nionee ea e a a ia EE nia betes 303 Remote Access Settings rae neea aia aaae iaiaeiaeiaa aeaea a eonan a Soal 306 Image Settings Type 2270 only ccccccccssscccesssecesesseceeeeseceessececesssececsseceesaeeecesseceenseeeeees 307 NMT Server Settings Hardware Version 4 only cccccccssscceessscecesssececsssseeeseeecessaeeeeseeeees 307 AATA T T T 309 E Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 Welcome This manual describes Type 2250 Hand held Analyzer and Type 2270 Hand held Analyzer platforms including Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 e Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 e Logging Software BZ 7224 e Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 e Signal Recording Option BZ 7226 e Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 e 2 channel Option B
151. ange 125 500 Hz is dominant and HF for hiss where the high frequency range 1000 4000 Hz is dominant Furthermore there are two variations of LF if the spectrum in the low frequency range is likely to introduce vibrations LFVA where there are clearly perceptible vibrations and LFVB where there are moderately perceptible vibrations The probable occupant evaluation describes how an occupant responds to a spectrum and can have the values Acceptable Marginal or Objectionable Described in the ASHRAE Handbook HVAC 2011 and ANSI 12 2 2008 Room Criteria is for rating room noise SIL Speech Interference Level is the arithmetic average of the 500 Hz 1 kHz 2 kHz and 4 kHz octave band levels PSIL Preferred Speech Interference Level is the arithmetic average of the 500 Hz 1 kHz and 2 kHz octave band levels Used for evaluating the interference of noise upon speech communication SIL3 Speech Interference Level based on highest 3 octaves is the arithmetic average of the 1 kHz 2 kHz and 4 kHz octave band levels Note Though SIL PSIL and SIL3 are defined for octave band levels they are also calculated for 1 3 octave band levels by summing the power values in the three bands within each octave before doing the averaging Maximum time weighted acceleration or voltage level measured with Linear frequency weighting and Slow time weighting It is the highest level occurring during the measurement time Minimum time weig
152. ange to display all measured frequency bands Please note e These settings only affect the frequency range of the display of measured data not the frequency range of the measurement itself e The Display range automatically resets if you change the filter Bandwidth setup parameter or change the Low Frequency setup parameter 118 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Fig 10 3 Adjusting the X axis 3 Scale the Y axis left hand vertical scale of the graphical display by tapping on the scale and accessing the drop down menu Fig 10 4 Hint You can also select the spectrum cursor and press the Accept pushbutton Fig 10 4 FREQUENCY ANALYZER Scaling the Y axis on the Spectrum display 8 dB res i 7 JE aay 2006 15 47 54 4 Select Auto Zoom to adjust the range of the Y axis for best fit of the measured spectrum 5 Select Zoom In Zoom Out to adjust the zoom 6 Select Scale Up Scale Down to adjust the full scale value on the Y axis or select Auto Scale to select the best scaling for viewing the spectra without adjusting the zoom CHAPTER 10 1 1 or 1 3 octave Frequency Analysis Optional Module 7 Spectrum Table shows the displayed part of the spectrum in tabular form as in Fig 10 5 Tap Table Format Ez at the top of the screen to select between three different viewing formats Two Parameters for displaying values from both spectra One Parameter for displaying values f
153. ant sound pressure level of 85 dB for 8 hours then the Dose is 100 A constant level 88 dB results in a Dose of 200 and a constant level of 82 dB results in a dose of 50 The Projected Dose is the Noise Dose based on measurement duration less than 8 hours assuming the sound level for the remaining time stays the same The Noise Dose is the averaged A weighted Noise Level taking the Threshold Level into account with Time Weighting U F or S and Exchange Rate Q 4 5 or 6 for an 8 hour period reference duration relative to the maximum allowed the Criterion Level expressed in percentage Example If the Criterion Level is 90 dB and a person is exposed to a constant average sound level of 90 dB for 8 hours with Time Weighting S and Exchange Rate 5 then the DoseSS5 is 100 A constant level 95 dB results in a DoseS5 of 200 and a constant level of 85 dB results in a doseS5 of 50 The Projected DoseS5 is the Noise DoseS5 based on measurement duration less than 8 hours assuming the sound level for the remaining time stays the same Sound Exposure is the energy of the A weighted sound calculated over the measurement time The unit is Pa h Exchange Rate is the increase in noise level that corresponds to a doubling of the noise level The Exchange Rate is used for calculation of Layug TWA TWA DoseUQ and ProjDoseUQ where U F or S and Q Exchange Rate 4 5 or 6 dB Please note Lpeg is always based on an Exchange Rate 3 E
154. ant to paste it and select Paste This can be done on the map as well as in the table If you want to measure at a specific number of receiver positions per source then the map for one receiver position per source for example will look like Fig 14 17 Fig 14 17 Map based measurement showing one receiver per source REVERBERATION TIME m 730 lt 1 25kHz gt m52 Please note There is only an Add Source icon Fig because the specified number of receivers is added automatically when adding a source CHAPTER 14 Reverberation Time Software Optional Module The Spectrum and Decay tabs function in the same way as when measuring without position managing The only difference is the indication of the position in the Status Field this is now a Source Receiver selector instead of a Position Number selector 14 5 Quality Indicators There are quality indicators for each frequency band in each reverberation time spectrum for each reverberation time spectrum These include letters symbols or smileys see Table 14 1 for an overview One of the quality indicators are recommended in ISO 3382 2 Annex B as a measure of how good the slope of the decay can be approximated to a straight line C xx The Curvature indicator if above 10 then the quality indicator meaning Decay is bent is set Table 14 1 Overview of Quality Indicators and Smileys Quality Smile Indica
155. are based on sampling the instantaneous spectrum every 100 ms 200 ms for Low Frequency set to LXS On The time weighting for the spectrum is either F or S The frequency weighting X is determined by Frequency Settings gt Spectrum Weighting Percentile N1 0 1 to 99 9 User defined percentile level where the value of Lynjq is exceeded for N1 of the elapsed time Percentile N2 0 1 to 99 9 User defined percentile level where the value of Lynp is exceeded for N2 of the elapsed time Percentile N3 0 1 to 99 9 User defined percentile level where the value of Lyy3 is exceeded for N3 of the elapsed time Percentile N4 0 1 to 99 9 User defined percentile level where the value of Lyng is exceeded for N4 of the elapsed time Percentile N5 0 1 to 99 9 User defined percentile level where the value of Lyng is exceeded for N5 of the elapsed time Percentile N6 0 1 to 99 9 User defined percentile level where the value of Lyng is exceeded for N6 of the elapsed time Percentile N7 0 1 to 99 9 User defined percentile level where the value of Lynz7 is exceeded for N7 of the elapsed time Not available in Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 Requires Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 The Percentile levels N1 to NZ are common to broadband and spectral statistics and can be changed after the measurement has been done 230 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual A 4 Measurement Control for BZ 7222 to BZ 7225
156. around the Start Pause pushbutton while you are measuring Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual The indicators are Yellow status indicator flashing every 5 s before starting the measurement Steady green status indicator after pressing the Start Pause pushbutton and during the measurement if everything is OK Short green flash every second means the measurement is waiting for the trigger Yellow status indicator flashing every 5s when you have stopped saved the measurement and are ready to do another measurement Yellow status indicator flashing slowly 0 5 s on 0 5 s off when paused Red status indicator flashing rapidly if you encounter an overload condition during the measurement 4 Use the Start Pause Continue Back erase and Reset pushbuttons to control the measurement The status field at the top of the screen will give short textual feedback on the pushbutton operation A visual indication of measurement status is also displayed on the status line by way of the Stopped icon W the Running icon and the Paused icon Fig 3 4 Fig 3 4 Measurement feedback in the Status Field gt LAF A 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 LAeq 82 7 dB LCpeak 125 4 dB LAF90 0 51 3 dB L Fmax 103 1 dB Measurement Mode Manual Broadband 5 Toggle between different display parameters as required by tapping on each parameter field for example LAF90 0 in Fig 3 4 with
157. ase or the Manual Event pushbuttons are pressed or the level trigger conditions are fulfilled For Logging BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging BZ 7225 templates only 239 240 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual A 10 Level Trigger Table A 10 Level Trigger parameters Parameter Values Comment Trigger On Off Set to On for setting Marker 3 Level when the Parameter fulfils the Level Trigger conditions see below The conditions are checked every second Signal Recording can also be controlled by these settings see Setup gt Signal Recording gt Recording Control parameter Start Slope Rising Falling Set to Rising to start when level goes above Start Level and then stop when level goes below Stop Level Set to Falling to start when level goes below Start Level and stop when level goes above Stop Level Start Level 100 to 200 dB Start trigger conditions are fulfilled when level crosses Start Level in accordance with Start Slope for at least Start Duration seconds set Start Level here Start Duration 0 to 420 s Start trigger conditions are fulfilled when level crosses Start Level in accordance with Start Slope for at least Start Duration seconds set Start Duration here The Start Duration will be limited by the internal recording buffer size and the Recording Quality and Resolution Table A 13 Stop Level 100 to 200 dB Stop
158. assemble and set up your analyzer including e Necessary information concerning the analyzer s hardware version e Adiagram and brief description of the analyzer components and various input and output connections e Anoverview of hardware components showing the main configurations of the analyzer and its accessories e Instructions on how to assemble standard and optional hardware components 2 1 Determining Your Hardware Version Analyzer hardware is periodically updated The most significant update was to hardware version 4 G4 in 2012 To check if your analyzer uses G4 hardware tap RJ then About The About screen will list the hardware and software versions currently installed 2 1 1 What is Different with G4 Hardware The differences in the G4 hardware compared to previous versions include e A brighter screen that is easier to view in direct sunlight e The CF card slot was replaced with a second SD card slot to take advantage of the SD format s dominance in the storage and Wi Fi markets e The USB connector was changed from USB 1 1 Mini B to USB 2 0 Micro AB The USB 2 0 connection speeds are faster and the Micro USB connector is more common e A second standard USB Type A socket was added for easier connection to USB peripherals such as Wi Fi dongles modems printers GPS receivers and USB to RS 232 adaptors e A100 Mbps Local Area Network LAN connector is available for both Types 2250 and 2270 4 Hand held Analyzer T
159. asurements are saved and can be opened later in the same way as described for the Sound Level Meter project in Chapter 3 202 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Chapter 18 Specifications This chapter comprises the specifications that are needed for evaluation of analyzer performance characteristics and proper use of the analyzer Some of the applicable sound level meter standards require additional technical documentation in particular for pattern evaluation type approval purposes but have no bearing on normal use The additional technical documentation is given in a separate Briel amp Kj r instruction manual BE 1712 Specifications Hand held Analyzer Type 2250 2270 Platform Specifications apply to Type 2250 2270 fitted with Microphone Type 4189 and Microphone Preamplifier ZC 0032 Microphone SUPPLIED MICROPHONE Type 4189 Prepolarized Free field Microphone or Type 4190 Free field 4 Microphone Nominal Open circuit Sensitivity 50 mV Pa corresponding to 26 dB re 1 V Pa 1 5 dB Capacitance 14 pF at 250 Hz MICROPHONE PREAMPLIFIER ZC 0032 Nominal Preamplifier Attenuation 0 25 dB Connector 10 pin LEMO Extension Cables Up to 100 m in length between the microphone preamplifier and Type 2250 2270 without degradation of the specifications Accessory Detection Windscreen UA 1650 can be automatically detected when fitted over ZC 0032 MICROPHONE POLARIZATION VOLTAGE Selectab
160. ated and activated For instance a new parameter value can be selected from a drop down list The selection and activation of items on the screen can be done in two ways e Tapping once on the item on the screen will select and activate it or e Moving the field selector around using the navigation keys until the item you want is highlighted then pressing the Accept pushbutton v to activate it You can choose to use the stylus or the pushbuttons depending on your preference and the measurement situation For instance if the amount of noise generated by the analyzer needs to be kept to an absolute minimum consider using the pushbuttons rather than the stylus this is because tapping of the stylus on the touch sensitive screen may create extra noise However if speed is of major importance the stylus can navigate through the setup and measurement screens quicker Throughout the manual we have described how to perform the measurement procedures using the stylus only but you may also use the alternative method using the Navigation and Accept pushbuttons if you prefer 4 5 6 How to Change Parameter Values Most parameter values are changed by selecting a new value from a drop down list which appears when the parameter field is selected See the example in Fig 4 3 Fig 4 3 Changing parameter values Output Socket Signal Occupational Health Quick t Stylus Usage Tap the value you want in the drop down or tap outside
161. ations and the measured signal Tap the gain parameter and use the keypad to enter anew setting Use to assign the new value for immediate response at the output or use the up down navigation keys to increment decrement the value Please note A 0 dB gain on the measurement signal means you get a 1 V output for a 1 V input when the measured signal Automatic Gain Control is set to Off hint e While playing back an annotation you can use the up down navigation keys to increase decrease the gain of the annotation e Ifyou do not want to listen to the input signal then set the Listen to Signa parameter to Wo to economize on power 8 1 6 8 2 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Printers You can make screen dumps on a printer connected to the analyzer using a standard USB cable or on G1 3 analyzers the supplied Adaptor AO 0657 Use the Printers to select your preferred printer When a printer has been selected under the Printer Used parameter then the Print Screen command in the Main Menu list appears Use this command to print a screen dump of any screen on the analyzer The printer must either be a mobile thermal printer from AM Tech or Seiko or accept the PCL printer language e MPS Mobile Pro Spectrum a mobile thermal printer from AM Tech www amteq co kr e PCL printers accepting PCL printer language e PCL Inkjet suitable for Inkjet printers and supports colour printing
162. atitude Longitude Altitude and position error Requires connection to a GPS receiver IMAGE ANNOTATIONS TYPE 2270 ONLY Image annotations can be attached to measurements Images can be viewed on the screen Calibration Initial calibration is stored for comparison with later calibrations ACOUSTIC Using Sound Calibrator Type 4231 or custom calibrator The calibration process automatically detects the calibration level when Sound Calibrator Type 4231 is used ELECTRICAL Uses internally generated electrical signal combined with a typed in value of microphone sensitivity CALIBRATION HISTORY Up to 20 of the last calibrations made are listed and can be viewed on the analyzer Data Management METADATA Up to 30 metadata annotations can be set per project text from keyboard or text from pick list number from keyboard or auto generated number PROJECT TEMPLATE Defines the display and measurement setups Setups can be locked and password protected PROJECT Measurement data stored with the project template JOB Projects are organized in jobs Explorer facilities for easy management of data copy cut paste delete rename open project create job set default project name Software Specifications Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 The specifications for BZ 7223 include the specifications for Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 BZ 7223 adds Standards Conforms with the following National and International Standar
163. ave band levels 1000 Hz 2000 Hz and 4000 Hz Lweg f1 f2 sum of power values for Lyeg frequency bands from f1 Hz to f2 Hz Statistics to Calculate Percentile Levels and Std Dev These parameters require license for BZ 7223 and measurement of spectra 267 268 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Low frequency Parameters requires Low Frequency Option BZ 7234 Leq LG10max LG10min LGpeak TGpeak e GPeaks gt xxx dB e GPeaks gt 137 dB e GPeaks gt 135 dB Weather Data requires connection to a weather station common to both channels in 2 channel templates e Wind Dir avg e Wind Dir min e Wind Dir max e Wind Speed avg e Wind Speed min e Wind Speed max Amb Temperature Amb Humidity Amb Pressure Amb Rain Gauge Spectrum Parameters Lwg LWFmax Lwsmax LWFmin LWSmin The Statistics can be logged in Periodic Reports to Calculate Percentile Levels as spectra B 3 Logged Measurement Microphone Input B 3 1 For Logging Software BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 Parameters measured within a logging interval up to ten or all of the following parameters can be logged Equivalent Continuous Sound Levels e Sound Exposure Level e e Peak Sound Level e Maximum Time weighted Sound Levels e e Minimum Time weighted Sound Levels e e US Occupational Health Parameters e Lyxeg L Ye
164. bration Next Calibration 01 07 2007 02 00 00 Last Calibration 01 07 2006 02 00 00 Calibration Interval 12 months Automatic Calibration Reminder On To order a calibration please contact your local Briel amp Kj r representative Calibration Details Reminder EBE Se 58 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual The automatic calibration reminder facility will pop up a reminder approximately two months before your next calibration and keep on reminding you every week until you do one of the following actions e Send your analyzer for Accredited Traceable Calibration and update the Last Calibration date e Check the Do not ask remind again checkbox in the reminder pop up e Disable the automatic calibration reminder An example of a reminder pop up is shown in Fig 5 7 Fig 5 7 Hand held Analyzer Type 2250 Reminder pop u E pop up INFORMATION Reminder for Accredited Traceable Calibration Last Calibration 28 05 2007 Next Calibration 28 05 2008 Please contact your local Br el amp Kj r representative for futher information O Do not ask remind again You can set the Ca ibration Interval parameter to either 12 months or 24 months depending on your local requirements You can disable the facility by selecting the Automatic Calibration Reminder parameter to Off 5 7 Charge Injection Calibration 5 7 1 Theory of Charge Injection Calibration If an external sound source is not available for example d
165. by bold type face within angle brackets for example lt Ctrl b gt means you should press the Ctrl button and b button at the same time 1 2 2 Beginners Before you read the rest of this manual read Briel amp Kj r s primer on Measuring Sound This will give you a basic idea of acoustic measurements It can be found on the www bksv com website by typing Primer in the search window The website also contains lots of other information you might find useful Further information is available in the online help installed on the analyzer 1 2 3 Experienced Users of Acoustic Measurement Equipment The manual is designed so that you do not have to read all of it to be able to use the analyzer It is built around the most frequently used operations these are as follows e Assembling your Analyzer see Chapter 2 e Making your First Measurement see Chapter 3 e Getting to Know Your Analyzer see Chapter 4 e Calibration see Chapter 5 e Data Management see Chapter 6 e Connection to PC or Smartphone or Measurement Partner Field App see Chapter 7 e Advanced Use of the Analyzer Tips and Tricks see Chapter 8 e Updating and Upgrading Applications Maintenance and Troubleshooting see Chapter 9 However it is recommended that you read the entire manual for appropriate procedures on how to use the analyzer to obtain accurate sound level measurement results 3s Chapter 2 Assembling your Analyzer This chapter describes how to
166. calibrated at Briel amp Kj r This will save you time If any other errors are detected by the technician during calibration repair will be performed before returning the analyzer to you 113 114 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Repair is available at a fixed price which includes a Conformance Test Certificate upon the return of your analyzer no measurement data included 9 6 7 Rental To ensure optimal uptime you can rent a substitute hand held analyzer while yours is being calibrated To arrange rental please contact your local Briel amp Kj r representative 9 6 8 Training Basic knowledge on sound and vibration measurement analyzer training and application training are a few examples of what local training or consultancy hours can do for you To find out more about training and consultancy hours please contact your local Briel amp Kj r representative Providing this service is available from your local Briel amp Kj r office Chapter 10 1 1 or 1 3 octave Frequency Analysis Optional Module Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 enables you to make 1 1l octave or 1 3 octave measurements and broadband sound level measurements simultaneously Check the About screen to see whether you have a license to run this module To access the About screen tap the Help icon gg then tap About See Chapter 9 for instructions on installing licenses Setting up the Analyzer The Frequency Analyz
167. can check the complete measurement chain during long term measurement using Charge Injection Calibration See section 5 7 Vibration Calibration You can calibrate accelerometers using Calibration Exciter Type 4294 See section 5 8 Sound Level Calibration Standard Calibration Use Sound Calibrator Type 4231 It provides a stable sound pressure at 1 kHz and has minimal susceptibility to environmental factors The procedure itself is relatively simple and on the analyzer the procedure is referred to as the Standard Calibration procedure To perform acoustic calibration and to fit the calibrator 1 Stand away from loud sound sources that may interfere with the calibrator s signal 2 Switch on the analyzer push 3 Tap Main Menu Eq gt Calibration to open the Calibration screen Fig 5 1 Fast Inst 21 2m m s2 TO 31 624 3 31 62m 31 62 Calib Time 07 11 2013 18 14 03 Sensitivity 250 00 mV m s2 Deviation from last 0 00 dB Input Channel Ch 1 Details Remind 13 12 36 CHAPTER 5 53 Calibration This screen contains a bar graph showing the actual sound pressure level and three placeholders for displaying information about the last calibration 4 Following the first part of the instruction in the Status Field fit Sound Calibrator Type 4231 carefully onto the microphone of the analyzer To avoid handling vibrations that disturb the calibration rest the assembly in a roughly horizontal position on a table or othe
168. cays based on the actual reverberation time of the room Maximum Measurement Time from 2 to 30s Averaging EDT T20 and T30 measurements can be averaged arithmetic averaging or ensemble averaging EDT T20 and T30 Calculation From slope in evaluation range Slope Estimation Least squares approximation Quality Indicators Quality Indicators with status information like Overload Curvature in etc extensive list of status information Quality indicators are available on reverberation time spectra for each frequency band and as overall quality indicators for each measurement position and for the total project room Reverberation Time Range Max 50 s min 0 1 0 7 s depending on bandwidth and centre frequency Wide Band Reverberation Time The arithmetic average of the Reverberation Time within a selectable frequency range is calculated Measurement Display and Control OVERVIEW MAP Map of Source and Receiver positions with reverberation time readout for a selectable frequency band on each measurement position together with quality indicator Organization of Source and Receiver Positions measure at all receiver positions for each source or measure in a number of positions 1 to 10 for each source Source and Receiver positions can be added moved or deleted OVERVIEW TABLE Table of measurement positions with reverberation time readout for selectable frequency band on each position together with quality indicator Positions
169. cers Available for Microphone input only Range Setting Low Range Select Low Range or High Range for input channels High Range Please note High Range will select a range with 0 dB gain which allows the highest possible input Low Range will select a range with 30 dB gain available in Type 2270 2 channel templates only Requires Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 Not available in Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 A 2 Frequency Settings Table A 2 Frequency setting parameters APPENDIX A Setup Parameters Parameter Values Comment Low Frequency Option Off Set to ON to enable the Low Frequency setting Very Low and the G and Wm frequency weightings On Requires Low Frequency Option BZ 7234 Low Frequency Normal Use this parameter to extend the low frequency of the broadband measurements and the frequency analysis Extended However be aware that the measurements will be more very Low sensitive to very low frequency noise such as wind noise Low Frequency Normat Frequency analysis 1 1 octave 16 Hz 16 kHz 1 3 octave 12 5 Hz 20 kHz Low Frequency Extended Frequency analysis 1 1 octave 8 Hz 16 kHz 1 3 octave 6 3 Hz 20 kHz Low Frequency Very Low Frequency analysis 1 1 octave 1 Hz 16 kHz 1 3 octave 0 8 Hz 20 kHz Requires Low Frequency Option BZ 7234 For microphone input this setting is only possible for microphone Types 4193 and 4964 including Low Frequency
170. ctrum Zoom In Zoom Out to adjust the zoom e Auto Scale to select the best scaling for viewing the spectra without adjusting the zoom e Scale Up Scale Down to adjust the full scale value on the Y axis Show Hide Regression Line to show hide the regression line and the evaluation range for the main decay together with the two quality indicators C and amp CHAPTER 14 Reverberation Time Software Optional Module 14 4 Measurements with Graphical Position Management The analyzer can keep track of the source and receiver positions in a graphical way together with the measurements To do this make the following settings on the Setup screen 1 Set Map Based Measurement Yesin the Measurement Control setup the reverberation decays will then be placed graphically on the map shown on the Overview tab and numbered as source receiver relations for example SLR2 means the decay measurement with noise from Source 1 and measured at Receiver position 2 2 Set Meas All Pos for Each Source Yes for measuring all combinations of source and receiver positions Set to Wo if you want to measure at a specific number of receiver positions per source 3 Set No of Positions per Source to the number of receiver positions you want to measure per source 4 Set Increment to Sources First Receivers First or Manual Typically Sources First is best for Impulsive excitation you can then walk between the source positions and generate the
171. ctrum in a table see an example in Fig 14 9 CHAPTER 14 Reverberation Time Software Optional Module Fig 14 9 Spectrum Table EK Spectrum table Freq T30 T30Status gt 100Hz 0 68s eF 125Hz 0 60sok 160 Hz 0 79 s 0 k 200Hz 0 88s 250Hz 1 02s 0 k 315 Hz 1 00s 400Hz 1 12sok 500 Hz 0 79s 630 Hz 0 74s 800 Hz 0 63s 1kHz 0 70s 1 25kHz 0 61s 1 6kHz 0 62s 2kHz 0 64s 2 5kHz 0 68s 3 15kHz 0 61s J 14 10 31 Auxiliary Parameters Below the graphics are two lines containing parameters for displaying the wide band reverberation times for the current position or the room average You are also able to display the Lcr and Lar broadband values 14 3 3 Decay The Decay tab shows the reverberation time decay from a position or the room average or both Fig 14 10 Status Field The Status Field on the Decay tab is the same as on the Overview and Spectrum tabs Decay Graph The Decay graph shows the decay of one frequency band for the selected position and or the decay of the same frequency band for the room average requires Ensemble Averaging The Decay Parameter selectors above the graph select which decay to display 720 Pos 730 Pos or EDT Pos Each of these selections show the decay for the measurement at the selected position together with the readout of T20 Pos T30 Pos and EDT Pos resp 720 730 and EDT show the decay for the Room Average together with the readout of T20 T30 and EDT resp If you only want one
172. d Free Field Diffuse Field From the typical total inherent noise level for the microphone and Type 2250 2270 to the overload limit for a sinusoidal signal at 1 kHz t Type 2250 2270 Low Frequency set to Extended Type 2250 2270 Low Frequency set to Very Low Detailed specifications for the analyzer together with the different microphones are available Please contact your local Bruel amp Kj r representative if you need more information The analyzer has correction filters to optimise the frequency response of each microphone The relevant filter is automatically applied when you select the microphone for input be it via the top socket or the rear input socket Note for Microphone Type 4193 and Type 4964 Microphone Type 4193 is delivered with the Adaptor UC 0211 for Microphone Type 4964 it is ordered separately Adaptor UC 0211 is only used when measurements are made on signals that contain components at frequencies below 1 Hz that should be included in the measurement This is only for Low Frequency set to Very Low It is not recommended to use the adaptor for other signals or settings because it reduces the dynamic range significantly 292 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Appendix D Preferences This appendix describes the unique set of parameters that can be set for each user on the analyzer D 1 Display Settings For each colour scheme select the optimum choice of brigh
173. d below If this is the case please refer to section Please note A stylus is stored in a holder on the side of the analyzer see item 15 in Fig 2 1 This can be 3 1 used on the touch sensitive screen to select icons and functions during the procedures that follow Alternatively you can use the various pushbuttons see items 3 to 11 in Fig 2 1 The following procedures assume that the measurement microphone and preamplifier have been mounted as described in Chapter 2 and the analyzer has a fully charged battery see section 2 5 1 Point and Shoot Using the following basic procedure you will be able to start using your hand held analyzer immediately to make measurements and start the familiarization process 1 Switch on by pressing and make sure the SOUND LEVEL METER project template is selected see section 3 2 2 for instructions 2 Check that the data path at the top of the screen displays the correct job project that is where you want to save the new data See section 6 1 1 3 Set Measurement Mode to Manual and change any Setup parameters by tapping Main Menu gt Setup 4 Press the Start Pause pushbutton then monitor the status indicator traffic light 5 Use the Start Pause Continue Back erase and Reset pushbuttons to control the measurement 20 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 6 When measurement has finished press the Save amp pushbutton to save your dat
174. d no projects had been saved before in the directory e Project 001 e Project 002 e Project 003 If you have set the Charge Injection Calibration parameter to On then a CIC calibration is performed at specified times of the day An Exclude marker is set on the logging profile at the point where the CIC is being performed The update of the 7ota parameters and the Periodic Reports is stopped while the CIC is being performed You can see the results of the CIC calibration under 7ota parameters CIC Result 1 to 4 The CIC result can be either Passed Background noise too high or CIC Ratio deviates from Ref The Ref mentioned here is the reference created by the very first manual CIC and is the one used as the reference to all subsequent CIC ratio measurements see section 5 7 Please note If a level trigger is active when the CIC is due to start then the CIC will not be done 12 2 1 Annotating a Project Measurements can be annotated in the same way as you annotate Logging measurements See section 11 2 1 12 2 2 Recording the Signal Signal recordings can be done in the same way as described under Logging measurements See section 11 2 2 12 3 Displaying the Results The Enhanced Logging Measurement screen includes three tabs at the bottom Profile Spectrum and Broadband as the Logging Measurement screen does You view data in the same way as in the Logging module You mark and annotate sound categories and edit markers and ann
175. d signals Please note e The frequency weighting of the signal you listen to can be selected independently of the frequency weighting of the measurement the signal at the output socket and the signal used for signal recording e X frequency weighting A or B A requires that Broadband excl Peak is set to AC or AZ B requires that Broadband excl Peak is set to BC or BZ Preferences Table D 5 Cont Headphone settings Parameter Values Comment Automatic Gain Control On To ease identification of sound sources the Off gain can be automatically adjusted to keep the average level within a 40 dB range When playing back the recorded signal you will then hear clearly the whole signal content whether the level has been 20 dBor 140 dB Set Automatic Gain Control to On to convert the signal at the headphone output Set Automatic Gain Control to Offfor listening to the signal with a fixed gain Gain for Meas Signal 80 0 dBto 60 0 dB for Automatic Gain Control set to Off 60 0 dBto 0 0 dB for Automatic Gain Control set to On Key in again value 0 1 dB resolution forthe measurement input signal Use toassign thenewvalue forimmediate response at the output or use the up down navigation keys to increment decrement the value in steps of 1 dB Please note 0 dB means 1 V output for 1 V input Automatic Gain Control set to Off Gain for Annotations 60 dBto 6
176. dB to 139 7 dB Low Range 30 6 dB to 109 7 dB Peak C Range In accordance with IEC 61672 1 kHz e High Range 58 5 dB to 142 7 dB e Low Range 42 3 dB to 112 7 dB Frequency Analysis Dynamic Range From typical noise floor to max level for a pure tone signal at 1 kHz 1 3 octave e High Range 18 5 to 140 dB e Low Range 1 3 to 110 dB Linear Operating Range In accordance with IEC 61260 e High Range lt 39 3 to 140 dB e Low Range lt 20 6 to 110 dB Measurements with BZ 7222 and BZ 7223 Two channels each with all the data from the single channel measurement except for common housekeeping parameters like Start Time Elapsed Time etc and weather and GPS data Underrange Detector Monitors the underrange of all the frequency weighted detectors Underrange is set if level is below lower limit of Linear Operating Range Detectors available for both Ch 1 and Ch 2 AUTORANGE Manual and automatic range controls are provided Spectrum Display for BZ 7223 Spectra from both channels can be superimposed Data from different transducer types are displayed with individual Y axis Spectra for Display Microphone Input e Ch 1 Ch 2 Lyeq e Ch 2 Ch 1 Lyeg X A B CorZ Spectra for Display Accelerometer or Direct Input e Ch 1 Ch 2 Linear e Ch 2 Ch 1 Linear Single Values for Display Microphone Input e Ch 1 Ch 2 Lyeg e Ch 2 Ch 1 Leq e Ch 1 Ch 2 Lyeq e Ch 2 Ch 1 Lyeg X AorB Y CorZ Single Values
177. damage the microphone in this way Do not attempt to open the analyzer There are no user serviceable parts inside If you think your analyzer requires service please contact your Br el amp Kj r representative Do not allow the analyzer to get wet Protect the analyzer from impact Do not drop it Transport it in the supplied carrying pouch Cleaning the Analyzer If the analyzer casing becomes dirty then wipe it with a lightly dampened cloth Do not use abrasive cleansers or solvents Do not allow moisture to enter the microphone connectors or casing 9 5 3 Storing the Analyzer Keep the analyzer in a dry place preferably within its carrying pouch For long term storage remove the battery pack Do not exceed storage temperature limits of 25 to 70 C 13 to 158 F 9 6 9 6 1 9 6 2 9 6 3 9 6 4 9 6 5 9 6 6 CHAPTER 9 Updating and Upgrading Applications Maintenance Calibration and Troubleshooting Services at Briel amp Kj r for Types 2250 and 2270 Accredited Calibration For Types 2250 and 2270 you can order accredited calibration and choose between DANAK A2LA UKAS Eichamt Austria RvA ENAC NATA and Inmetro For Spain Primitiva is available The calibration will be performed in an ISO 17025 certified laboratory Initial Calibration To start the measurement history from day one ifthis is required for example for measurement use in public for customer audit or quality procedures
178. dn Statistics to Calculate Percentile Levels and Std Dev Low frequency Parameters requires Low Frequency Option BZ 7234 Leeq LG10max LG10min LGpeak e TGpeak e GPeaks gt xxx dB e GPeaks gt 137 dB e GPeaks gt 135 dB These parameters require license for BZ 7223 and measurement of spectra These parameters are available for Enhanced Logging BZ 7225 only Measurement Parameters Weather Data requires connection to a weather station common to both channels in 2 channel templates e Wind Dir avg Wind Dir min e Wind Dir max e Wind Speed avg e Wind Speed min e Wind Speed max Amb Temperature Amb Humidity e Amb Pressure Amb Rain Gauge Spectrum Parameters e L Weq L WFmax L WsSmax e Lwemin LWsSmin Statistics to Calculate Percentile Levels as Spectra CIC Results e CIC 1 Result e CIC 1 Dev from Reference e CIC 2 Result e CIC 2 Dev from Reference CIC 3 Result e CIC 3 Dev from Referencet e CIC 4 Resultt e CIC 4 Dev from Referencet In addition to the parameters saved within the data listed above the following can be inserted in a project annotation as a GPS Note e Position as Latitude and Longitude e Altitude e Position error dependant on type of GPS unit These parameters are available for Logging BZ 7224 only These parameters are available for Enhanced Logging BZ 7225 only 266 Hand held Analyze
179. ds e IEC 61260 1 2014 1 1 octave Bands and 1 3 octave Bands Class 1 e IEC 61260 1995 07 plus Amendment 1 2001 09 1 1 octave Bands and 1 8 octave Bands Class 0 e ANSI 1 11 1986 1 1 octave Bands and 1 8 octave Bands Order 3 Type O C e ANSI 1 11 2004 1 1 octave Bands and 1 3 octave Bands Class 0 e ANSI ASA 1 11 2014 Part 1 1 1 octave Bands and 1 octave Bands Class 1 Input CHANNELS TYPE 2270 ONLY All measurements are made from either Ch 1 or Ch 2 Frequency Analysis CENTRE FREQUENCIES 1 1 oct Band Centre Frequencies 8 Hz to 16 kHz 1 oct Band Centre Frequencies 6 3 Hz to 20 kHz MEASUREMENTS FOR SOUND INPUT X frequency weightings A B Cor Z Y time weightings F or S Data for Storage Full Spectral Statistics Spectra for Display and Storage Lxeq LxSmax LxFmax LxSmin LxFmin Spectra for Display Only Lxs LyF Lxyn1 Lxyn2 Lxyn3 Lxyn4 Lyyns Lyyne Lyyn7 Single Values SIL PSIL SIL3 Lxeqlf1 f2 NR NR Decisive Band RC RC Classification NCB NCB Classification NC NC Decisive Band Loudness Loudness Level where f1 and f2 are frequency bands in the spectrum MEASUREMENTS FOR VIBRATION AND DIRECT INPUT Spectra for Display and Storage Linear Fast max Fast min Slow min Slow max Spectra for Display Only Fast Inst Slow Inst Single Values Linear f1 f2 where f1 and f2 are frequency bands in the spectrum MEASURING RANGES When using Microphone Type 4189 Dyna
180. e WAV files enough to hear weak sounds If this is needed then use 16 bits per sample 149 150 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Chapter 14 Reverberation Time Software Optional Module 14 1 Introduction Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 enables you to measure reverberation time in 1 1 octave or 1 3 octave Check the About screen to see whether you have a license to run this module To access the About screen tap the Help icon fg then tap About See Chapter 9 for instructions on installing licenses 14 1 1 Definition Reverberation Time RT is the most important parameter describing the acoustic quality of a room or space It is important for sound levels speech intelligibility and the perception of music In addition it is used to correct for the effects of RT on building acoustics and sound power measurements RT is the decay time for sound in a room after the excitation stops It is the time for a 60 dB drop in level but the decay is usually evaluated over a 10 20 or 30 dB drop using the measurements within these ranges to make a regression line which is then extrapolated to the 60 dB range Fig 14 1 RT may be labelled EDT T20 and T30 respectively for those three evaluation ranges EDT is used in room acoustics only while T20 and T30 may be used for Building Acoustics Sound Power and Absorption Coefficient measurements as well RT is measured in 1 1 or 1 3 octave frequency bands so
181. e The Logging project template assumes you have a license for the Frequency Analysis Software If not then select the Logging SLM project template instead 2 Depending on your memory device e Insert an SD memory card in a SD card slot at the bottom of the analyzer e If you have G1 3 analyzers you can insert a CF memory card in the CF card slot at the bottom of the analyzer e With G4 analyzers you can use a USB Type A stick at the bottom of the analyzer You will be notified that a memory card has been inserted select Yesto change the default measurement path to the memory card Please note You cannot log data on the internal disk 3 Tap Main Menu gt Explorer from the list of options Create a job folder for the measurements and set the default measurement job path as described in Chapter 6 4 Tap Main Menu FE gt Setup Fig 11 1 Set the Input Frequency Settings and Statistics parameters as required for the Sound Level Meter and Frequency Analyzer measurements see Chapter 3 and Chapter 10 respectively These settings are common to both the logging and the total measurement Fig 14 a The Setup screen Input A Frequency Settings Statistics Measurement Control Logged Broadband 100 ms Logged Broadband Logged Spectrum Markers Level Trigger Signal Recording Output Socket Signal Occupational Health Tone Assessment 5 Under the Measurement Control parameters set the Measurement
182. e None High 16 1 1 Underrange Overload In case of an Underrange indication in line 2 of the status panel High Range only change to Low Range In case of Overload indication typically Low Range change to High Range Or use Autorange which takes a few seconds The latched overload is indicated per channel using icons For Ch 1 4 for Ch 2 34 and for both channels 44 16 2 Setting Up 2 channel Sound Level Meter 1 Select the 2 Ch SOUND LEVEL METER project template The project template is displayed at the top of the screen if it does not display the correct template tap the Project Template Bar at the top of the screen and select the correct template from the drop down menu See section 3 2 1 for more details on templates 2 Tap Main Menu gt Setup gt Fig 16 3 Frequency Settings to set Broadband frequency weighting parameters as required Statistics to set statistics parameters as required 3 Tap EJ to exit 185 186 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Fig 16 3 Setting the frequency and statistics parameters 15 15 45 16 2 1 Controlling the Measurement The measurement is controlled in the same way you would control a normal Sound Level Meter measurement using Start Pause Continue Back erase and Reset pushbuttons see Chapter 3 for more details The two channels are controlled and measured simultaneously thus some of the housekeeping parameters are co
183. e UL 1050 is in the USB slot Set IP Address This setting is common to LAN and Wi Fi connections Automatically Obtain an IP address from a DHCP server if no server available then a Link local address will be set Manually You have to set the IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Preferred DNS and Alternate DNS see below IP Address The IP address of the analyzer Selectable if Set IP Address Manually Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask combined with the IP Address identifies the network segment the analyzer is on Selectable if Set IP Address Manually Default Gateway Address to a gateway for routing to another network Selectable if Set IP Address Manually Preferred DNS The IP address of the primary DNS server 92 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Alternate DNS The IP address of the secondary DNS server MAC Address The Media Access Control MAC address of the network adaptor LAN or Wi Fi in use The MAC address is a unique identifier assigned to the network adaptor This field is for information only Status The status of the network connection Operationat the network adaptor can be used for a connection e Non operationat the network adaptor cannot be used Parameters for Wi Fi Only Name Name SSID of the network you want to connect to Update the name either by e entering a name directly or e tapping on Available Networks and selecting a name from the list Please note
184. e analyzer s setup 8 Reset Measurement Pushbutton Clear the current measurement from the screen 9 4 Start Pause Continue Pushbutton Start pause or continue with a measurement 10 Status Indicator The red yellow or green lights or LEDs referred to as the Traffic Light either side of the Start Pause pushbutton indicate important states of the analyzer during operation that is measurement stopped paused or running See Chapter 4 for further details 11 amp Save Pushbutton Save measurement results 12 Display Screen A high contrast colour touch sensitive screen 13 Main Menu Icon Calls up the Main Menu which allows you to navigate immediately to all the main functions of the analyzer such as Setup Explorer or Data browser Preferences and Calibration 14 Power on Pushbutton Turns the analyzer on and off If held in for 1 second the analyzer goes into standby mode if held in for more than 4 seconds it turns the analyzer off 15 Stylus Stored in a holder on the side of the analyzer for use on the touch sensitive screen You can choose to use the stylus or the hardkeys depending on your preference and the measurement situation Also see section 4 5 5 16 Secondary Microphone Add recorded comments to measurements positioned on the underside of the analyzer 8 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 17 Top Socket The main microphone input socket f
185. e country of use Data may change as well as legislation therefore you are advised to obtain copies of the most recently issued applicable regulations standards and guidelines All descriptions illustrations and any other information relating to the product are made by way of general description are approximate only and for the general guidance and information of the user They cannot be construed to imply representation or warranty as to their accuracy currency or completeness and are not intended to form the basis of any contract The information in this document does not constitute a warranty representation or guarantee concerning the suitability or performance of the product Briel amp Kj r shall not be liable for any loss whether direct indirect incidental or consequential arising from the use of or reliance upon any of the content of this document regardless of whether such content has been accurate or complete Briel amp Kjaer will not pay any damages whether for loss or injury punitive or otherwise because of use of or reliance upon any of the content in this document Briel amp Kj r and all other trademarks service marks trade names logos and product names are the property of Bruel amp Kj r or a third party company Nothing in this document may be construed as granting by implication or otherwise any license or right to use any of the trademarks withouta priorwritten permission of Briel amp Kj r or the o
186. e parameters microphone capacitance Cm etc will change e e and hence indicate probable changes in calibration Microphone Preamplifier Cable Generator 970294 1 5 7 2 Performing a Manual CIC with your Type 2250 2270 CIC is only available for microphones connected to the Top Socket of the Analyzer and with Logging Software BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 Tap Main Menu gt Calibration from the list Click the CIC tab to view the various CIC parameters that are available The available parameters will include the results of the latest manual CIC together with the reference Fig 5 9 The Status Field at the top of the screen informs you how to perform the CIC Press the Start CIC button to start the CIC After approximately 10 s you will see the result Normally the CIC Reference Ratio is set the very first time a CIC is performed however you should update the CIC Reference Ratio if you change the microphone preamplifier You do this by checking the Use as new Reference checkbox The CIC Reference Ratio and CIC Ref Date parameters display the results of the very first manual CIC and this will be used as the reference for all subsequent CIC Ratio measurements Please note Each microphone in the transducer database has a CIC Reference Ratio If the CIC Ratio parameter deviates by more than 0 5 dB from the CIC Reference Ratio there may be a problem and it should be investigated 60 Hand h
187. e speed test is successful then you can proceed using the device otherwise you should use another memory device or try reformatting the device if not done already Problems with Storing or Recalling Data If you experience problems in storing or recalling data on the memory device you can check and repair the integrity of the file system on the device or even re format it by doing the following 1 Insert the memory device in the correct slot of the connector panel of the analyzer 2 You will be notified that a memory device has been inserted select Yesto change the default measurement path to it 3 Tap Main Menu gt Explorer 4 Tap to go up folder levels until you have reached the topmost level with a list of the available memory devices 5 Tap the name of the device not the icon to get a list of available commands 6 Select Check and Repair to start the procedure If any errors are found in the file system they are fixed When finished you will be informed whether the memory device was OK or that errors have been fixed Please note The checking procedure can take several minutes depending on the size of the device To format a memory device Caution All data on the device will be erased during the formatting process Do not remove the device or switch off the analyzer during the procedure this might damage the file system and data and make the device unusable 7 Select Format to start the formatting proced
188. e time specified in the Backlight Dim parameter the backlight level will change to the dim level Minimum e ForG1 3 analyzers this state will hold for the time specified in the Turn off Backlightparameter if still left unused If the analyzer has been left unused for the time specified in the Backlight Dimparameter plus the 7urn off Backlighttime period then the backlight will be switched off completely Fig 8 4 Use the keyboard or tap the screen to switch the backlight on again e For G4 analyzers the backlight will never be switched off completely because the Minimum dim level already has the lowest power consumption Fig 8 4 Standby Parameter Power Settings overview Backlight Dim Turn off Backlight Parameter Parameter hardware v 1 3 Backlight off gt Time 040284 2 82 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual If the analyzer is left unused not measuring and not communicating over the USB interface it will go to Standby after the time specified in the Standby parameter If in Standby mode you must press to switch the analyzer on again The analyzer will automatically switch off when it has been in Standby mode without external power for more than 30 hours Please note e Ifthe analyzer is powered externally the Standby After parameters are ignored and 8 1 3 Fig 8 5 the analyzer will never go to Standby However if the analyzer is left un
189. e to Unknown on the Transducer menu for the used transducer when using Rear Socket Input Sound Field Correction Free field Diffuse field Select a correction matching the sound field of your measurements that is you can make correct measurements in a diffuse field using a Type 4189 or 4190 free field microphone by selecting Diffuse field correction Even Free fie d correction of a free field microphone will enhance the overall frequency response of the system Generally ISO requires free field conditions and ANSI requires diffuse field conditions Check your local standards for the setting you require No correction is made for unknown transducers Available for Microphone input only Windscreen Auto Detect On Off Automatic detection of Windscreen UA 1650 when mounted on Microphone Preamplifier ZC 0032 The preamplifier should be connected to the top socket if necessary using a microphone extension cable This parameter is available for microphone types using ZC 0032 only 225 226 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Table A 1 Cont Input parameters Parameter Values Comment Windscreen Correction None If Windscreen Auto Detect is set to Off you can manually select a windscreen correction suitable for the windscreen UA 1650 in use Correction is automatically made for the windscreen on Types 4952 and 4184 A No correction is made for UA 1404 unknown transdu
190. eaeees Holp iiine Input Microphone Parameter Loudspeaker Malini MON U isis crs cstsevecresccnrecrenrevesnes aaa Power Supply Connected ceeceeeeeeeeees RUNNING A oaase a a eraran AAEE a Stopped Windscreen Fitted Diffuse Field ccceee 42 IEC 61672 1 Standard ccccccccssccessseccessseseeseeeeees 14 Image PAGING 24s este seis civectaasthinsettises ao e Aara Image Event Image ICON eee Impulse Time Weighting cece ee eeeeeeeeeeees 31 Impulse Trigger Parameter eee eeeeeeeeeeeee 235 Impulsive Method 156 Reverberation Time s Indicator Statusa nena ann 5 Indoor Colour SCHEME n se 80 Initial Calibration 113 Input Ch 1 for Type 2270 224 Input Ch 2 for Type 2270 11 Input for Microphone eee ce eee eee eeeeeteeeeeeeeee 9 Input Microphone Parameter ICON assessesssssreerisrenernrianeerreanreirearrnsenas 42 Input Parameters Channel 1 for Type 2270 esee 224 For Type 2250 For Type 2270 cscscccsseessteseeees san Inserting Annotations Using Explorer ss 65 Install AppliGations psonn sesa 103 Language s ssseseessesrrerresrnsrenrenrennnensennrnnreasensenne 83 Install LANQUAGE scceseceesesseeseeessseesseesseeseoees 103 INDEX 325 Instantaneous GPS Dalai rini 3 SHORE Measured Spectra s Peak Sound Levels Time weighted Sound Levels e eeeeee
191. easurements GPS Data ME AE AEE E 33 Instantaneous cccceccceeeeeetteeeeeeeeeesseeeeees 33 272 GPS data GPS Note iiri tiatipa 27 98 265 GPS Recea arsane a a a i a 27 GPS Receivers CONNECON Anaia ive Weve Rees 97 TYPOS ici A O E AAT 98 GWeiQhtinG ceninin s 194 H Hand held Analyzer sesssseeseeseriesresrerrerrnerrerrsrnes 32 Handling the Analyzer 112 Hardware Maintenance 113 Hardware Overview Hardware Setup nikne seini 13 Hardware Version 3 36 TES Seteewe shed T Ate aenitacldes 7 4 P eecesiet es esc d 3 6 8 Headphone SettingS ccceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 85 CIP sei ctietse fasts cat tearedacsvcndutses T 36 Help lcOn clans 3 aiid 36 43 High Speed USB and LAN Interfaces 6 Hinged Cover FB 0679 How Do We Measure Reverberation Time 152 How to Change Parameter Values How to Install New Applications 0 ee How to Manage the Project Templates 00 48 How to Move a License PA How to Update Upgrade Applications 0 103 How to Use this Manual cccceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeneeeeees 1 B QINNEMS vivessero enii aaaeaii 2 Experienced USers sssssssssrssesssrresreerrnernerrnsrncrnasns 2 FAWHOO a E EEEE 94 7 l Icon AnNOtatONS cccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeteneeeees 41 Backlight Battery power Status eeeeeeeeeene Commentary 00 eee eeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeteseeeeee
192. ecordings can only be done during measurements e Signal recordings can only be done on projects saved on memory cards or with G4 analyzers on a USB memory stick 13 1 1 Setting up the Analyzer 1 Select a SOUND LEVEL METER project template or a FREQUENCY ANALYZER project template see section 3 2 1 for more details on templates 142 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 2 Depending on your memory device Insert an SD memory card in a SD card slot at the bottom of the analyzer If you have G1 3 analyzers you can insert a CF memory card in the CF card slot at the bottom of the analyzer With G4 analyzers you can use a USB Type A stick at the bottom of the analyzer Please note You cannot record the signal on the internal disk 3 Tap Main Menu gt Explorer Navigate to the memory card create a job folder for the measurements and set the default measurement job path as described in Chapter 6 4 Tap Main Menu FE gt Setup Set all the parameters as required for the Sound Level Meter or Frequency Analyzer measurement see Chapter 3 and Chapter 10 respectively 5 Under Signal Recording you can specify the Recording Control parameters as follows Automatic if you want to start the recording when you start the measurement and stop when you pause the measurement and to limit the recording to Maximum Duration if Duration Limit is set to On Manual Event if you want to start and stop the recording u
193. ected if you have connected a modem but only want to use the SMS facility of the modem or when you physically connect or disconnect the modem Set to GPRS EDGE HSPA Dialup if you have a GPRS EDGE HSPA modem connected and you want the analyzer to be connected to the Internet See Chapters 7 and 8 for more details Dialup Networking APN Character string Access Point Name APN is an identifier required by the network operator Examples are Internet public and www vodaphone de Please consult your network operator User Name Character string Set User Name as required by your network operator Typically this can be left empty Password Character string Set Password as required by your network operator Typically this can be left empty Domain Character string Set Domain as required by your network operator Typically this can be left empty DynDNS Active No Set to Yesto make the update of the IP address at DynDNS com active Yes Set to No if you do not use this service Hostname Character string Set the Hostname defined in your account at DynDNS com User Name Character string Set the User Name for your account at DynDNS com Password Character string Setthe Password for youraccount at DynDNS com The password will be displayed until you press Enter then it will be replaced by 299 300 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual D 8 N
194. ed Noise excitation Automatic Save No Set to Yes to automatically save the decay after each measurement Yes Max Decay Time 1to 30s Sets the maximum duration of the decay measurement If the decay finishes in a shorter time decay measurement stops automatically Please note If you set Max Decay Time above 20 s then the measurement will not stop before this time has elapsed 233 234 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Table A 5 Cont Measurement Control parameters for Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 Parameter Values Comment Excitation Impulsive Interrupted Noise Select Impulsive to excite the room with an impulse The analyzer triggers on the impulse measures the impulse as a sequence of spectra with 5 ms intervals and finally backwardly integrates the measurements to decay curves Select Interrupted Noise to excite the room with noise interrupt the noise and measure the decays all controlled by the analyzer Number of Decays 1 to 99 Parameter only available if Excitation Interrupted Noise Specify the number of decays to be measured automatically and averaged together per position Trigger Level 0 to 200 dB Parameter only available if Excitation Jmpulsive Specify the trigger level for the sound level in any frequency band the measurement starts as soon as this level is exceeded The measurement has a pre trigger of 1 s Trigger
195. ed automatically per report period Then you can select Number of CICs Desired time periods for calibration 6 Under the Logged Spectrum parameters you can choose to log Full Spectral Statistics per Logging Period or not Please note Logging the full spectral statistics at a short logging period for example every second takes up a lot of space on the memory card 7 Under Triggers you can specify a Signal Recording Timer for periodically starting a signal recording for example five minutes per hour and you can specify up to four independent Level Triggers to be active at four different times during the day Each level trigger works as specified in section 11 1 In addition you can specify a Hold Off period this means that during this period new triggers are inhibited You also have the ability to trigger Lxeq f1 f2 Please note You can trigger on a specific frequency band by setting AZ 2 8 Under Lden Periods parameters you can set up the day evening and night periods and the penalties in accordance with your local legislation To exit the screen tap EJ 12 2 Controlling the Measurement The measurement is controlled in the same way you would control a normal Sound Level Meter measurement using Start Pause Continue Back erase and Reset pushbuttons see Chapter 3 for more details However during the measurement data are automatically saved in projects one per day The projects are automatically sa
196. ed average equivalent continuous noise level for the latest T minutes Updated every second during measurement The parameter can be used to monitor the average noise level within T minutes for example to monitor that the noise level during a music event doesn t exceed a certain limit at any 15 minutes of observation time during the event The value is equal to Lxeq at the start of the measurement as long as the elapsed time less than or equal to T Two values with frequency weighting X A and C are measured simultaneously ALeg T mov is calculated as the difference between Lceq T movand Lpeg T mov The maximum of the Lxeq T mov values during the measurement only taking values into account where elapsed time is greater than or equal to T Two values with frequency weighting X A and C are measured simultaneously ALeq T mov max S calculated as the difference between Lcegt mov max aNd LAeg T mov max The instantaneous time weighted sound level Lp is available at any time A denotes that the A frequency weighting is used F denotes that the Fast time weighting is used Maximum time weighted sound level measured with A frequency weighting and Fast time weighting It is the highest level of environmental noise occurring during the measurement time It is often used in conjunction with another noise parameter for example Laeg to ensure a single noise event does not exceed a limit Minimum time weighted sound level measured with A f
197. ed by DIN 45641 Larteg has also been called Lartms or Latmse Average Sound Level with Time Weighting U F or S and Exchange Rate Q 4 5 or 6 This is a widely used occupational health noise parameter in the USA corresponding to the Laeg used otherwise Maximum peak sound level during a measurement C denotes that the C frequency weighting is used Used for assessing possible damages to human hearing caused by very high short duration noise levels Maximum peak sound level during the latest second is available at any time C denotes that the C frequency weighting is used Used for monitoring the peak levels Lden Lday Levening Lnight Ln Lep d Lep d v Loudness Loudness Level Linear Weighting Linear Glossary Noise Indicators for describing the annoyance due to exposure to environmental noise Lden day evening night noise indicator Lyay day noise indicator Leyening evening noise indicator and Lyight night noise indicator are defined by the European Union They are based on Ljeg over different periods Lgay over the day period from 7 00 to 19 00 Levening Over the evening period from 19 00 to 23 00 Lpight over the night period from 23 00 to 7 00 and Lye over the whole day with a penalty of 5 dB A for the evening period and a penalty of 10 dB A for the night period Ldn day night level is defined by the Environmental Protection Agency EPA in the USA as a descriptor of noise lev
198. ed by tapping on the paperclip icon or tapping the Main Menu and selecting Exp orer from the list of options See section 3 4 11 3 5 Editing Annotations on Profiles To move an annotation 1 Tap and hold the stylus on the profile display at a position on one side of the Annotations icon 2 Drag the stylus through the Annotations icon to the position where you want the annotation moved to 3 Remove the stylus from the display and a drop down menu appears 4 Select Move Comment or Move Note or Move Image from the drop down menu To delete an annotation 1 Tap and hold the stylus on the profile display at a position to the left of the Annotations icon you want to delete 2 Drag the stylus to a position to the right of the annotation 3 Remove the stylus from the display and a drop down menu appears 4 Select De ete for the annotation you want to delete from the drop down menu 11 4 Saving and Recalling Results Measurements are saved and can be viewed later in the same way as described for the Sound Level Meter project in Chapter 3 and Chapter 6 Chapter 12 Enhanced Logging Optional Module Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 enables you to measure and save data periodically on memory cards You can also save to a USB memory stick with G4 analyzers The module is optimized for unattended use which means that the module will measure and save data in an efficient way without the requirement for an operator to be present
199. ed for Logging in Chapter 11 and Enhanced Logging in Chapter 12 CHAPTER 16 2 channel Option BZ 7229 16 5 Setting Up 2 channel Signal Recording Signal Recording in the 2 Ch templates is set up in the same way as in the single channel templates Chapter 13 with the following additions and changes 1 The Recording Channel parameter can be set to Ch 1 Ch 2 or Both Choose Both to record both channels simultaneously 2 The Recorded Signal parameter is set to Input Z weighted and cannot be changed The Recorded Signal parameter is not displayed in the setup 3 If Automatic Gain Control set to Off the Peak Recording Level is automatically set to highest possible setting for example 145 dB for Range Setting set to High Rangeand 115 dB for Range Setting set to Low Range when using Type 4189 microphones The Peak recording Level parameter is not displayed in the setup 2 channel recordings are played back in the headphones as a stereo signal Use Measurement Partner Suite BZ 5503 to play back the 2 channel recordings either as a stereo signal or as two mono signals one for Ch 1 and one for Ch 2 191 192 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Chapter 17 Low Frequency Option BZ 7234 Low Frequency Option BZ 7234 enables e G weighting parameters in accordance with the standards ISO 7196 1995 and ANSI 1 42 2001 R2011 using Briel amp Kjaer Low Frequency microphones e Measurements of Building Vibration paramet
200. ed in all has been uploaded B Logged in upload in progress E Logged in upload paused R Logged in but not connected to the account To Resume or Pause Uploading Check MP Cloud Status or Change Parameters Tap the Cloud icon to open a drop down menu e Pause Upload or Resume Upload depending on the current upload state MP Cloud Status provides status see Fig 6 6 MP Cloud a shortcut to MP Cloud parameters Please note The first time you connect to MP Cloud and when you are logged out only MP Cloud will be available Fig 6 6 INFORMATION Example of MP Cloud Upload paused Status Remaining 0 kB Used 0 2 of 32 0 GB Archive Bucket Account Aim Uolet E mail m nosel com To Log in to MP Cloud 1 Tap Cloud 73 or tap Main Menu gt Preferences gt MP Cloud 2 Tap Account then Logged in To set the archive in the cloud to which the data will upload 1 Tap Main Menu gt Preferences gt MP Cloud gt Archive and enter the archive name Please note If that archive does not exist it will be created when you tap the Enter key To delete a project from the analyzer or move the project to another storage device after a successful upload to MP Cloud 1 Tap Main Menu gt Preferences gt MP Cloud gt Action after upload and select Move project if you want to access the data on the analyzer after the measurement or Delete project if you want to clear space on the SD card after the measurement
201. edenenate deccubs casdecececdsc cede adadgedacacichodeetedaedeanccatess 79 8 1 Setting your Preferences on the ANalyZer cccccccsessssccececsesssescececeseseeaeseeececeeseeeseeseeeseseaeees 79 DIS Pla h AE EE P A ETE E EE E E AEE A 79 POW A ess LE E E E E E E E E E ee ee 80 TAT T E E AEE E EE E AAE OEE E A A 82 USErS ANG RIOlOCtSs ccsccenssccsssaseiiuasaceesdsvasbunncices a a e E ean a a s Ei 83 H adphone Settings enee naa aaa a ea aa rea e a a eaaa el aneneen aie aeaa 85 Printers inore R a eave E E aE O E Sate A E EEE EER 86 8 2 Modem DynDNs Settings ccccscccssccssscecsecesssecssecessseessecessecsssecseecssseccsseesesesaeceeeeeseessees 86 Connection to the Network using a LAN MOdeM cccccccccssssssssecececeesesssceccecseseaeseseesseseeaeees 87 Connection to Network using GPRS EDGE HSPA Modem s cccssscesseeessecestecssecesseeesseceseeees 87 DYNDNS RR es ae af a E T A a A E 8 3 NAON SOLEMN ES E AAE EEA E E E E A E Connecting to the Analyzer Parameters in Network Settings 8 4 Notifications c cc eeececeeneeceeseeeeeeeees Alarm Settings Text SMS Notifications Email Notifications sses 8 5 Web Server nesese Password Protection 8 6 Connecting to Weather Stations and GPS Receivers c0ceeeeeee Weather Stations GPS Receivers ee ceeeeeeseeneceeeeeeeeeeeaees 8 7 Preparing your Measurements Metadata acasitensiscetcchacsacedeocheshsseed evi hoceebasieaihocdes bade E TEE iA Ea aiaei EEE iE E EEEa Timers a
202. ediately after a power on 8 4 2 Text SMS Notifications Notifications via SMS text message can be used if you have connected a GSM GPRS EDGE HSPA modem to the analyzer section 8 2 2 and set Modem to Disabled a text message cannot be sent if the modem is set to GPRS EDGE HSPA Dialup In addition to sending notifications initiated by alarms you can send an Info text to the analyzer and ask for an SMS notification after which you will get a notification within 30 seconds You must set Main Menu EE gt Preferences gt Notifications gt SMS e Phone Number to the appropriate number e Active to Yes You can also add a Name for the number for easier identification You can setup two individual SMS phone numbers for sending the SMS notification to two recipients Set Notification to SMSand a notification will be sent by SMS to the active phone numbers when any of the alarm conditions are met or if the analyzer receives an Info SMS You can test the system by tapping on Main Menu gt Send Notification via SMS Please note e Two to three text messages will be used to send the complete notification depending on the content and language settings e Text messages cannot be sent or received while the analyzer is connected to BZ 5503 or displayed online 8 4 3 Email Notifications Email notifications can be used if the analyzer is connected to a network with access to a mail server This can typically be done if the
203. eececseeececeeeeecessueeecseaueeseeeeeceeeeeeceeaeeeseeeeees 65 Connecting the Analyzer to MP Cloud cccccsscccccecsesseseeeceesesseeeseeececeeseaeeeeecesseseeaeeeeseeeeesees 66 Managing MP Cloud on the Analyzer ccccccccccessesssseseeececsesseeeececeeseeaececeseseaeseseesceeseaeaeees 67 CHAPTER 7 Connection to PC or Smartphone or Measurement Partner Field App sssssssssccccccsssssssssssssceeescceeesssssssecesessessesssssssseesseseoass 69 7 1 NM tRODUCEION acca see EEE E AE decease tes 69 7 2 Transferring Measurement Data to Your PC ou ccceeccesseseeececsessssceceeecesesaeseceesceeseaeseeseseeesees 70 CONNECE to Your PG ane aaae seh bees a aa aai ia Ea nee See stab bees aac Ea a EE ae ir ia 71 Post processing and Reporting essseesssssesrrssssssssrrerssssssrrerssssssrsrreesesrreraessssrsreessesrereessesrne 71 7 3 Measurement Partner MP Field App cccccsscccsscccecssssecsessececssssececseeccsessesecssseceesaeeeesssaeees 71 ANNOTATIONS ee a aa steep isp aE E eE Suess AE lense eE E EEE E E E 72 Connect the Analyzer to MP Field App u ccccsscccccecsessssssecececeesessecececsesesaeececesseeeaeseeseseeeeeea 73 7 4 Internet Browser for Online Display and Control of the AnalyZer cccsescecccccessessseeeeeeeeees 74 vii Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual CHAPTER 8 Advanced Use of the Analyzer Tips and Theks cc csics ceed cevicececcdesccedbadscaadvaadecbedbes sd
204. eecesesisacdinegeddevenstndase doodceaunad ten E a Use of Pushbuttons for Controlling Measurements On screen Feedback and Traffic Light ccccccccccccssssscecececessassecececeeseseseesesceeseeasaeeeeseeeseaees Use of Stylus and Navigation PUSHDUttONS cccescecccecessessseecececesseeeeseescecseaaeseesesceaeaeees How to Change Parameter Values How to Personalise your Setup cccceceesseeeeeeeeeees How to Manage the Project Templates 008 Locking the Pushbuttons and Display c ccccccccssssssecccecesseesecececeeseaeeeceescesesaeseeseseseseaeseeees CHAPTER 5 CaliD rations ciccccdsciecssesschcsessccceendcsssecnsssteccassccosecessetscdethesscetens cdsceuasssocededesdcedessssassseessecssesseeeens 51 5 1 IEFODUCTIO Ns lt scsisecencset E Ges bith caidpeta T ating Steet oe tdea e hes EAE 51 52 Calibration TYPOS ssaicssccces cosstaccce snes aa aia lade abce cars A NE a a Rii a E Ea nitri EN 51 5 3 Sound LevelCalibrati M arnein ate cgectayeadsbladcensetaceeoadennasdaceenskecdecanecesablasedyestles 52 Standard Calibrations seniri ii ienie ai A eae aari E iiie 52 Calibration Settin AEA E A AOE EEN eeandedecieredanceses 53 5S4 Calibration Histo conien e ei e aa a e ei e arasi r EE A a aN 55 BS iransd cer Databases ccecccccecysnzssctagcesovalaassacetestans cdycteasuedantaason aceteeb ine adeatenDenlaceceutescatgabedtasineees 55 5 6 Calibration Reminder oieee creek cecctedtcdatheaaesvatecodh chav s
205. eed to record calibrated signals or need to analyze the wav file afterwards on a PC Set Resolution to 24 bit recommended to cover the full 120 dB dynamic range from max input level and down or set Resolution to 16 bitand specify the Peak Recording Level To start the recording using an external trigger signal tap Main Menu gt Setup gt Input and specify Trigger Input See details in Appendix A To exit the screen tap the EJ icon 13 2 2 Controlling the Recording The measurement is controlled in the same way you would control a normal logging measurement using Start Pause Continue Reset and Save pushbuttons see Chapter 11 for more details When the measurement signal is being recorded then the Recording icon amp is displayed in the Status Field The recording is attached to the profile as a Marker 6 Sound If you set Recording Control to Automatic the recording will start when the measurement is started and last for Maximum Duration or Elapsed Time whichever is smallest If you continue a paused measurement then a new recording is started If you set Recording Control to Manual Event the recording will start the first time you press the Manual Event pushbutton during the measurement this starts a Manual Event marker and a Sound marker and stop the second time you press it if you press it a second time before 145 146 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Minimum Duration has elapsed then t
206. eeeteeeteeeeeees 40 Traffic Light Training ss aaeeeiai AA N eves sta cer evets Transducer Transducer Parameters ccccccceeseteeeeeseeeeeeneeees 285 Transducers Screen cccccceeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeeteeeteeeeaees 39 Transfer Batain i a e ea 69 Templates kiirii ais 50 Triaxial LEMO connector ccccccesseeeeesseeeeseeeeeees 10 Trigger Input Socket 066 332 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Triggers Parameter eee cece eeeeeceeeeneeeeees 137 Tripod harina wi 15 Adaptor Extension Stem Mounting Thread Troubleshooting Battery Charge Indicator Battery Pack ccsscsscsectssseesesessoeeesensenssonees Reset Options 0 ececeeeeseeeeseseeeeeeeeeteeeeeeaes SD and CF Cards TOUCH Sereen USB Sticks iiuna nia ia asad nie When Selecting an Interval for Storing When Setting a Marker assesseer Turn off Backlight 0 eee eee eee eeeeeeeee ree eeeeeeee TWA Type 2250 Input Parameters eee cece eeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeeees 224 Type 2250 2270 Microphone ceeeeeeeeees 290 Type 2270 Gamera k nr ea AoA Papae EAA MSp PEELEN a RATAR Channel Panoias diania taieri Channel 2 mrii na nin npada sea Connecting Two Microphones vat High Speed USB and LAN Interfaces 6 Input Parameters cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 224 Input Parameters Channel 1 Type 4189 Microphone Type 4964 ee Type Approval
207. een is fitted and whether you are measuring in a free or diffuse field For Type 2270 two icons are displayed one for Ch 1 and one for Ch 2 If only one channel is used then no icon is displayed for the unused channel Accelerometer Vf an accelerometer is selected as input Input Socket gj direct input is selected no windscreen fitted measuring in a free field t no windscreen fitted measuring in a diffuse field t windscreen fitted measuring in a free field 4 windscreen fitted measuring in a diffuse field e Immediate textual feedback on overload underrange situation and latched overload indicated with Overload Third Line e Used for Logging and Enhanced Logging see section 11 3 1 or used for Reverberation Time see section 14 3 1 View Area The View Area contains the screens required for a particular measurement such as bar graphs result readouts and various frequently used setup parameters for example Meas mode The template defines the content of this area More than one screen can be used for displaying the information Select the screen using the view tabs at the bottom of the View Area Changes made to the screens will only be applied temporarily that is until you select another project template or open another project to re use the screen from that project However if you want the screen changes to be saved in the current template tap the Project Template Bar at the t
208. el based on Laeg over the whole day with a penalty of 10 dB A for night time noise from 22 00 to 7 00 The Daily Noise Exposure Level is the average A weighted noise exposure level for a nominal 8 hour working day Lep g is also known as Ley gn Lep a is calculated from the measured Lar the setting of Exposure Time anda Reference time of 8 h Used for assessing the noise exposed to a worker during a working day in accordance with ISO standards The European Noise at Work Directive 2003 10 EC defines the following limit and action values Exposure Limit Value 87 dB Upper Exposure Action Value 85 dB Lower Exposure Action Value 80 dB The Daily Noise Exposure Level for a user defined reference period Len gy is calculated from the measured Lag and the settings of Exposure Time and Reference Time Used for example for calculating a Weekly Noise Exposure Level by setting the Reference Time to 40h Loudness is the subjective judgement of intensity of a sound by humans Loudness depends upon the sound pressure and frequency of the stimulus and whether the sound field is diffuse or free field The unit is the Sone Loudness Level 10 log2 Loudness 40 The unit is the Phone The Zwicker method of calculation of stationary loudness based on 1 3 octave measurements is described in ISO 532 1975 Method B Linear frequency weighting is without any frequency weighting that is equivalent to LIN Z or FLAT Time averaged RMS
209. el templates up to four of the six parameters from the two channels can be B 6 5 logged Type 2270 only Instantaneous Measured Parameters Available at Any Time Accelerometer or Direct input Instantaneous Time weighted Levels Fast Inst e Slow Inst Low Frequency Parameters requires Low Frequency Option BZ 7234 and accelerometer input awis KBF Voltage updated at approx 5 s intervals common to both channels in 2 channel templates e Trig Input Voltage requires Trigger Input is set to Voltage for Monitoring These parameters require a license for BZ 7223 and spectra measurement 277 278 B 6 6 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Instantaneous GPS Data common to both channels in 2 Ch templates e Latitude e Longitude Instantaneous Measured Spectra Fast Inst e Slow Inst Processed Parameters for Display Only Accelerometer or Direct input The following general parameter is available for display for Total data e Time Remaining for the current measurement taking available disk space into account For 2 channel templates e Single values for display Ch 1 Ch 2 Linear Ch 2 Ch 1 Linear e Spectra for display Ch 1 Ch 2 Linear Ch 2 Ch 1 Linear Relationship Between Setup and Measurement Parameters The measurement parameters are measured in accordance with the setup parameters The following tables describe the relationship between the setup a
210. eld Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Fig 5 9 CIC tab CIC Reference Ratio 38 07 dB CIC Ref Date 27 11 2008 22 13 49 CIC Ratio 38 10 dB CIC Ratio Date 01 12 2008 10 49 01 Deviation from Reference 0 03 dB CIC Result Passed Input Channel Ch 1 Calibr Details Remind E i 20 57 49 The CIC result consists of four parameters e CIC Ratio e CIC Ratio Date e Deviation from Reference e CIC Result The CIC Result can be Passed Background noise too high or CIC Ratio deviates from Ref 5 8 Vibration Calibration To calibrate an accelerometer use Calibration Exciter Type 4294 It provides a stable acceleration of 10 m s at 159 Hz The procedure for mounting the accelerometer to the exciter is described inthe Type 4294 user manual Otherwise the calibration procedure is very similar to the Standard Calibration procedure for sound calibration described above However if the calibration deviates more than 5 5 dB from the nominal sensitivity the calibration is stopped without changing the calibration of the analyzer In this case check whether the correct accelerometer has been selected from the transducer database and whether it has the correct nominal sensitivity Please note If you use Low Level Accelerometer Type 8344 you need Calibration Exciter Type 4294 002 a Chapter 6 Data Management This chapter describes data management including e Job and project organization Setting the default job fo
211. eld Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Table A 7 Cont Logged Broadband parameters Values continue on next page Parameter Values Comment Parameter 1 to Microphone This parameter can be set if Broadband Parameters Parameter 10 LXeq Selected LYeq LCeq LAeq X frequency weightings A or B controlled by LAeq T1 mov Setup gt Frequency Settings gt BB ex peak LAeq T2 mov parameter LCeq T1 mov He F Y frequency weightings C or Z controlled by DLeg TZ mov Setup gt Frequency Settings gt BB ex peak LGeq parameter LG10max LG10min V frequency weightings A B C or Z controlled by LXE Setup gt Frequency Settings gt BB Peak parameter LYE nme U time weightings F or S controlled by LXSmax Setup gt Occupational Health gt Time Weighting LXImax for Lav parameter LYFmax LYSmax Q exchange rate 4 5 or 6 dB controlled by LYImax Setup gt Occupational Health gt Exchange Rate for LXFmin Lav parameter LXSmin LXImin aA W frequency weightings A B C or Z controlled by LYSmin Setup gt Frequency Settings gt Spectrum LYImin parameter LXTeq LYTeq f1 Bottom frequency band controlled by rage Setup gt Frequency Settings gt Bottom F for eq LAF Teq LAeg Special Leq parameter LavUQ SIL f2 Top frequency band controlled by PSIL Setup gt Frequency Settings gt Top Freq for SILZ Special Leq parameter LWeq f1 f2 Overload Please note The parameter values shown a
212. elocity signal as defined in DIN 45669 1 k Weightings can be either Wm whole body vibration in buildings all directions as defined in ISO 8041 2005 or Wmb which is only the band limiting part of the Wm filter This is set by the Broadband Excl Peak parameter 197 198 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 17 4 Setting up the Analyzer for Building Vibration Measurements 1 Connect the accelerometer to the rear socket Accelerometer Type 8344 for low level building vibration measurements is recommended The first time you use the transducer it needs to be created in the transducer database section 5 5 and calibrated section 5 3 2 Select the SOUND LEVEL METER FREQUENCY ANALYZER LOGGING LOGGING SLM ENH LOGGING OR ENH LOGGING SLM project template The project template is displayed at the top of the screen if it does not display the correct template tap the Project Template Bar at the top of the screen and select the correct template from the drop down menu See section 3 2 1 for more details on templates 3 Tap Main Menu FE gt Setup gt Input gt Transducer and select appropriate accelerometer 4 Tap Main Menu Eq gt Setup gt Frequency Settings gt Low Frequency Option and tap On This will enable extra options for the Low Frequency parameter Frequency Analyzer module only and for the frequency weighting parameters Fig 17 5 Fig 17 5 Example of additional Input parameters with
213. encdavdsaiceectetivdedcbeesueneuas 57 5 7 Charge lNjEction Calibrations inpe en cecvesevneadiseseoevensncesevoorsenveddideceescaunadvectedseedesungs 58 Theory of Charge Injection Calibration ssessssssssessseresssessrerersesseerrersessrereesessesrrereesssrrereesse 58 Performing a Manual CIC with your Type 2250 2270 csccccssccesscecscecsscecsseceseecseecsseeeeaeecees 59 5 8 Vibration Calibrations seeiis ineine ne iiia iinei eite Ei En Ea 60 CHAPTER 6 Data Manageme nl ccccsscccsseccssecccsscccescccceceecescecesseceseescencccescccecsscecesessesseecoesecsussessenseees 61 6 1 Organizing M aSUreMEeNS cccccscsesesessscesesscesseseesseesaeeeesesesesesesesceseceaeaeaeaeaeaeaeasaeaeeseeeeeeess 61 Description Of Jobs ANd PrOjeCts cccccccssssscecccecsessaesececeseeeseesececeeseesaeccsceeseaeseseesceeseneaeees 61 Navigating in JODS 2 ccccccssescessieccctbcees ssvesnnvoceesbavnatedbadacGevoedecsevaenes badedhes seve sceececeeavonuasbednceesss 62 6 2 Selecting Default Measurement JOb Path ccccccsscesssecsscecssecsseceessecsseecsseceseeesseceseeeseeees 63 6 3 Recalling Measurements serrent aiie irii E EE A E E AE 64 Viewing Data and Reusing Setups from Projects ccccsescccececeesesssceseeceesesececeeeceeseseeaeeesees 64 Viewing or Listening to Annotations and Metadata cccccccccccssesssseseecessssssceccesceesenseeeeeeees 64 6 4 Measurement Partner Cloud cccsccccssssececsececees
214. ependently of the frequency weighting of the Accelerometer and Direct Input Linear measurement the signal at the output socket and the signal at the earphone socket e X frequency weighting A or B A requires that the BB excl Peak parameter is set to AC or AZ B requires that the BB excl Peak parameter is set to BC or BZ e Recording in 2 channel templates will only record Input Z weighted for Microphone input Table A 13 Cont Signal Recording parameters APPENDIX A Setup Parameters Parameter Values Comment Automatic Gain Control On Off To ease identification of sound sources the gain can be automatically adjusted to keep the average level within a 40 dB range When playing back the recorded signal you will then hear clearly the whole signal content whether the level has been 20 cB or 140 cB Set Automatic Gain Control to On to convert the recorded signal The recorded signal is stored as a 16 bit WAV file Set Automatic Gain Control to Offfor recording the signal with a fixed gain then set Resolution 24 bit recommended to cover the full 120 dB dynamic range from max input level and down or select Resolution 16 bitand specify the Peak Recording Level to fit the signal Please note If the sound contains very high levels at low frequency then a fixed gain is recommended Resolution 24 bit 16 bit Set Resolution to 24 bitto cover the full dynamic
215. equipment including fans mixing boxes diffusers etc The rating is determined from 1 1 octave Lzeq spectra compared with NC curves based on equal loudness curves The NC rating is the value of the rating curve that falls entirely above the measured data The Decisive Band is the frequency band touching the NC curve Defined in ANSI 12 2 2008 NCB NCB Classification Rumble Hiss RV NR NR Decisive Band Occupational Health Standards Peak Peakw Reference Time Glossary Balanced Noise Criteria is a refinement of NC The rating is determined by the SIL value and gets the Classification R for Rumble if the spectrum is rich in low frequency sound 16 Hz to 500 Hz the Classification H for Hiss if the spectrum is rich in high frequency sound 1 kHz to 8 kHz or the Classification RV for Vibration and Rattle if the spectrum at low frequencies 16 Hz to 63 Hz is likely to produce audible rattling in lightweight building elements The details of the NCB rating are defined in ANSI 12 2 1995 Noise Rating rates noise levels at public or private indoor areas The rating is determined from 1 1 octave Lzeq spectra compared with NR curves based on equal loudness curves The NR rating is the value of the highest NR curve touched by the measured spectrum The Decisive Band is the frequency band touching the NR curve Defined in ISO R1996 1971 Typical Setup Parameter settings for Occupational Heal
216. er Suite BZ 5503 BZ 5503 is included with Types 2250 2270 and 2250 Light referred to as Type 2250 70 here for easy synchronization of setups and data between the PC and hand held analyzer BZ 5503 is supplied on ENV DVD BZ 5298 PC REQUIREMENTS Operating System Windows 7 8 or 8 1 all in 32 bit or 64 bit versions Recommended PC e Intel Core i3 e Microsoft NET 4 5 e 2 GB of memory e Sound card e DVD drive e At least one available USB port e Solid State Drive ON LINE DISPLAY OF TYPE 2250 2270 DATA Measurements on Type 2250 2270 can be controlled from the PC and displayed on line with the PC using the same user interface on the PC as on Type 2250 2270 Display 1024 x 768 1280 x 800 recommended DATA MANAGEMENT Explorer Facilities for easy management of analyzers Users Jobs Projects and Project Templates copy cut paste delete rename create Data Viewer View measurement data content of projects Synchronization Project Templates and Projects for a specific user can be synchronized between PC and Type 2250 2270 and between local and cloud archives Measurement Partner Suite BZ 5503 merges Measurement Partner Field App annotations with the corresponding analyzer project USERS Users of Type 2250 2270 can be created or deleted EXPORT FACILITIES Excel Projects or user specified parts can be exported to Microsoft Excel Excel 2003 2010 supported Briel amp Kj r Software Projects
217. er Supply Connected ICON 11 43 Power on Pushbutton Preamplifiers cnirerironennininigieionania CONNECHING ee eeeeeeteeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeens Disconnecting Preferences Preferences Screen Prepare Measurement ceceeeeeseeeseeeeeeeneeeees 98 Profile View ossec 128 129 139 Status Field ProjDose ProjDoseUQ 5 Project NAIMme ccccscccesrsssecscescsetssesessesseeesseenteneoner 61 Project Template 0 eee cee ee cess eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 24 Edit Mode Enhanced LOgQing cccecseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeees Frequency AnalySis 0 c cccceseeeeeeseeeeseeeneeeees Sound Level Meter Project Template Bat eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeenees Projects niaii i naaa Protector Type 7825 PSI waite eager PULSE Multi analyzer Pushbuttons Locking Manual Eventis ienaat is iene 5 Navigation niera anaa 5 Power on Q Qualifier Light Type 7831 71 Quality Indicators In Frequency Analysis Software s 120 In Reverberation Time Software 0 169 In Tone Assessment Software cceceeeee 181 Quick Start Guide QUICK VIEW cccccceccceccesecesscessecceeceseecseseseecseeesaaeeases R Range Setting eee 184 196 199 200 RC Classification ccccccccccecseeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 318 RC Classification Parameter ccceeeeeteeees 273 RC Parameter De PINION eee cece eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaee 3
218. er measures the following spectrum parameters together with full spectral statistics during timed measurements j Lxeq LXfmax LXSmax e LXFmin e LXSmin where X is the frequency weighting A B C or Z These spectra and the spectral statistics are saved in the project together with the measured sound level meter broadband parameters The spectral statistics can be viewed as Lyyy percentile spectra where Y is the time weighting F or S and N can be one of 7 defined percentiles In addition the instantaneous spectra Lyp and Lys are always available 1 Select the FREQUENCY ANALYZER project template See section 3 2 1 for more details on templates The project template is displayed at the top of the screen 2 Tap Main Menu gt Setup Set the Broadband and Spectrum parameters to A B Cor Z as required A B weighting is determined by setting the parameter in Main Menu H gt Setup gt Frequency Settings gt Broadband excl peak Set the Bandwidth parameter to 1 1 octave or 1 3 octave before making the measurement To exit the screen tap 115 116 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Fig 10 1 Setting the frequency weighting and bandwidth parameters Top Freq for Special Leq 200 Hz Statistics Measurement Control Signal Recording Quick t 15 54 25 Under the Signal Recording parameters select the settings for recording the signal while making the measurement See Chapter 13 f
219. ers modems with an RS 232 serial interface can be connected using a USB to serial converter inserted in the USB TypeA socket of the analyzer The following USB to serial converters have been tested e USB to RS 232 Converter UL 0250 See Ordering Information on page 219 e ES U 1001 R10 ES U 1001 B10 and ES U 1001 A from EasySync www easysync Itd com e USB to RS232 Standard USB to RS232 Professional and USB to RS232 Mini STD from U S Converters www usconverters com For G1 3 analyzers use a compact flash to serial converter inserted in the compact flash slot of the analyzer Serial I O CF Card Ruggedized from Socket www socketmobile com has been tested CompactFlash Modems for Hardware Versions 1 3 Compact GPRS from Pretec www pretec com has been tested Compactflash modems can be inserted directly in the compact flash socket of the analyzer DynDNS If the analyzer is connected to the Internet through a GPRS EDGE HSPA modem or a local network with access to the Internet through a DSL modem router and you want to connect to the analyzer from a place outside the local network then you need to know e Global IP address of the analyzer or e Global IP address of the DSL modem router and ensure that correct port forwarding in has been set the router details in the online help for BZ 5503 Insome cases the global IP address is static and will never change so you connect to the analyzer using BZ
220. ers using Bruel and Kjaer Low Level accelerometer in accordance with the standards ISO 8041 2005 and DIN 45669 1 2010 09 e 1 3 octave frequency analysis down to 0 8 Hz 1 1 octave down to 1 Hz This option can be used together with the following modules Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 e Frequency Analyzer Software BZ 7223 e Logging Software BZ 7224 e Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 Check the About screen to see whether you have a license to run this module To access the About screen tap the Help icon fg then tap About See Chapter 9 for instructions on installing licenses Please note e Ifyou have purchased your analyzer together with any software applications then the relevant licenses come pre installed on the analyzer e Ifyou purchased a separate software application for your analyzer then you have to install the license on the analyzer This is done using BZ 5503 please consult the online help included with the BZ 5503 software for instructions on how to install a license 17 1 Sound Measurements and G weighting This section describes how to measure G weighting parameters See the G weighted frequency response in Fig 17 1 194 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Fig 17 1 G weighted frequency response Gain dB 17 2 20 00 10 00 0 00 10 00 20 00 30 00 40 00 50 00 60 00 y 70 00 L i RHH 80 00 0 1000 1 0000 10 0000 100 0000 1000
221. esceeeeseseeeeteeeteees 52 Sound Level Meter DePINITION sansning a a Project Template Set Upati n N er a ea EaR Standards ieie euie aeniea aaa Sound Level Meter Software Start UD iir a A TAN 20 Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 csceeee 32 Sound Marker S Sound Pressure Level cccccsscccesseeesseeeees 33 319 P ramoterS saines i et iaeei Special Parameters D Specifications ccccceccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeenaes 1 3 octave Based Tone Assessment 216 2250 Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 210 2250 Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 208 2250 Logging Software BZ 7224 eeeee 209 2250 Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 211 2250 Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 205 FFT Based Tone Assessment cccceceeeeees 215 Measurement Partner Suite BZ 5503 218 Sound Recording Option BZ 7226 211 Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 215 Type 2250 2270 Platform ccccccccscssecsseteeseeees 203 Spectrum Graph in Reverberation Time Software 008 161 Spectrum Parameters cccceeeeeeeteeeees 265 Spectrum Post processing Tools BZ 5503 B 71 Spectrum Statistics cccccccceceeeeseeeeeeseeeseeeeees 187 Spectrum Tab in Frequency Analysis Software in Reverberation Time Software 2 Spectrum Weighting eenen Standard Calibration ccccccseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Standards Standby
222. essesecssesssssssesseseeseeoees 19 3 1 POIME ANG SNOOT 5 cece cer cscaies a Eae a EA A A EEE EEEE AEREA a AEA 19 3 2 Making a Measurement o ccceccccccccecsesseececcecseseeaeeecececseseeaeseeecscseeeaseesceceesesaeseesesceesesaeenees 20 SWITCHING OMe AA N EEE batons asvaveccestasssancehecstesecaucts TE E A AEE esccaees 20 Select Template and Measure eneee ii eiio i iae aia a ii 20 3 3 Save yourMeasurement aeneis iei n i aae e EA E Ea ea Eain 24 Viewing the Saved Measurement cccccccecsssscecececseseaesecececeesesaeeesecsceesesasseseesseeeaeeeesesesesees 25 3 4 Document your MEASUFEMENE ccececcccceccceseceececececececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ceca eesees 25 Annotation Tutorial cccccsccccsteecsssecs cenestccevevaideetustececnacesvusebedensetaceettcdstecbacencvetesesntstechentsdebseneces 29 3Sa SWITCHING Offene oe e E R E A aE E E E E A 29 CHAPTER 4 Getting to Know Your Analyzer s sssssssssssessooososssesesseoooossesssessooososssssssssooeosssssessssoooessesesseseo 31 4 1 What is a Sound Level Meti osier a a i e a eee aat 31 4 2 What is the Hand held Analyzer cccccccccssssssccccesssssceseescscsesssaeseeececseeeaeseeceeseeesaeseeseeeeeaes 32 Sound Level Meter Software Module BZ 7222 0 ccccsssscccessseceeseececeeseceeeaaececseeeecesaeeeeeenaeess 32 Frequency Analysis Software Module BZ 7223 ccccccccccesssssseseeececseseaeseseessesesaeeeeseseseseaaees 34 Logging Software Module BZ 7224 o
223. esssaeeeeees 2 CHAPTER 2 Assembling your AnialyZer lt 2 cccccsessiciescccceccecesedssthaccecddcccaedsacisicccccedccessde stinccecdecacesdebebehedsccddddcbecs 3 2 1 Determining Your Hardware Version ccccccccccscsssssssecececessseeseeecscseeaesesccesesaeeeeeesceeseaeaeeeeeees 3 What is Different with G4 Hardware wid 2 2 Analyzer COMPONENLS s cccccccessestteeeeeeserees we 4 2 3 Analyzer Inputs OUtpUtS cccceseesseceeeees 7 Hardware Versions 1 3 G1 3 ececceseceeeee wel Hardware Version 4 G4 cccccecsecceesseeeeeseeeee 8 Description of Inputs and Outputs c cece 9 2 4 Hardware Setup cccccssessseeeees 13 25 Assembling the Anal Zr visscz csccec essesteatccnsvssecinsccagsensesinedeedeusausot0 ei evens des cdassvsaadbansoe0lasseaioeess 14 Charging the Battery for the First Time m snene an a e a 14 Making Good Measurements c cccccccessssssecececseseeesecececeesesaesecececeseeaeseeececeeseaaeceseeesesssaeseeees 14 Alternative Measurement Method Extended Microphone cccccssscceessscecsssceceesseceeeeaes 16 Measuring for CONVENICNCE cccscccccessessseceecseseasceecceceeseaaesececcseeaaeseescecesssseseescesseseaaeseeses 17 Measuring Using Accelerometers ehn lovserscanteencysundeas ae E SAN 17 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual CHAPTER 3 Making your First M aSUreMent ccccccccsssssssssscceccccccsssssssseceescesesessssss
224. essssscececececsesssecececeesesaseececsceesesasaesececesseaseeeecsseeseageaeees 139 Saving and Recalling R SUItS ccccssscccccesessssecececeseeeeaesecececseeaeseeececesesaeseeseeeseeeeseeseeeees 139 CHAPTER 13 Signal Recording Option icsccccccccecconcsesvsecdesceccoscsesseusassecsscccesssesessssssececcoocsecsdacsusessdsssesssssseses 141 13 1 Sound Level Meter and Frequency Analysis Software cc ccccccceceesssssceeecesesssaeeeeseeceeseeaees 141 SEttifig up the Analy Zeb ivcccccendisadcocdecenseageseceoesnagedevendeds caunbersenedeccausenecdesdedteresdeegesesicrenaebeadese 141 Controlling the RECOrGING cccescecccccessesseaeececsesseesecececeeseeseesecscesseseseeeesceeseseeseeeeseeseageas 143 Playing the Recordin E n a e a a aaa N aa e A Oraa NE a e EAE Teen EE AANER 143 13 2 Logging and Enhanced Logging Software cccscccccesssssseeecececsesesaesececesesaseesecscesssaseeeeeeees 144 Setting tp the Analyzer reer r e n ea e ate aa Eee e e E ia e ieii 144 Controlling the RECOrGING ccsesccccccessesseeccecsesseeeceeeceeseeeseseescseseseseeeesceesesaeseeesseeseeaees 145 Control Recording using the StylUS cccccsssccccscsessseeecececsesseaeceeececeeseeaeseseesseeeseeeeseseeeeeea 146 Playing THE RECON ness irensten veces cosdhedesds Coes ia E aE AE E E E aE E 147 Signal Recordings ON the PEsrseesrener e a a a a a aa 149 CHAPTER 14 Reverberation Time Software Optional oTo LEI I PEPR E AET T E 151 14 1
225. et to Manual Event the recording will start the first time you press the Manual Event pushbutton during the measurement and stop the second time you press it if you press it a second time before the Minimum Duration has elapsed then the recording will continue until Minimum Duration has elapsed if you press it a second time after Maximum Duration has elapsed then the recording has already been stopped when Maximum Duration elapsed and the pushbutton will initiate a new recording instead When Recording Control is set to Externa Event and Trigger Input is set to Voltage Level then recording is started when the voltage level is high and stopped when voltage level is low details in Appendix A Duration Limit has no effect on this setting When Recording Control is set to Image Event Type 2270 only then you will record 1s plus the Pre and Post recording Time If Pre recording Time has been set then the recording will start this time before you hit the Manual Event pushbutton This is possible because the recording is done continuously in an internal buffer ready to be saved as a wave file The Pre recording Time is limited by this buffer size and the Recording Quality details in Appendix A Please note Very long signal recordings will be split into wave files containing maximum 10 minutes that is a 35 minute signal recording will consist of 4 wave files three with 10 minutes of sound and one with 5 minutes of sound
226. eter Software BZ 7222 Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 Logging Software BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 273 Periodic Reports Accelerometer Or Direct input c ccccscccccsescecessecesescececsseseceeaeeecesseeees Logged Measurement Accelerometer or Direct input Logged 100 ms Measurement Accelerometer or Direct input Instantaneous Measured Parameters Available at Any Time Accelerometer or Direct input 277 Relationship Between Setup and Measurement Parameters B 7 Reverberation Time Measurement cccecccccesssceceesteesseeeeees For Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 APPENDIX C AnalyZ r ParaMete rs iieiciccccccccscsescsciceccsccecscesessessesccsccececcsssedssccccesdscscecsssszccdscascseseessdsecsctasscss C1 CUPeNt Transducer oeiee inia a EE E a ELE EE EEEE ERE EE EA E ia C2 Transducer Databasen o e E EE EEO N KEE A EO TE E Transducer SETUP hesien e eiai a a a E ii a A i ove Calibration n IEI a E EE EE E E E enedacsonees G3 Calibration Set pon e nenii eeii ei este EA vcd EE EA EEE E e A iiA C 4 Type 2250 2270 Microphones xiv APPENDIX D Preferences D 1 D 2 D 3 D 4 D 5 D 6 D 7 D 8 D 9 D 10 D 11 D 12 D 13 APPENDIX E Glossary Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual EE E E E E A E T E 293 Display SOttin A EE E E Geen E A E E EET A A 293 Power Settings masinii aeania a a aaa aind aaa E aa ai aiiai 294 Regional Aa A E E E NAE TE 295 Users
227. etwork Settings Table D 8 Network settings Parameter Values Comment Location Up to 20 characters Use Location to specify a text identifying the analyzer or location of the analyzer The Location will be displayed on the PC together with the serial number of the analyzer when browsing for analyzers in BZ 5503 and when connected using the online display Network Connection None Set to None if no Ethernet CF Card is present in CF Socket Type 2250 only CF Socket LAN Socket Set to CFSocket if Ethernet CF Card is present in CF Socket Set to LAN Socketif you want to use the built in LAN Socket Type 2270 only Set IP Address Automatically Set to Automatically to obtain an IP address from a DHCP server If no server is available then a Link Manually local address will be set Set to Manual yto set the IP address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Preferred DNS and Alternate DNS manually IP Address XXX XXX XXX XXX The IP address of the analyzer Selectable if Set IP Address Manually Subnet Mask XXX XXX XXX XXX The Subnet Mask combined with the IP address identifies the network segment the analyzer is on Selectable if Set IP Address Manually Default Gateway XXX XXX XXX XXX Address to a gateway for routing to another network Selectable if Set IP Address Manually Preferred DNS XXX XXX XXX XXX The IP address of the primary DNS server Alternate DNS XXX XXX XXX XXX The IP address of the secondary DNS
228. evel Peaks Over Level Exchange Rate for Lav Time Weighting S S for Lav B 7 Reverberation Time Measurement B 7 1 For Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 The following parameters are measured or calculated at each position Decays e Reverberation Decays for each frequency band from Bottom Frequency to Top Frequency based on sampling Lzeg spectra at 5 ms intervals Spectra e T30 Spectrum e T20 Spectrum e EDT Spectrum Measurement Parameters Single Number Values e 730 Wide Band RT Bottom Wide Band RT Top 720 Wide Band RT Bottom Wide Band RT Top EDT Wide Band RT Bottom Wide Band RT Top The following parameters are calculated for the room as an average of all positions Decays e Ensemble Averaged Reverberation Decays for each frequency band from Bottom Frequency to Top Frequency Spectra e 730 Spectrum e 720 Spectrum e EDT Spectrum Single Number Values e T30 Wide Band RT Bottom Wide Band RT Top 720 Wide Band RT Bottom Wide Band RT Top EDT Wide Band RT Bottom Wide Band RT Top Quality indicators are given for each frequency band in each reverberation time spectrum and for each reverberation time spectrum Instantaneous Measured Parameters available at any time Instantaneous Time weighted Sound Levels e Lar e Lor Instantaneous Measured Spectra e Lz 281 282 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2
229. evoccderea tee shsesocnseaaeaadeusereasebtonssieaecddeaidgustesoete ces 131 Editing Markers on Profiles cccccccccccsssssscccecessssseeceeccecseeseeececeseseeseeecsceeseaeseeseesseseaaeseaees 132 Annotate Sound Categories cccsssssccecessssssnseccsessssecseceesesscnneesecesensnacsessceessananseceeeseenes 133 Editing Annotations on Profiles cccccssssccccecssssseeececeesessesesecececseeseeccsceesesasseseeseesesaeseaees 134 11 4 Saving and Recalling Results x Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual CHAPTER 12 Enhanced Logging Optional Module csscccssccsscccscssscccssccssccsssccsscssesseeeseseeseesssessssseeees 135 12 4 Setting upthe Analy Zetec scscctesccoveverdetcabesjcanswedenrssuscuscene ca esluecsusGecees un sesencecectenstudiaecdeuenseagesesss 136 12 2 Controlling the MeasUreMeNnt ccecccsssceceecsessssscecececeesesesecececeesesesaeseeeceseeaseesececesseaeaeees 137 Annotatinga Project c cccdsceccesseccsk csenhcodaveedeedaddvenevlodsliseessoduousdsbdanvnanenddcinacdd soandebacsenddennseeockedee 138 RECOrdING THE SIgMal 2h cicnnkheceeaeecadeccees fina add SAER E E AE E AAEE AE aA a EKE a 138 12 3 Displaying the R SUItS ccccescccccecsesssssceceecsesssaeseeececseseaeseescecsesesaeseeeesceessaeseesceesesseaeeeeces 138 The Profile Tab esse erneiere trior io anro iE AEE an eSEE AE TAE SEE SE Ea iTA Erana ESER AREN 139 Displaying Noise INGiICAtOIS cccccccccc
230. f Resolution of Readings Normal Adjust Touch Screen gt Power E Regional Users and Projects Headphones Remote Access Network MP Cloud Notifications q The colour schemes are Indoor scheme for everyday use e Alhambra and Arcade schemes alternative colour schemes for everyday use e Outdoor scheme for very bright conditions where you need as much contrast as possible e Night scheme for measuring under very dark conditions where is needed night vision For each colour scheme you can select the optimum choice of brightness for the traffic light for example High for Outdoor in bright light conditions and Low for Might in dark conditions and whether to have backlight on the keyboard In very bright lighting conditions you will not be able to see the backlight set it to Offto save some power To change the number of decimal places on your dB results readout between 1 and 2 decimal places orto change the number of digits on your engineering units readout between 3 to 4 digits tap Resolution of Readings and set to Worma or Extended as required This setting is for display only and has no effect on the measurement precision or resolution To adjust the touch sensitive screen Tap Adjust Touch Screen gt and follow the on screen instructions At the end of the adjustment procedure you can save the values or cancel the adjustment Tap Display or to collapse the list Power The analyzer
231. f functions which are described in the following sections Caution The touch sensitive screen is susceptible to damage from sharp objects such as pencils fingernails etc We therefore recommend you use the provided stylus See also section 4 5 5 A typical screen is shown in Fig 4 2 Fig 4 2 Project Template Bar Typical screen when making a measurement Status Field A A 50 2 dB TT 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 LAeq 86 9 dB View Area LCpeak 131 2 dB LAF90 0 56 7 dB LAFmax 103 7 dB Measurement Mode Manual fang View tabs Shortcut Bar with icons CHAPTER 4 41 Getting to Know Your Analyzer The main areas starting at the top of the screen are Project Template Bar Status Field View Area with view tabs Shortcut Bar Project Template Bar This bar displays the name of the project template which contains all the screen settings and measurement setup for the current project Tap the text to open the Template Explorer screen containing all the available templates If you make any changes to the setup in a template will appear next to the template name to indicate that the new settings have not been saved Tap Save E in the Template Explorer to save the settings in the current template Status Field The area just below the Project Template Bar is called the Status Field Depending on the template this field displays status information using up to three lines of text as follows First Line Path and name of the
232. ferred the data to BZ 5503 If required Measurement Partner Suite BZ 5503 Evaluator Type 7820 and Protector Type 7825 can use the markers in their calculations Marker number 1 the Exclude Marker will always be used as an Exclude Marker while markers 2 to 5 will be used as defined in Type 7820 Evaluator Type 7825 Protector software The marker names however will be transferred from the analyzer Marker 6 will be used as sound marker Marking During the Measurement The measurement parameter is displayed as a progressing profile Use of Pushbuttons Press the Back erase pushbutton to start an Exclude Marker marker number 1 The marker is displayed above the profile Press the button once more to stop the Exclude Marker Press the Manual Event gt pushbutton to start a Manual Event Marker marker number 2 The marker is displayed above the profile Press the button once more to stop the Manual Event Marker 132 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Use of the Stylus Tap and hold the stylus on the profile display at the position where you want the marker to start This will freeze the display and show a cursor at the position of the stylus Then drag the stylus left or right to the position where you want the marker to end This will display a second cursor Next remove the stylus from the display and a drop down menu appears showing the five markers you have specified in the setup Select the marker you require
233. for Display accelerometer or direct input e Ch 1 Ch 2 Linear e Ch 2 Ch 1 Linear CHAPTER 18 Specifications Measurements with BZ 7224 and BZ 7225 Fast Logging Up to a total of four of the 100 ms parameters from the two channels can be logged Broadband Data Stored at Each Logging Interval All or up to 10 selectable broadband values from the two channels Spectrum Data Stored at each Logging Interval All or up to four selectable spectra from the two channels license for BZ 7223 required 2 channel Signal Recording license for BZ 7226 required 2 channel Signal Recording is available in Sound Level Meter Frequency Analysis Logging and Enhanced Logging Software The signals from the two channels can be recorded into a stereo wave file of either 2 x 24 bit or 2 x 16 bit Note 2 x 24 bit at 48 kHz is not available for hardware versions 1 3 SAMPLING RATE AND PRE RECORDING FOR 2 CHANNEL RECORDING Sampling Rate kHz 8 16 24 48 Maximum G1 3 50 20 10 0 Pre recording s 16 bit G4 230 110 70 30 Maximum G1 3 30 10 3 NA Pre recording s 24 bit G4 150 70 43 16 Memory KB s 16 bit 32 64 96 192 Memory KB s 24 bit 48 96 144 288 Software Specifications Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 LICENSE Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 is enabled with a separate license and can be used with the FFT template BZ 7230 or with 1 octave and logging template BZ 722
234. formed on normal 1 3 octave spectra but with an option to use narrow bands such as FFT in case of doubt The method described in the Italian Decreto 16 marzo 1998 states that the 1 3 octave L7emin spectrum is used for evaluation of tones in noise The analysis must be performed in the frequency range from 20 Hz to 20 kHzand a toneis present if the level of a band is more than 5 dB higher than the levels in the adjacent bands The adjustment K which should be added to the measured L jeg will only be applied if the band with the tone touches or exceeds a loudness level contour touched by another frequency value of the spectrum Examples of loudness level contours from Evaluator Type 7820 are shown in Fig 15 2 The size of the adjustment K is defined as 3 dB 6 30 16 NSO 63 Cursor S000 Hz Lleq 629 B LLFMax 64 8d8 LLFMin 481 dB F Ue F LFMax F ULFMn For Help press F1 An equal loudness curve is a frequency response curve Equal loudness curves are the experimental results of presenting pure tones and levels at different frequencies to young people with no hearing impairment Along a contour line the young average normal listener will judge tones presented with different combinations of frequency and dB to be equally loud Equal loudness level curves are defined by ISO 226 Acoustics Normal equal loudness level contours The Italian Decreto 16 marzo 1998 refers to ISO 226 1987 butthe ISO 226 standard has been thoroug
235. fr t y uli ofp t car afs Jfr fofi Ts Ts t lelklelvlblnim zli Ctl Alt f 4 Anfiotations Metadata OUND LEVEL METER Job O1 project 001 II o0 LAF p 30 50 70 90 dB Project 001 C Project 002 dB Project 003 16 09 2004 10 16 09 2004 10 23 110 16 09 2004 10 24 da Project 004 16 09 2004 10 25 ifo q 89 a 6 d B da Project 005 16 09 2004 10 25 TE EXPLORER LCp 131 2 dB ae x LAF 70 2 dB LAFinax 103 708 dt FREQUENCY ANALYZER EEE A eoue aver aov E LOGGING Gz LOGGING SLM dE SOUND LEVEL METER BE SOUND LEVEL METER ADV dB SOUND LEVEL METER BASIC Measurement Mode Padband IBRATION HISTORY x Mount calibrator and press the Start Transducer 4189 123456 Calibration button below Used at Top Socket as Serial No a W mI ree ee Sa p200 zeci 20 40 60 s0 100 120 140 Pessi ian Prepolarized 1 2 Time 15 09 2004 13 27 47 EANES E Pern Preamplifier ID No ie alib Time 15 09 2004 13 27 47 Sensitivity 50 00 mY Pa itivi 50 00 mv Family Microphoni Preamplifier sitivity 00 mva i eviation from last i085 Microphone Type 2250 Input Top Soc Calibration Type Manually adj Calibrator Start Calibration Comment Calibration History gt J Calibration 0 sj ENHANCED LOGGING A da freq low ae ere Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual This configuration gives you immediate access to screens
236. ft Excel In addition to measuring broadband parameters see 3 and spectra see 10 the Logging module allows you to simultaneously log the following parameters e Broadband parameters including broadband statistics Spectra including spectral statistics e Broadband parameters every 100 ms e Record the measured signal An overview showing the options available during a typical logging task has been provided in Table 11 1 Table 11 1 Overview of options available during a typical logging task Broadband Broadband Spectral Spectral Selection Period Boas Parameters Statistics Parameters Statistics Logged 1s 24h 1to 10 None 0 3 None or All 45 or Full or All 5 or Full Logged 100 ms None Lae Lar None None None 100 ms and or Las available available available Total Elapsed Time All 58 Full All 5 Full Check the About screen to see whether you have a license to run this module To access the About screen tap the Help icon gg then tap About See Chapter 9 for instructions on installing licenses Requires Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 Requires Signal Recording Option BZ 7226 123 124 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 11 1 Setting up the Analyzer 1 Select the LOGGING project template See section 3 2 1 for more details on templates The project template is displayed on the black banner at the top of the screen Please not
237. g level BZ 7231 when used with Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 Logging Software BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 allows you to e Assess tones in a measured 1 3 octave spectrum according to ISO 1996 2007 Annex D e Assess tones in a measured 1 3 octave spectrum according to Italian Law Ministero dell ambiente Decreto 16 marzo 1998 hereafter referred to as Italian Law BZ 7231 when used with FFT Analysis Software BZ 7230 allows you to e Assess tones in a measured FFT spectrum according to ISO 1996 2007 Annex C e Use the Generate tone at cursor feature to generate a pure tone on the headphone output of the Hand held Analyzer for comparison to the actual noise This section will focus on tone assessment based on the 1 3 octave method Please refer to User Manual BE 1778 FFT Analysis Software BZ 7230 and Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 for use with Hand held Analyzers Types 2270 and 2250 for detailed information about tone assessment based on FFT spectra Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 brings results to the user on site as well as preparing for post processing and reporting back at the office Documentation can be completed using Measurement Partner Suite BZ 5503 or the measured data can be exported torpon pi esang by Evaluator Type 7820 or other post processing software such as Microsoft Excel Check the About screen to see whether you have a license to run this module To access the Abo
238. g your own metadata Tap Y and check the Insert default metadata checkbox and tap OK Inserting default metadata will overwrite existing metadata 2 Tap the Edit icon in front of the metadata you want to edit Fig 8 10 to define Metadata Enabled visible and editable on the Annotations screen or Disabled invisible on the Enabled visible and editable on the Annotations screen Name Insert a name preceding the metadata value when displayed on the Annotations screen Type Select a type suitable for your metadata Select between Text The metadata is the text you enter or edit using the alphanumeric keyboard 100 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Pick List The metadata are selected from a list of up to 30 user defined texts Number The metadata number is entered using the numeric keyboard Index The metadata number is automatically incremented after creating the project Not defined The metadata are removed from the project This will be the initial state of metadata for old projects without metadata Entry No for type Pick List The entry number for the text to be defined in the pick list Select the required number and enter text in the Entry Text field Entry Text For Type 7ext The text For Type Pick List The text for the selected Entry No Current No For Type Number The number Current Index For Type Index The index Step for Type Index The Current Index is incre
239. graph you can set the other selector to Off 164 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Fig 14 10 Decay view T20 Room 400 Hz 1 25 kHz Booty T20 400 H2 1 25 kHz O crum The main decay on the display displayed as a continuous line is selected using the parameter selector in the second line of the two shown above the display 730 Pos in Fig 14 10 The parameter selector for the main decay is linked to the selector on the Overview tab and the parameter selector for the main spectrum on the Spectrum tab The reference decay on the display displayed as a dashed line is selected using the parameter selector in the first line of the two shown above the display 720 Pos in Fig 14 10 The parameter selector for the reference decay is linked to the parameter selector for the reference spectrum on the Spectrum tab The Frequency selector with decrement and increment pg buttons as well determines the frequency of the decay curves The Frequency selector is linked to the spectrum cursor and the Frequency selector on the Overview tab In the upper right corner of the View Area the value of a single quality indicator is displayed e C xx The Curvature indicator if above 10 then the quality indicator meaning Decay is bent is set For more details of the quality indicators see section 14 5 Tap the Y axis to select e Auto Zoom to adjust the range of the Y axis for best fit of the measured spe
240. hanced Logging 1 Select The 2 Ch LOGGING SLM project template for logging broadband data only from the two inputs The 2 Ch LOGGING project template for logging both spectra and broadband data from the two inputs The2 Ch ENH LOGGING project template for logging both spectra and broadband data from the two inputs making reports and periodically saving the data on the memory card Please note 2 Ch Enh Logging is not available for G1 3 The project template is displayed at the top of the screen if it does not display the correct template tap the Project Template Bar at the top of the screen and select the correct template from the drop down menu See section 3 2 1 for more details on templates 190 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 2 Tap Main Menu gt Setup gt Fig 16 5 Frequency Settings to set Broadband frequency weighting parameters as required Statistics to set statistics parameters as required 3 Set the parameters you want to log every 100 ms in Logged Broadband 100 ms You can specify up to 4 parameters from the two channels 4 Set the broadband parameters you want to log in Logging Broadband You can either log all parameters from both channels or select up to 10 parameters from the two channels The fewer parameters you select the less space will be needed for saving on the memory card 5 Set the spectrum parameters you want to log in Logged Spectrum You can either log a
241. has an advanced power management function that takes care of supplying the different circuits with adequate power and switches off circuits that are not in use These power management functions can be changed via Power Fig 8 3 CHAPTER 8 81 Advanced Use of the Analyzer Tips and Tricks Tap Power or next to Power to expand the list of power settings e Backlight Dim e Standby e Turn off Backlight only with G1 3 analyzers e Ext Power only with G4 analyzers Fig 8 3 PREFERENCES PREFERENCES Power screen Display Settings Left For G1 3 z Power Settings P analyzers Backlight Dim After 1 min Backlight Dim Right For G4 analyzers Turn off Backlight After 5 min Turn off Backlight After 5 min Regional Settings Storage Settings Headphone Settings Printer Settings Modem DynDNS Settings Network Settings Notification Settings Web Server Settings S 15 58 52 After 1 min After 5 min After 5 min 11 52 13 The backlight will be switched on as soon as you operate the analyzer either by using the keyboard or stylus on the touch sensitive screen The backlight brightness will be one of the six levels set by tapping J at the bottom of the screen Tap Minimum for minimum brightness and power consumption or up to Maximumfor maximum brightness and power consumption Once you have chosen the level tap Close to save the settings When the analyzer has been left unused for th
242. he Setup screen Edit Mode Input Frequency Settings Low Frequency Option Low Frequency Normal Broadband excl Peak A C Broadband Peak Statistics pa Measurement Control Signal Recording Output Socket Signal Occupational Health Full ay J The Full tab at the bottom of the screen allows you to view the complete list of setup parameters while the Quick tab allows you to access the more frequently used parameters defined by yourself Press Edit on top of the screen to enter Edit Mode This mode allows you to copy parameters from the Full tab view to the Quick tab simply by tapping on the parameters in the Full tab and to remove parameters from the Quick tab by tapping on the parameters on the Quick tab When you have finished tap the Edit icon again to exit Edit Mode Setup settings can be protected from accidental changes by tapping Padlock P on thetop of the screen This will also protect the template from being deleted or renamed When locking the template you get the option of password protecting the lock If you choose this then you enter a password see Fig 4 7 48 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Fig 4 7 Password protecting a template Please note The password is case sensitive and must consist of minimum two characters and or digits To unlock the setup settings and template tap the padlock icon again If the lock is password protected you must enter t
243. he Signal Recording parameters and set the Recording Quality parameter to High 15 3 Measuring 15 3 1 Result Display Tone assessmentis not performed until the Tone parameter is selected above the spectrum This is done by tapping one of the parameter fields in the two lines above the Spectrum display and choosing 7onefrom the drop down menu Once selected tone assessment is carried out on the selected spectrum The results are updated during the measurement Fig 15 8 Selecting the Tone parameter above the spectrum display CHAPTER 15 Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 1 3 octave Method FREQUENCY ANALYZER 315 Hz h 315 Hz On the Results display a blue marker is set at the top of each detected band with a tone Differences to the left and right of the frequency band selected by the main cursor are shown on the left and right in the tone parameter panel above the spectrum Fig 15 9 The main cursor is moved using either the hard keys or the stylus Fig 15 9 The differences to the left and right of the selected frequency band are shown in the tone parameter panel inthis example there isa 11 4 dB difference to the left and a 3 9 dB difference to the right E3 EA 5 63 250 1k 4k 20 12 The information shown in the value panel can be changed by tapping in the field From the tone parameters the adjustment and the selected tone standard can be selected See Fig 15 10 Results from the tone as
244. he USB connection to the PC does not work then you need a Compact Flash card size at least 64 Mbytes and a Compact Flash card reader for the PC You can then use Measurement Partner Suite BZ 5503 to update the Compact Flash card with the necessary files Please consult the on line help included with the BZ 5503 software for instructions on how to update a Compact Flash card with installation files for the analyzer 111 112 Caution Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Power off the analyzer and insert the compact flash card in the CF slot on the analyzer Then press and hold down the Commentary and Save amp pushbuttons while switching on the analyzer The Maintenance Mode initial screen will be displayed and then within a few seconds the screen shown in Fig 9 4 will appear Press the Accept pushbutton v to update the software This will take approximately 5 minutes Do not remove the CF card while updating the analyzer software When the analyzer software has been updated you will get the option of resetting to the default settings If the problem still persists then you should contact your local Briel amp Kj r representative 9 5 Care Cleaning and Storage The analyzer is a delicate precision instrument When handling storing or cleaning your analyzer please take the following precautions 9 5 1 9 5 2 Handling the Analyzer Do not try to remove the microphone grid as you can easily
245. he analyzer will stay logged in even if it loses Internet access Select Logged out to log out from your MP Cloud account and remove MP Cloud account information from the analyzer No more data will be uploaded to the MP Cloud account You must pair the analyzer with an account to log in again Archive Cloud folder Projects saved in your Cloud folder will be uploaded to this archive in your MP Cloud account The archive will be created if it does not exist already Action after upload Delete project Move project Use this setting to control whether projects will be deleted from the memory device or moved to an uploaded folder on the memory device when securely uploaded to MP Cloud If you select Move project you will need to maintain the memory device manually to prevent it from filling up Preferences D 10 Notification Settings Table D 10 Notification settings Parameter Values Comment Notification Disabled Set to Disabled to disable notifications E mail SMS Set to F mai to send notifications as email when an alarm occurs Set to SMSto send notifications as SMS when an alarm occurs See section 8 4 for the list of alarm types Daily Status Enable Set to Enable to send a notification once per day Disable Send at 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 Determines the time of day to send the daily status notification Alarm Settings Internal Battery High A notification is sent if inter
246. he full 120 dB dynamic range from max input level and down will be converted to 40 dB and the signal is stored as a 16 bit WAV file Set Automatic Gain Control to Off if you need to record calibrated signals or need to analyze the WAV file afterwards on a PC Set Resolution to 24 bit recommended to cover the CHAPTER 13 Signal Recording Option full 120 dB dynamic range from max input level and down or set Resolution to 16 bitand specify the Peak Recording Level 9 Tap gt Setup gt Input gt Trigger Input and select a trigger if you want to start the signal recording using an external trigger signal See details in Appendix A To exit the screen tap the EJ icon 13 1 2 Controlling the Recording The measurement is controlled in the same way you would control a normal Sound Level Meter measurement using Start Pause Continue 4 Back erase and Reset pushbuttons see Chapter 3 for more details When the measurement signal is being recorded the Recording icon is displayed in the Status Field The recording is attached to the project as an annotation The annotations icon j is then displayed to indicate that the project has been annotated When Recording Control is set to Automatic the recording will start when the measurement is started and last for the Maximum Duration or the Elapsed Time whichever is smallest If you continue a paused measurement then a new recording is started When Recording Control is s
247. he network This is the most common way of setting up IP addresses e Using Link local If no address is automatically assigned by the DHCP Server then after a few seconds the analyzer will use an address from the Link local address range 169 254 x x 8 3 1 8 3 2 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual This will most likely be the case when connecting the analyzer directly to a PC using an Ethernet crossover cable e Manually You setup the IP address manually This will typically be the case in a private network without a DHCP Server Connecting to the Analyzer Wired LAN Connection e Usea straight through standard Ethernet cable with RJ45 connectors at both ends to connect the analyzer to the network via a hub switch or router e Usea crossover Ethernet cable with RJ45 connectors at both ends to connect the analyzer directly to a PC G4 analyzers have an Auto MDIX facility allowing you to use either a straight through or crossover cable to connect to a network or PC With G1 3 analyzers only Type 2270 has a built in LAN socket on the connector panel see section 2 3 Wi Fi Connection Types 2250 and 2270 provide a wireless LAN option using a Wi Fi device Types 2250 and 2270 with hardware version 4 accept the following e USB Wi Fi Dongle UL 1050 preferred e P322 802 11labg SD WLAN from Socket Mobile www socketmobile com Types 2250 and 2270 with hardware versions 1 3 accep
248. he password Caution It is important to remember the password the template cannot be unlocked without the password The only way of overwriting a locked template is to re install the software using BZ 5503 The default templates will be overwritten by a standard installation New or renamed templates can be deleted from BZ 5503 4 5 8 How to Manage the Project Templates The project templates containing all the display and measurement settings required to perform a measurement are selected in the Project Template Bar at the top of the Display screen Fig 4 2 You can save changes to the project template create new templates rename templates or delete templates from the Template Explorer screen Navigate to the Template Explorer screen Fig 4 8 by tapping on the Project Template Bar at the top of the screen or by tapping Main Menu gt Template Explorer CHAPTER 4 49 Getting to Know Your Analyzer Fig 4 8 Template Explorer F ENHANCED LOGGING E FFT ANALYZER ait FREQUENCY ANALYZER di FREQUENCY ANALYZER ADY fj LOGGING LOGGING SLM REVERBERATION TIME SOUND LEVEL METER SOUND LEVEL METER ADY SOUND LEVEL METER BASIC Qu ick pa t The topmost line in the Status Field Sound Level Meter in Fig 4 8 contains the name of the current template If you make any changes to the settings in the current template an will appear next to the template name to indicate that the new settings have not been
249. he recording will continue until Minimum Duration has elapsed pressing it a second time after Maximum Duration has elapsed will have no effect on the signal recording the Manual Event marker however will be stopped If you set Recording Control to Exclude Event the recording will start the first time you press the Back Erase pushbutton during the measurement this starts an Exclude Event marker and a Sound marker and stop the second time you press it the behaviour will be similar to control by the Manual Event pushbutton When Recording Control is set to Externa Event and Trigger Input is set to Vo tage Leve then recording is started when the voltage level is high and stopped when voltage level is low details in Appendix A Duration Limit has no effect on this setting If you set Recording Control to Leve Event the recording will start controlled by the level trigger see Chapter 11 for details When Recording Control is set to mage Event Type 2270 only then you will record 1s plus the Pre and Post recording Time If you set Recording Control to A Events the recording will start when any of the events above become active and stop when all events are inactive again If Pre recording Time has been set then the recording will start this time before the Event appears This is possible because the recording is done continuously in an internal buffer ready to be saved as a wave file The Pre recording Time is
250. he uncertainty of the measurement 7 The reverberation time spectra EDT T20 and T30 are calculated and displayed on the screen The measurement can be in octaves or 1 3 octaves in parallel over a selectable frequency range allowing you to focus sound power on the relevant range In each frequency band the decay is sampled 200 times each second for reverberation times as long as 20 seconds You can enhance the signal to noise ratio by limiting the frequency range of the noise to cover just a single frequency band while keeping the output power constant First you make a parallel measurement then if the signal to noise ratio is too low in a few bands typically at low frequencies you select these bands for serial measurements You can redo the measurements including only these bands and merge the results with the parallel measurement Impulsive Excitation Method With Impulsive Excitation all you need to carry is Type 2250 F 2270 F a tripod and a balloon or other impulsive source such as a starting pistol After you start the analyzer and pop the balloon the analyzer will start measuring analyse the decay and display the RT spectrum and decay The single input range means that trial measurements are not necessary when using the impulsive excitation method Fig 14 4 Typical RT measurement cycle for the impulsive excitation method A dB Sound Level Trigger Level Impulse Start Excitation Await Level to exceed
251. hed to the project Latitude Longitude Altitude and position error Requires connection to a GPS receiver Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Data Management Project Template Defines the display and measurement setups Project Measurement data for all positions defined in a room are stored with the Project Template Job Projects are organized in Jobs Explorer facilities for easy management of data copy cut paste delete rename open project create job set default project name For specifications and details on documenting results in Qualifier Type 7830 and Qualifier Light Type 7831 please refer to Product Data BP 1691 Software Specifications 2 channel Option BZ 7229 2 channel Option BZ 7229 is enabled with a separate license It adds 2 channel functionality to Sound Level Meter Frequency Analysis Logging Enhanced Logging and Building Acoustics Software and to Signal recording option on Type 2270 Note 2 channel Enhanced Logging is not available for hardware versions 1 3 Please refer to Product Data BP 2190 for 2 channel Building Acoustics Software specifications In general the 2 channel Option adds an extra channel of measurement data The two channels can have input from same type of transducers e g two microphones or two different transducers e g one microphone and one accelerometer SELF GENERATED NOISE LEVEL Typical values at 23 C for nominal microphone open circuit sensiti
252. his means that whenever you have a Lxeq spectrum you can also calculate and display these parameters NC NR RC and NCB are defined for 1 1 octave Lzeq spectra however NC NR RC and NCB are calculated for any frequency weighting and any octave bandwidth A B and C weighted 119 120 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual spectra are converted to Z weighted spectra and 1 3 octave spectra are converted to 1 1 octave spectra before the calculation e Loudness and Loudness Level are calculated for 1 3 octave spectra with any frequency weighting A B and C weighted spectra are converted to Z weighted spectra before the calculation If 1 1 octave Lzeq spectra have been measured then you can display a Noise Curve together with the Lzeq spectrum see example in Fig 10 6 Fig 10 6 Displaying a Noise Curve together with the L7eq spectrum FREQUENCY ANALYZER For RC and NCB you also have the possibility of displaying the limit curves for Rumble and Hiss and for Rattle and Vibration together with the 1 1 octave Lzeq spectrum 10 3 1 Smileys Asmiley will be shown to the right of the project name if there are any issues with calculating noise parameters or displaying noise curves see the overview in Table 10 1 Table 10 1 CHAPTER 10 1 1 or 1 3 octave Frequency Analysis Optional Module Overview of Smileys Smiley Explanation Description No Loudness for 1 1 octaves Select 1 3 octave
253. hly revised in the latest version from 2003 Your analyzer with BZ 7231 software installed uses by default the free field curves from the 1987 version But the diffuse field contours from the ISO 226 1987 as well as the free field curves from ISO 226 2003 have been implemented and may be selected Setting up the Analyzer 15 2 1 Selecting the Tone Assessment Option Tap Main Menu gt Setup gt Tone Assessment and set Tone Assessment to On Fig 15 3 CHAPTER 15 Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 1 3 octave Method hens SET Pere te S Set Tone Assessment Output Socket Signal bees eal to On Occupational Health Generator Tone Assessment Tone Assessment Tap Main Menu Eq gt Setup gt Tone Assessment and set Tone Standard to SO 1996 2 20070r the Italian Law DM 16 03 1998 Fig 15 4 SET ee ten Setting the Tone A g Output Socket Signal a Assessment method occupational Health rl Generator Middle Freq Last Band 400 Hz Level Difference Low 15 0 dB Level Difference Middle 8 0 dB Level Difference High 5 0 dB If you select the tone assessment method according to the ISO 1996 2 Annex D standard you can accept the default setup according to that standard You can then change the various tone parameters according to your needs apart from the 50 226 parameter which is greyed out and proceed directly to the measurement If you select the tone assessment method according to Italian Law tha
254. hone input only For Sound Level Meter BZ 7222 and Frequency Ana For Enhanced Logging BZ 7225 templates only yzer BZ 7223 templates only For Logging BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging BZ 7225 templates only APPENDIX A Setup Parameters A 5 Measurement Control for Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 Table A 5 Measurement Control parameters for Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 Parameter Values Comment Map Based Measurement No If Map Based Measurement Yes you can define the source positions and receiver positions graphically on a Yes map otherwise the measurements are just numbered from position number one Pos 1 onwards Meas All Pos for Each No Parameter only available if Map Based Measurement Source Yes Yes Set to Yes for measuring all positions for each source position Set to No for measuring a specific number of receiver positions per source position No of Positions per Source i to 10 Parameter only available if Meas All Pos for Each Source No Set number of receiver positions you want to measure per source Increment Sources First Receivers First Parameter only available if Map Based Measurement Yes Allows you to select the quickest method of measurement when positioning your analyzer in relation to source and Manual a i spe receiver positions Typically Sources First is best for Impulsive Excitation and Receivers First is best for Interrupt
255. hted acceleration or voltage level measured with Linear frequency weighting and Slow time weighting It is the lowest level occurring during the measurement time Sound Sound level or sound pressure level Std Dev Tcpeak Threshold Level Glossary Any pressure variation that the human ear can detect Just like dominoes a wave motion is set off when an element sets the nearest particle of air into motion This motion gradually spreads to adjacent air particles further away from the source Depending on the medium sound extends and affects a greater area propagates at different speeds In air sound propagates at a speed of approximately 340 m s In liquids and solids the propagation velocity is greater 1500 m s in water and 5000 m s in steel The level in decibels of the pressure variation of a sound See also decibel The Std Dev is calculated as the Standard Deviation of the noise samples used for statistics This is either Lar or Las sampled every 10 ms or Laeg Sampled every second The time when the peak sound level occurred C denotes that the C frequency weighting is used Any sound levels below the threshold level do not contribute to the Dose measurement data For example if you set the threshold level to 80 any sound levels below 80 dB are not taking into consideration by the analyzer when it calculates doses and time weighted averages Used for calculation of Dose ProjDose TWA TWA DoseSQ Pro
256. ide this frequency range Yellow Tone freq out of proposed DM In the standard according to Italian Law the tone assessment must be performed in the range from 20 Hz to 20 kHz A tone is detected outside this frequency range Please note 15 7 The ISO method does not specify the weighting filter to be used The A weighting filter is selected by default but all selectable broadband filters may be applied without warnings Recalling Saved Measurements Saved measurements using the Frequency Analyzer Logging and Enhanced Logging templates can be opened and the Tone Assessment can be applied Please refer to section 3 3 and section 6 3 for information on how to save and recall measurements respectively Chapter 16 2 channel Option BZ 7229 2 channel Option BZ 7229 enables 2 channel measurements with Hand held Analyzer Type 2270 This option adds an extra channel of measurement data The two channels can have inputs from the same type of transducer e g two microphones or different transducers e g one microphone and one accelerometer Check the About screen to see whether you have a license to run this module To access the About screen tap the Help icon J then tap About See Chapter 9 for instructions on installing licenses 2 channel Option works with the following applications Sound Level Meter BZ 7222 Frequency Analysis BZ 7223 Logging BZ 7224 Enhanced Logging BZ 7225 Building Acoustics Software BZ 7228
257. ight Qualifier Logging Module see Product Data BP 2430 Spectrum Module see Product Data BP 2430 WAV File Analysis Module see Product Data BP 2430 For sound source systems and components please see Product Data BP 1689 or BP 0066 Type 7820 Type 7825 UL 1016 UL 1019 UL 0250 Evaluator data viewing and calculation software Protector software for calculation of Personal Noise Exposure 10 100 Ethernet CF Card for hardware versions 1 3 CF WLAN Card for Hand held Analyzers for hardware versions 1 3 USB to RS 232 Converter for hardware version 4 Service Products MAINTENANCE 2250 EW1 2250 MW5 2270 EW1 Extended Warranty one year extension 5 year Warranty including yearly Accredited Calibration Extended Warranty one year extension 2270 MW5 CHAPTER 18 Specifications 5 year Warranty including yearly Accredited Calibration ACCREDITED CALIBRATION 2250 CAl 2250 CAF 2250 CTF 2250 TCF 2270 CAl 2270 CAF 2270 CTF 2270 TCF Accredited Initial Calibration of Type 2250 Accredited Calibration of Type 2250 Traceable Calibration of Type 2250 Conformance Test of Type 2250 with certificate Accredited Initial Calibration of Type 2270 Accredited Calibration of Type 2270 Traceable Calibration of Type 2270 Conformance Test of Type 2270 with certificate 221 222 Compliance with Environmental Standards Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual
258. ight when external power is applied and the battery is charging and a flashing green light when charging has finished On G4hardware the light is red when the battery is charging and green when charging is finished You can leave the analyzer with external power on even when the battery is fully charged See section 9 4 3 for more information Making Good Measurements Using your Type 2250 or Type 2270 which fully complies with the IEC 61672 1 standard ensures you always make good measurements The analyzer should be set up using the following recommended assembly instructions This is to minimize the influence of acoustical reflections during measurements All components described below are shown in Fig 2 1 and Fig 2 4 Another set of instructions is provided in section 2 5 3 for situations where you need to position the microphone at a distance from the analyzer while still complying with the standard Placing the Measurement Microphone The measurement microphone must be placed away from shielding reflecting or absorbing objects In a diffuse sound field absorbing objects will reduce the measured sound levels In a free sound field reflecting objects can change the measured sound levels Typically the sound level 0 5 m from a plane reflecting wall is 3 dB higher than if there was no wall The operator of the system may be personally shielding absorbing and reflecting and can be an additional noise source Measure downwind i
259. ime Zone from the list CHAPTER 8 33 Advanced Use of the Analyzer Tips and Tricks Anumber of different languages are available for your analyzer Select your preferred Language if it is not in the list then it might be available for installation using BZ 5503 Harware version 1 3 only Built in help is provided in the more commonly used languages if your particular language is not covered English will be chosen automatically Select a Keyboard matching the one you prefer when using your PC Select the unit system for Wind Speed Unit Temperature Unit Dimension Unit and Vibration Unit as required e Use the S setting for measurement units in accordance with the SI standard for example measuring Wind Speed in m s e Use the US UKsetting for imperial measurement units for example measuring Wind Speed in mph When you have made your choices tap Regional or F to collapse the list 8 1 4 Users and Projects Multi user Facility The analyzer can handle more than one user Each user can have their own set of preferences templates and jobs and projects completely invisible to other users This can also be very useful in organising large measurement jobs or cases you can separate the cases completely from each other by handling each case as a separate user The transducers the calibration setup and the calibration histories of the transducers are common to all users as shown in the overview provided in Fig 8 6
260. ime measurements or Microsoft Excel Signal recordings can be imported to Briel amp Kjaer s PULSE multi analyzer platform for further analysis For more information on Measurement Partner Suite BZ 5503 and the PULSE multi analyzer platform see our website at www bksv com or contact your local Bruel amp Kj r representative For further information on post processing and reporting capabilities please refer to the online help included with the relevant PC software This software is supplied on the Environmental Software DVD BZ 5298 included with your analyzer 7 3 Measurement Partner MP Field App Measurement Partner Field App is the recommended solution for on site measurement control and annotation 72 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual MP Field App enables e Remote analyzer control e Remote display e Remote annotation of measurement data You can wirelessly connect to your analyzer from a smartphone when the analyzer is connected to the Internet or to the same network as the smartphone The analyzer can be connected through wired LAN 3G modem or Wi Fi connection to an access point or directly to the hotspot of the smartphone The Wi Fi connection can be made using USB Wi Fi Dongle UL 1050 preferred or SD WLAN Card UL 1025 for G4 or Ethernet CF Card UL 1016 for G1 G3 Once connection is made to the analyzer for noise measurements the instantaneous LAF profile is displayed and you c
261. in this manual Sound Level Meter Software Module BZ 7222 Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 allows you to measure a comprehensive set of parameters used for rating noise in terms of its impact on the environmental and working environments and on occupational noise evaluation The more commonly used parameters for sound measurements which cover a large range of applications are either instantaneous measured parameters available at any time or timed measured parameters measured within a controlled time interval CHAPTER 4 33 Getting to Know Your Analyzer Timed Measured Parameters e Equivalent Continuous Sound Levels Leq example Leg Moving or sliding Equivalent Continuous Sound Levels example LAeq T mov and LAeg T mov max e Peak Sound Levels Lpeak example Lepeak e Time for Peak Sound Level example Tcpeak e Maximum Time weighted Sound Levels Lmax example Larmay e Minimum Time weighted Sound Levels Lmin example Lagmin e Percentile Levels Ly example Larog 0 Sound Exposure Level example Lar Sound Exposure example E e Daily Noise Exposure Levels example Lep g or Lex gh e Noise Dose example based on ISO standards Dose based on US standards DoseS5 e Number of Peaks example CPeaks gt 140 dB e Time Weighted Average example TWA e Level Average with Exchange Rates 4 5 or 6 example Layss e Weather data requires a weather station connected e GPS data req
262. ing or after saving the measurement by pressing and holding down the Commentary pushbutton while talking to the analyzer The microphone situated on the underside of the analyzer will pick up your comments Recording stops when you release the pushbutton Please note Tap Paperclip to see alist of all annotations in the project and tap Loudspeaker LJ in the annotation to hear the comment using the earphones plugged into the earphone socket Text Metadata This is done before during or after saving the measurement by tapping Main Menu Ej gt Add Note to Current Measurement A blank Notes screen will appear where you can make written comments about the measurement using the standard full character keyboard that appears at the bottom of the Notes screen See the example in Fig 3 10 For Logging Software BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 annotations can be added directly to the measurement profile during the measurement see section 11 2 CHAPTER 3 27 Making your First Measurement Tap Paperclip W to see a list of all annotations in the project and tap Text in the annotation to view the comment Fig 3 10 Example of a written 6 8 th cloud cover annotation that is light wind from north attached to a measurement Remark Only 80 percent of full pow GPS Metadata This can also be done before during or after saving the measurement by tapping Main Menu Eq gt Add GPS Note to Cur Measu
263. ing Information Type 2250 A Type 2250 B Type 2250 C Type 2250 D Type 2250 E Type 2270 A Type 2270 B Type 2270 C Type 2270 D Type 2270 E Hand held Analyzer with Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 Hand held Analyzer with Sound Level Meter BZ 7222 and Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 Hand held Analyzer with Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 and Logging Software BZ 7224 Hand held Analyzer with Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 and Logging Software BZ 7224 Hand held Analyzer with Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 and Signal Recording Software BZ 7226 Hand held Analyzer with Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 Hand held Analyzer with Sound Level Meter BZ 7222 and Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 Hand held Analyzer with Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 and Logging Software BZ 7224 Hand held Analyzer with Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 and Logging Software BZ 7224 Hand held Analyzer with Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 and Signal Recording Software BZ 7226 CHAPTER 18 Specifications HELP Concise context sensitive help in English Included with Hand held Analyzer Type 2250 2270 e Microphone Type 4189 1 2 Prepolarized Free field Microphone or Type 4190 1
264. ing can be played back once or repetitively see Chapter 12 for details To the right of the profile the broadband parameter Lap is displayed and updated regardless of the measurement status and the display freeze status Annotations are displayed below the profile as icons To select an annotation tap and hold the stylus at one side of the icon just above it then drag the stylus to the opposite side of the icon so it looks like the example in Fig 11 4 and remove the stylus from the display Fig 11 4 Selecting annotations 01 30 47 32 7 dB Spectrum Broadband 22 21 42 A drop down menu appears select the required function Open note or Play commentary Delete annotation e Moveannotation to the position on the display where the stylus was removed from the display Scale the Y axis left hand vertical scale of the graphical display by tapping on the scale and accessing the drop down menu as in the Spectrum tab e Select Auto Zoom to adjust the range of the Y axis for best fit of the measured spectrum Select Zoom In Zoom Out to adjust the zoom Select Scale Up Scale Down to adjust the full scale value on the Y axis or select Auto Scale to select the best scaling for viewing the spectra without adjusting the zoom e Auto Zoomand Auto Scale automatically close the drop down menu otherwise select Close tap outside the drop down list or use the Left Arrow pushbutton to close the menu CHAPTER 11 Loggi
265. ion history for the currently selected transducer tap EJ to return to the Calibration screen Add Note to Current Measurement To access the Notes screen tap Main Menu gt Add Note to Current Measurement This screen allows you to create a text annotation that you can attach to your measurement Text is inserted using a character keyboard similar to the one covered in section 4 5 6 When you have finished tap EJ to return to the Measurement screen Add Image to Current Measurement Type 2270 only To access the Images screen with a viewfinder tap Main Menu Eq gt Add Image to Current Measurement This screen allows you to capture an image that you can attach to your measurement see 3 When you have finished tap EJ to return to the Measurement screen 40 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Template Explorer To access the Template Explorer and manage your project templates tap Main Menu Eq gt Template Explorer When you have finished tap J to return to the Measurement screen Timer Setup The Timer Setup screen is accessed from Main Menu E and enables you to control the analyzer via one or more of the analyzer s timers The purpose of a timer is to initiate measurements in the absence of an operator When you have finished tap J to return to the Measurement screen 4 5 2 The Display Screen During normal operation you will use the Display screen to view your measurements and carry out a variety o
266. is started Minimum and Maximum recording time can be preset Functions with BZ 7224 and BZ 7225 Manual Control of Recording using Manual Event or Back erase pushbutton or an external signal Recording during all of the event or for preset minimum and maximum duration A Sound marker is set while recording Selectable pre and post recording time Manual Control of Recording using touch screen Recording for the selected time period subject to the limitations of the pre recording buffer A Sound marker is set for the selected time period Automatic Control of Recording An event can be triggered when a broadband level is above or below a specified level Recording during all of the event or for preset minimum and maximum duration Selectable pre and post recording time Functions with BZ 7227 Automatic Control of Recording Start of recording when measurement is started 16 bit recording format only Software Specifications Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 Standards Conforms with the relevant parts of the following e IEC 61672 1 2013 Class 1 e IEC 60651 1979 plus Amendment 1 1993 02 and Amendment 2 2000 10 Type 1 e IEC 61260 1 2014 1 1 octave Bands and 1 3 octave Bands Class 1 e ANSI S1 4 1983 plus ANSI 1 4A 1985 Amendment Type 1 e IEC 61260 1995 07 plus Amendment 1 2001 09 1 1 octave Bands and 1 8 octave Bands Class 0 e ANSI S1 11 1986 1 1 octave Bands and 1 8 octave Bands Orde
267. islation which may refer to ISO 1996 2 or a local method Find more information about rating level and assessment of environmental noise in ISO 1996 2 and in Bruel amp Kjzer s Environmental Booklet 15 1 1 ISO 1996 2 Annex D Tone Assessment Calculations The ISO method searches a measured time averaged Leq spectrum for level differences between adjacent 1 3 octave bands If the level difference between a 1 3 octave band and the band either side of it are higher than a certain limit an adjustment for audible tones may be added to the Laeq level when calculating the rating level L In ISO 1996 2 Annex D the spectrum is divided into three frequency ranges Low Middle and High In each frequency range a specific limit for the level differences leading to an adjustment is defined Fig 15 1 CHAPTER 15 Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 1 3 octave Method 173 Fig 15 1 Definition of frequency ranges and level differences Level differences can be defined in Low Middle and High frequency range Proposed level difference limits 8 for adjacent bands dB Middle 400 500 1 3 octave bands Hz 125160 10 kHz 080160 The proposed frequency ranges and level differences between adjacent bands are e Low frequency range includes the 1 3 octave bands from 25 Hz to 125 Hz with a level difference for a detected tone greater than 15 dB e Middle frequency range includes the 1 3 octave
268. it might be available for installation using BZ 5503 G4 analyzers All languages are installed Keyboard United Kingdom 33 different keyboards Select your preferred keyboard Wind Speed Unit STI or US UK Select SI for m s or US UK for mph Temperature Unit SI or US UK Select SI for C or US UK for F Dimension Unit SI or US UK Select SI for m or US UK for ft Vibration Unit SI or US UK Select SI for m s2 or US UK for g 295 296 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual D 4 Users and Projects Settings Table D 4 Users and projects settings Parameter Values Comment Multi user Enabled Set to Enabled to enable the Multi user facility Disabled Set to Disabled if you are the only user Auto naming of Projects Yes Select Yesfor automatically naming projects No from the start date of the project as Year Month Date in the format YYMMDD for example 051112 as 2005 November 12th Select No for using the name defined in the Project Name Prefix parameter Project Name Prefix Text string Prefix for automatically generated project name Maximum 8 characters D 5 Headphone Settings Table D 5 Headphone settings Parameter Values Comment Listen to signal No In addition to the commentary annotations Input X weighted you can listen to the input signal for Input C weighted monitoring purposes Input Z weighted Select one of the A weighted B weighted C weighted or Z weighte
269. jDoseSQ The Time Weighted Average is the average A weighted sound level for a nominal 8 hour working day with Time Weighting S and Exchange Rate 5 TWA is calculated from the measured LavS5 taking Threshold Level into account and a Reference time of 8 h Mainly used in the USA for assessing the noise exposure for a worker during a working day The Time Weighted Average for a user defined reference period TWA is calculated from the measured LavS5 taking Threshold Level into account and the Reference Time Used for example for calculating a Weekly Time Averaged Level by setting the Reference Time to 40 h 319 320 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Underrange W mb Z weighting Immediate underrange indicates that the broadband sound level is below the lower limit of the Linear Operating Range and is indicated separately for the two selectable frequency weightings and for the two channels Type 2270 only Immediate underrange is only indicated on the screen No underrange information is saved with the final result of the measurement In case of an underrange indication 2 channel measurements High Range only change to Low Range The underrange indication is implemented as required by ISO 61672 1 2013 and does not account for the influence of self generated noise from the microphone because the specifications for the lower limit of the Linear Operating Range apply for measurements of electrical signal inser
270. justment 60 to 0 dB When bandwidth is changed the level for all bands is automatically adjusted to comply with the set output level Correction Filters For sound sources Type 4292 Type 4295 and Type 4296 Flat or Optimum Repetition Period 175 s Output Connector Output socket EXTERNAL GENERATOR Selectable as alternative to Internal Generator for microphone input only To control external noise generator set e Levels 0 V Generator off 4 5 V Generator on e Rise time and Fall time 10 us The noise generator is turned on and off automatically during the measurement Escape Time 0 to 60s Build up Time 1 to 10 s The generator can be turned on and off manually for checking equipment and sound levels Software Specifications Logging Software BZ 7224 The specifications for BZ 7224 include the specifications for Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 BZ 7224 adds Logging MEASUREMENTS Logging Measurement data logged at preset periods into files on e SD Card All hardware versions e CF Card G1 3 e USB Memory Stick G4 Logging Period From 1 s to 24 hr with 1 s resolution Fast Logging Lap Las and Lae sound input or Fast Inst Slow Inst and Linear vibration and Direct input can be logged every 100 ms irrespective of logging period Broadband Data Stored at each Logging Interval All or up to 10 selectable broadband sound data incl Trig Input Voltage Weather data and Laeq T mov for vibration and
271. l of the analyzer CLOUD Connect to Measurement Partner Cloud on cloud bksv com for transferring data to an archive in the cloud for storage or easy synchronization with Measurement Partner Suite BZ 5503 WIRELESS Specifications apply to Wireless USB Adaptor UL 1050 Operating Frequency 2 4 GHz Data Rate e IEEE 802 11n up to 150 Mbps e IEEE 802 11 up to 54 Mbps e IEEE 802 11b up to 11 Mbps Encryption Authentication e 64 128 bit WEP e WPA PSK e WPA2 PSK Range The range is similar to a standard WLAN unit typically from 10 to 50 m 33 to 164 ft depending on the environment and the number of other WLAN transmitters in the area smartphones Wi Fi etc Power Requirements Power Consumption lt 1 W Software Specifications Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 Conforms with the following National and International Standards e IEC 61672 1 2013 Class 1 e IEC 60651 1979 plus Amendment 1 1993 02 and Amendment 2 2000 10 Type 1 e IEC 60804 2000 10 Type 1 e DIN 45657 1997 07 e ANSI S1 4 1983 plus ANSI S1 4A 1985 Amendment Type 1 e ANSI S1 43 1997 Type 1 Note The International IEC Standards are adopted as European standards by CENELEC When this happens the letters IEC are replaced with EN and the number is retained Type 2250 2270 also conforms to these EN Standards Input CHANNELS Type 2270 only All measurements are made from either Ch 1 or Ch 2 205 206 Hand held Analyzer Ty
272. l while measuring e Decay Shows the reverberation decay at a single frequency for one position or for the room average 14 3 1 Overview The Overview tab shows the measurement positions in a table one position per row Fig 14 6 Overview tab Spectrum x Decay 20 57 59 159 160 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Status Field The Status Field consists of three lines see Fig 14 6 the first two lines of information are common to the status lines in the Sound Level Meter and Frequency Analyzer see 4 Please note The first line of the Status Field might also contain a smiley indicating the quality of the room the spatial average of all positions See the description of smileys in the following paragraph and section 14 5 The third line of information allows you to Select the measured position The selected position is the one highlighted in the table The selected position will be the one displayed when selecting the Spectrum or Decay tab Step forwards or backwards through the positions on all displays using the E and BJ icons Get information on the quality of the measurement through a quality indicator smiley displayed as an icon means results should be used with caution means results may be suspect or missing No icon means the analyzer found no measurement quality issues Tap the smiley to get more detailed information about the quality indication See the descri
273. ld be used so in the default setup A weighing is selected However this is not described in the ISO method so no warnings will be generated if you select other frequency weightings Italian Law When tone assessment according to Italian Law is selected the analyzed spectrum must be the Z weighted minimum level measured in each 1 3 octave band Lzfmin The Lzfmin Parameter is automatically selected on the measurement page when you select DM 16 03 1998 The test for loudness contours is set by default to the 1987 Free fieldoption of the ISO 226contour parameters You can also select the 1987 Diffuse fieldand 2003 Free fieldoptions from the ISO 226 contour parameters if required See Fig 15 6 CHAPTER 15 Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 1 3 octave Method Fig 15 6 Setting the loudness contour options 15 2 3 Setting up the Measurement using the Default Setup Select the Tone parameter above the spectrum and start the measurement by pressing the Start Pause pushbutton If the selected setup parameters do not comply with the selected tone assessment method the following pop up window will be displayed Fig 15 7 Pop up window for tone measurement setup check 0 00 00 min Tone Iz e The pop up window can be de activated for the rest of the measurement session To activate it again you will have to reload the template or restart your analyzer This automatic check is deactivated when Main Menu FE gt Setup gt Tone
274. ld level if disk space is getting low or external power has disappeared etc This is done via SMS text message or email as described in this section The SMS email notification contains a short status report for the analyzer This facility is especially useful if the analyzer is left for unattended monitoring 8 4 1 Alarm Settings If one or more of the following alarms occur then a notification will be issued as either an SMS or an email depending on your equipment and settings If the notification fails for example the connection has been lost then the analyzer will retry to send the notification once more after five minutes Table 8 1 Alarm Settings Alarm Type Condition Comment Power On When analyzer is Indicates start from a timer or a power failure or unexpected switched on or reboots behaviour Measurement When a measurement Indicates measurement finished or unexpected behaviour State starts or stops CIC When Charge Injection Indicates possible measurement problem Calibration fails Internal When Internal Battery is Indicates internal battery getting low Internal Battery will be in Battery entering a specified one of the states Full High Low Critical Charging or Unknown state High Low or You can set alarm to High Lowor Critica in Critical Preferences gt Notification Settings gt Alarm Settings gt Internal Battery Please note The internal battery will typically be in one of
275. lder e Recalling measurements e Uploading to Measurement Partner Cloud MP Cloud 6 1 Organizing Measurements 6 1 1 Description of Jobs and Projects When saving a set of measurement results they are organized together with setup information calibration information annotations and signal recordings in a project A project contains the following e Measurement results Broadband values for example Laeg Larmax LAFmin Frequency spectra if Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 is enabled on your analyzer and you have selected a FREQUENCY ANALYZER template e Weather and GPS data e Measurement Setup e Display Setup parameters you have selected e Information on the microphone e Calibration e Annotations Commentary attached to measurements as required e Annotations Text notes or GPS notes attached to measurements as required e Annotations Image attached to measurements as required Type 2270 only e Signal Recordings attached to measurements as required The project name is automatically created by combining the Project Name Prefix with a number starting from 001 that is Project 001 for the first project Project 002 for the next etc Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual To rename the Project Name Prefix 1 Navigate to the project tap Main Menu Ej gt Explorer 2 Tap the name of the project tapping the icon opens the project immediately 3 Tap Rename and ente
276. le 0 1 to 100 0 dB Setthe required level difference for detecting atone inthe middle frequency range Default is 8 dB Please note Only available if Tone Standard is set to SO 1996 2 2007 Level Difference High 0 1 to 100 0 dB Setthe required level difference for detecting atone inthe high frequency range Default is 5 dB Please note Only available if Tone Standard is set to SO 1996 2 2007 ISO 226 1987 Free field 1987 Diffuse field 2003 Free field The tone is checked against levels in other frequency bands using normal equal loudness level contours defined by ISO 226 Select here which version of the standard to use Please note Only available if Tone Standard is set to DM 16 03 1998 259 260 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Appendix B Measurement Parameters This appendix describes the measurement parameters They are measured in accordance with the setup parameters Please refer to the Glossary in Appendix E for a description of the parameters The following letters are substituted in the parameters that follow to represent the wide range of frequency weightings time weightings and percentile levels available Y frequency weightings A B C or Z controlled by Setup gt Frequency Settings gt BB Peak parameter X frequency weightings A or B controlled by Setup gt Frequency Settings gt BB excl peak parameter Y frequency weightings C
277. le between 0 V and 200 V SELF GENERATED NOISE LEVEL Typical values at 23 C for nominal microphone open circuit sensitivity Interface KEYBOARD Pushbuttons 11 keys with backlight optimized for measurement control and screen navigation Weighting Microphone Electrical Total A 14 6 dB 12 4 dB 16 6 dB B 13 4 dB 11 5 dB 15 6 dB G 13 5 dB 12 9 dB 16 2 dB Z 5 Hz 20 kHz 15 3 dB 18 3 dB 20 1 dB Z 3 Hz 20 kHz 15 3 dB 25 5 dB 25 9 dB ON OFF BUTTON Function Press 1 s to turn on press 1 s to enter standby press for more than 5 s to switch off STATUS INDICATORS LEDs Red amber and green DISPLAY Type Transflective back lit colour touch screen 240 x 320 dot matrix Colour Schemes Five different optimized for different usage scenarios day night etc Backlight Adjustable level and on time USER INTERFACE Measurement Control Using pushbuttons on keyboard Setup and Display of Results Using stylus on touch screen or pushbuttons on keyboard Lock Keyboard and touch screen can be locked and unlocked USB INTERFACE Hardware Versions 1 to 3 USB 1 1 OTG Mini B socket Hardware Version 4 USB 2 0 OTG Micro AB and USB 2 0 Standard A sockets for Wi Fi Dongle UL 1050 printer or weather station 203 204 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual MODEM INTERFACE Connection to Internet through GPRS EDGE HSPA modem connected through e
278. le for connection See section 2 3 3 for more information 6 External Power Socket Use Mains Power Supply ZG 0426 to connect and charge batteries 7 Battery Charge Indicator An LED that indicates when the battery pack is being charged from external power See section 2 3 3 for more information on the LED colour codes 8 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 8 Reset Button Press to reset the analyzer if you have problems 9 Compact Flash Card Slot Insert a CF memory card to save data or connect a modem either a CompactFlash modem or using an CF to Serial converter 10 Secure Digital Card Slot Insert a SD or SDHC memory card to save data 11 Type 2270 only Input Ch 1 Socket A triaxial LEMO connector depending on the transducer used a number of cables are available for connection See section 2 3 3 for more information 12 Type 2270 only LAN Socket Connect a LAN cable to synchronise measurement and setup data with a host PC over a LAN 2 3 2 Hardware Version 4 G4 Fig 2 3 Connector panel of Type 2270 for G4 hardware 8 2 3 4 12 5 6 ToL OLOPOLO 7 we eee ee 120029 1 10 11 9 7 1 Micro USB Interface Socket Use the supplied Micro USB Cable AO 1494 to connect 2 Earphone Socket Use the supplied Earphones HT 0015 to connect 3 Output Socket A triaxial LEMO connector use the supplied LEMO to BNC cable AO 0440 D 015 to connect CHAPTER 2 9 Assembling your Anal
279. lecting Jnput then selecting the transducer in the 7ransducer field CHAPTER 5 57 Calibration In the first line of the Status Field you can select whether the transducer is connected to the Top Socket or the Rear Socket of the analyzer This can also be done via the Setup screen by selecting Input then selecting the socket in the Jnput field For Type 2270 only In the second line you also have a Channel Selector To change which input the transducer uses to connect to the analyzer tap Main Menu Eq gt Setup gt Input and tap the required input from the drop down list 7op Socket or Rear Socket Rear Socket refers to the Input socket on the connector panel of the analyzer At the bottom of the parameter list you can select the calibration history for the currently selected transducer by tapping on the Calibration History link See section 5 4 and Fig 5 2 You can delete a transducer by tapping Delete Transducer ff then the transducer to delete from the drop down that appears Please note Only transducers that are not connected can be deleted The calibration history will also be deleted Tap J to return to the Measurement screen 5 6 Calibration Reminder The Calibration screen Reminder tab Fig 5 6 allows you to keep track of when you need to run your next Accredited Traceable calibration and shows you the date of your last calibration Fig 5 6 Calibration Reminder tab Reminder for Accredited Traceable Cali
280. limited by this buffer size and the Recording Quality details in Appendix A Please note Very long signal recordings will be split into wave files containing maximum 10 minutes that is a 35 minute signal recording will consist of 4 wave files three with 10 minutes of sound and one with 5 minutes of sound 13 2 3 Control Recording using the Stylus If Recording Control is set to any of the events or to A Events the recording can also be controlled using the stylus directly on the profile in the same way as you mark sound categories details in Chapter 11 CHAPTER 13 Signal Recording Option Fig 13 1 Example Logging display showing internal buffer marker LOGGING The small triangle above the profile indicates the amount of sound you have in the internal buffer ready for storage in a wave file You will have sound from this triangle to the right hand side of the profile The triangle is updated every second To make a signal recording using the stylus you tap and hold the stylus on the profile display and drag it to the position where the signal recording should end then you remove the stylus and get a drop down menu with the possibility of setting one of the six markers If you select Sound then a sound marker is made and the sound for the marked interval is stored in a wave file Only the portion of the sound available in the internal buffer to the right of the small triangle will be stored and the sound
281. ll spectrum parameters from both channels or select up to four spectrum parameters from the two channels 6 Set the Level Trigger parameter s as required You can level trigger on a parameter from either Ch 1 or Ch 2 7 Tap EJ to exit Please note You should select the transducers before selecting the parameters to log and selecting the level trigger parameter s Changing the transducer afterwards might correct the selected parameter for example if you have selected to log Ch 1 LAeq and change the transducer at channel 1 from a microphone to an accelerometer then the Ch 1 LAeq will not be available anymore and the parameter will be set to Off 16 4 1 Controlling the Measurement The measurement is controlled in the same way you would control a single channel Logging or Enh Logging measurement See Chapter 11 and Chapter 12 for more details The two channels are controlled and measured simultaneously thus some of the housekeeping parameters are common for the two channels for example Start Time and Elapsed Time 16 4 2 Displaying the Results The results are displayed as bar graphs and measurement parameters onthe Measurement screen on three tabs Profile Spectrum or Broadband by selecting the appropriate tab See Chapter 11 for more details on Logging displays and Chapter 12 for more details on controlling Enhanced Logging displays 16 4 3 Saving Results Measurements are saved and can be opened later in the same way as describ
282. lorer or tap Main Menu E and tap Save E 3 3 Save your Measurement When you have completed your measurement you need to save it By default the analyzer creates a project called Project 001 Subsequent measurements will be labelled Project 002 Project 003 etc This will happen each time you have saved a measurement Check that the data path at the top of the screen displays Project 001 and save your measurement by pressing the Save pushbutton amp For more details see section 6 1 Please note An asterisk will appear alongside the project at the top of the Status Field as soon as you start your measurement Fig 3 7 This signifies that the measurement has not been saved It will disappear once you have saved the measurement If you are using Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 please note that there are more measurements stored in Reverberation Time projects than Sound Level Meter Frequency Analyzer or Logging projects which all contain one measurement within each project See 14 for more information on BZ 7727 CHAPTER 3 25 Making your First Measurement Fig 3 7 Saving your measurement LA COO en LAeq 86 9dB LCpeak 131 2 dB LAF90 0 56 7 dB LAFmax 103 7 dB Measurement Mode Manual 3 3 1 Viewing the Saved Measurement To view the saved measurement 1 Tap the project name or Main Menu gt Explorer 2 Tap the name of your measurement Project 001 in this case and then tap Open Fig 3 8
283. lt entry Change Microphone Type to fit your microphone For known microphone types anumber of parameters are automatically set Please note If the transducer is a microphone and the microphone type is known to the analyzer asin the example in Fig 5 5 where Type 4189 details are known then the parameters Nominal Sensitivity Polarization Voltage Free field Capacitance and CCLD are set automatically See details in Appendix C The analyzer can then make sound field correction and windscreen correction as specified in the setup To confirm which type of correction is being applied an icon is displayed in the measurement Status Field as described on section 4 3 2 If the microphone is unknown to the analyzer no corrections can be made and no icon appears in the Status Field The parameters mentioned above have to be set manually thatis typed in We recommend that you insert the value for Nominal Sensitivity directly from the calibration chart Nominal sensitivity is used in the automatic level detection calculations when calibrating using Sound Calibrator Type 4231 to determine whether the level is 94 or 114 dB If the transducer is an accelerometer and the accelerometer type is known to the analyzer then the parameters Nominal Sensitivity CCLD and Weight are set automatically In the top line of the Status Field you can select which transducer is currently connected to the analyzer This can also be done via the Setup screen by se
284. lyzer off e Repeat the above a preset number of times at preset intervals For a timer to work the analyzer must be in the switched off state A timer will never interrupt the analyzer if it is already in use manually If a switch on time is set during the time the analyzer is in use the timer opportunity is lost You can control the analyzer during a timer initiated measurement as long as this does not affect the measurements If you try to change any parameters affecting the measurement you will be warned of this If you persist the analyzer will revert to manual control and timer control cannot be resumed The Timer Setup lists the timers that have been defined previously on the analyzer that is added by you or previous users N BIT imer Nightshift E State Enabled is Name Nightshift LOGGING Start Time 01 01 2069 00 00 00 Preset Time 01 00 00 No of Starts 1 Timer Dayshift Timer Timeshift E Timer Big Bang 4 In the topmost line you can add other timers by tapping on the Add New Timer icon You can delete a timer from the list by tapping on the Delete Timer icon 4 Only timers created by the current user can be deleted To delete a timer defined by another user you have to logon as the other user and then delete the timer 101 102 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual For each timer you can specify e State Enable or disable the timer e Name Name the timer e Templa
285. me Fast display of next or previous marker profile overview of entire measurement Y axis Range 5 10 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 or 160 cB Auto zoom or auto scale available Sound data are displayed as dB values vibration data as dB values or in physical units SI units m s2 or US UK units g direct data as voltage in dB or V X axis Scroll facilities Cursor Readout of measurement data at selected time Notifications Alarm Conditions in addition to those specified for BZ 7222 e CIC failed e Trigger Level exceeded Software Specifications Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 The specifications for BZ 7225 include the specifications for Logging Software BZ 7224 BZ 7225 adds Logging For Display and Storage Lon Lden Lday Levening and Lhight Selectable Day Evening and Night periods and penalties sound input only Periodic Reports Measurement data logged at a preset report period into files on e SD Card All hardware versions e CF Card G1 3 e USB Memory Stick G4 Report Period From 1 min to 24 hr with 1 min resolution Broadband Data and Statistics Stored at each Reporting Interval All including Weather data Spectrum Data Stored at each Reporting Interval All license for BZ 7223 required Spectral Statistics Stored at each Reporting Interval Full distribution or none sound input only license for BZ 7223 required Logging Time From 1 s to 31 days with 1 s resolution or Continuous Data a
286. me of which may be averaged to provide a single number result for the most significant bands RT may range from 0 1 seconds or less in anechoic chambers to 10 or more seconds in large public spaces 152 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Fig 14 1 Definition of Reverberation Time RT Evaluation range of 30 dB for calculation of T30 indicated dB Regression Line PG X Excitation Level 5 dB Evaluation Range Background Noise Level Reverberation Time 060210 RT varies between positions in a room so it is usually measured at several positions The spatial average Room average for all positions gives an overall assessment and the position results may be used to indicate the acoustic quality as a function of location The Room average can either be made as an average of the RT spectra or calculated for the averaged decays ensemble average that is the decays for each frequency band are averaged over all positions and the RT spectrum is then calculated for the averaged decays 14 1 2 How Do We Measure Reverberation Time RT can be measured using either Interrupted Noise with the built in noise generator or by using Impulsive Excitation Schroeder Method such as from a pistol or balloon burst Interrupted Noise Method When using a power amplifier and loudspeaker sound source Fig 14 2 the analyzer will turn its noise generator on and off then measure and display the RT
287. measurement will run up to 20 s To minimize the measurement time and memory requirement for the measurement 155 156 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual you can limit the measurement by setting the Max Decay Time 3 s is adequate for most ordinary rooms but should be increased for larger halls or reverberation rooms 7 Set Excitation to Impulse if you want to measure using the impulse method go to step 14 otherwise select Interrupted Noise 14 2 1 Interrupted Noise Method 8 Set the number of decays you want to measure per position the analyzer automatically controls the generator measurement of the decays and averaging the decays 9 Set the Generator as required set Generator Type to amp xterna if you want to control an external generator details in Appendix A otherwise leave it at Jnterna to use the internal generator 10 Select Noise Type for the internal generator Pink noise is typically used 11 Adjust the level of the internal generator output to match the input of the power amplifier used by setting Leve re 1 v Hint You can manually turn the generator on and off by tapping on the Loudspeaker icon in the Status Field 12 Set Escape Time to enable you to leave the room before the generator is turned on during the measurement see Fig 14 3 13 Set Build up Time to allow the excitation noise to reach a steady level before the measurement starts 1 s is adequate in most
288. mented with Step after creation of a project The index wraps around when exceeding Upper Limit or getting below Lower Limit Please note Step can be negative Upper Limit For Type Index The upper limit of the index Lower Limit For Type Index The lower limit of the index At the top of the screen you can set a checkmark to use the settings for this metadata on new projects when closing the display The checkmark is disabled for changes to the definition of the metadata currently in use because this will always be used for new projects however when you are editing or looking at metadata from a previously saved project you can decide whether to use the settings on new projects too or keep the changes to the project only Fig 8 10 Edit metadata Edit Metadata 2 x a H Metadata Value Enabled Name Type Pick List Entry No 3 Entry Text Hall C 8 7 2 Fig 8 11 Example Timer Setup CHAPTER 8 Advanced Use of the Analyzer Tips and Tricks Timers and Automatic Measurements Automatic control of the analyzer is available via one or more of the analyzer s timers up to ten The purpose of a timer is to initiate measurements in the absence of an operator Basically a timer will e Switch on the analyzer at a preset time e Load a preselected template e Start a measurement as specified in the template e Stop the measurement after a preset time defined by the Timer Setup Save the measurement e Switch the ana
289. mic Range From typical noise floor to max level for a pure tone signal at 1 kHz 18 octave 1 1 to 140 dB Linear Operating Range In accordance with IEC 61260 1 3 octave lt 20 5 to 140 dB SAMPLING FOR OCTAVE OR 1 38 OCTAVE STATISTICS X frequency weightings A or B The Statistics can be based on either Lyp or Lys e Statistics Lyeyy7 Or Lxsy1 7 are based on sampling Lyp or Lys respectively every T ms into 1 dB wide classes over 150 dB T 100 for frequency range set to 12 5 20 kHz T 200 for frequency range set to 6 3 20 kHz Full distribution can be saved with measurement Displays MEASUREMENT DISPLAYS Spectrum One or two spectra superimposed A B and C Z broadband bars Table One or two spectra in tabular form Y axis Range 5 10 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 or 160 dB Auto zoom or auto scale available Sound data are displayed as dB values vibration data as dB values or in physical units SI units m s2 or US UK units g direct data as voltage in dB or V CHAPTER 18 Specifications Cursor Readout of selected band Generator INTERNAL GENERATOR Built in pseudo random noise generator Spectrum Selectable between Pink and White Crest Factor e Pink Noise 4 4 13 dB e White Noise 3 6 11 dB Bandwidth Selectable e Lower Limit 50 Hz 1 8 oct or 63 Hz oct e Upper Limit 10 kHz 13 oct or 8 kHz oct Output Level Independent of bandwidth e Max 1 Vims 0 dB e Gain Ad
290. mmon for the two channels e g Start Time and Elapsed Time 16 2 2 Displaying the Results The results are displayed as bar graphs and measurement parameters can be displayed on the Broadband tab or XL View Extra Large tab by selecting the appropriate tab Fig 16 4 Fig 16 4 UND LEVEL METER Displaying the results iE 40 Chl uF 30 50 Ch 1 LAeq 20 40 60 Ch 2 LAF I 30 50 70 47 6 dB Ch 2 LAeq 42 7 dB a Ch 1 LAFmax 65 1 dB Ch 2 LAFmax 60 1 dB Gres Preset Time 00 00 30 l l 100 120 140 54 0 dB I l l 110 130 150 47 7 dB 47 7 dB CHAPTER 16 2 channel Option BZ 7229 16 2 3 Saving Results Measurements are saved and can be opened later in the same way as described for the Sound Level Meter project in 3 16 3 Setting Up 2 channel Frequency Analyzer 1 Select the 2 Ch FREQUENCY ANALYZER project template The project template is displayed at the top of the screen if it does not display the correct template tap the Project Template Bar at the top of the screen and select the correct template from the drop down menu See section 3 2 1 for more details on templates 2 Tap Main Menu gt Setup gt Fig 16 5 Frequency Settings to set Broadband frequency weighting parameters as required Statistics to set statistics parameters as required The settings for Spectrum Weighting and base for Spectrum Statistics are available in this template 3 Tap EJ to exit Fig 16 5 Setting
291. mode Please wait Sh a A ee san Within a few seconds the display in Fig 9 4 will be shown 110 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Fig 9 4 Update 2250 software screen for G1 3 analyzers Update 2250 Software Press to accept or any other key to cancel c Cancel the update by pressing any other pushbutton than the Accept pushbutton v Fig 9 5 Reset to default settings screen for G1 3 analyzers Reset to default settings Press to accept or any other key to cancel b evo e oe a d Press the Accept pushbutton v to reset to default settings F or G4 analyzers The analyzer contains two sets of the firmware software package and settings The one originally delivered with the analyzer and one installed afterwards To restore the factory firmware software package and settings a Press and hold the Power on pushbutton for at least five seconds powers off b Press and hold down the Commentary and Save amp pushbuttons while switching on the analyzer The display in Fig 9 6 will be shown CHAPTER 9 Updating and Upgrading Applications Maintenance Calibration and Troubleshooting Fig 9 6 Restore factory firmware and settings on G4 analyzers Restore factory firmware and settings Press y to confirm or any other key to cancel c Press the Accept pushbutton v to restore factory firmware and settings Ifthe analyzer now functions normally you sh
292. n dry conditions with a wind speed less than 5 m s The optimum position for the microphone is best found by trying different positions and observing the resulting sound levels CHAPTER 2 15 Assembling your Analyzer Mounting the Measurement Microphone Caution Before mounting the measurement microphone note the following precautions e When screwing the microphone on do it gently to avoid damaging threads e Keep dust and foreign matter off the microphone diaphragm e Do not touch the diaphragm with anything it is very delicate V Best Practice Once the measurement microphone and preamplifier have been assembled and connected to your analyzer they should normally be left connected to the analyzer To Connect 1 Gently screw the microphone onto Preamplifier ZC 0032 see items 1 and 2 in Fig 2 1 2 Insert the male plug of the preamplifier into the top socket of the analyzer see item 17 in Fig 2 1 and push gently until it snaps into position To Disconnect To disconnect the preamplifier and microphone from the analyzer grip the locking collar firmly and slide back to remove the preamplifier and microphone combination Mounting the Windscreen For short outdoor noise measurements or indoor measurements exposed to air movement mount Windscreen UA 1650 onto the microphone and preamplifier combination making sure it snaps into place over the windscreen sensor The sensor is built into the preamplifier see item 2 in Fig 2 1
293. n tap the LZF selector and select Display Reverberation Time to display the reverberation time spectra When starting a measurement the graph will automatically display the sound level spectrum when finished it will display the reverberation time spectrum 162 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Fig 14 8 ATION TIME 0 Spectrum view when measuring 400 Hz 41 67 dB 250 500 T20 Room 100 Hz 2 kHz T20 100 Hz 2 kHz The Main Spectrum graph on the display the one with bars is selected using the parameter selector on the second line of the two shown above the graph LZF in Fig 14 8 The smileys below the spectra if there are any belong to the Main Spectrum The parameter selector for the Main Spectrum is linked to the selector on the Overview tab and the parameter selector for the main decay on the Decay tab The reference spectrum on the display the one displayed as small lines above the bars in Fig 14 7 is selected using the parameter selector on the first line of the two shown above the graph 730 in Fig 14 7 The parameter selector for the reference spectrum is linked to the parameter selector for the reference decay curve in the Decay view The cursor is linked to the Frequency selectors on the Overview and Decay tabs Tap the Y axis to select e Auto Zoom to adjust the range of the Y axis for best fit of the measured spectrum Zoom In Zoom Out to adjust the zoom e Spectrum Table to display the spe
294. n to reduce this to a small blue bar at the top of the screen allowing you to watch the profile underneath you will notice that the profile cursor is updated every second to the position of the sound that is currently being played CHAPTER 13 Signal Recording Option Fig 13 4 Playing the recording minimizing the pop up The small blue button bar at the top can be maximized again by tapping E or you can close it and stop playback by tapping E 13 2 5 Signal Recordings on the PC When projects including signal recording have been transferred into an Archive on a PC using BZ 5503 then the recordings can be played back directly from BZ 5503 Signal Recordings can be input to the Briel amp Kjaer PULSE Multi analyzer platform for further analysis please contact your local Briiel amp Kjaer representative for further information Please note When recording signals for further analysis in PULSE be sure to record the Z weighted signal and select Automatic Gain Control to O funder the Signal Recording parameters and select the Recording Quality to match your needs for frequency content see details on sampling frequency in Appendix A When Automatic Gain Control is set to Off then the calibration information is stored in the wave files allowing PULSE to analyse the signal recordings taking the calibration into account Please note Other sound players than BZ 5503 might not be able to amplify 24 bit per sampl
295. nal battery enters the set state Low Critical Trigger Input 20 0 Vto 20 0 V A notification is sent if voltage level at trigger input drops to Voltage or below this setting Note This alarm requires Setup gt Input gt Trigger Input is set to Voltage for Monitoring Disk Space 0 to 100 A notification is sent if free disk space drops to or below this setting Level Trigger Disabled A notification is sent if Leve Trigger specified in Events Enabled Setup gt Level Trigger in Logging Software or in Setup gt Triggers in Enhanced Logging Software is exceeded Report Level Disable Set to Enable to send a notification when the measured Lyeg Notifications Enable for the latest Report Period exceeds Report Threshold Level the functionality is only available when running the Enhanced Logging template 303 304 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Table D 10 Cont Notification settings Parameter Values Comment Report Threshold 100 0 dBto 200 0 dB Anotificationissentwhen the measured Laeq for Microphone Level input or Linear for Acceleration and Direct input for the latest Report Period exceeds the set Report Threshold Level Please note e Ifyou specify a very low Report Threshold Level you will receive a notification at the end of each Report Period e For 2 channel Enhanced Logging the Report Threshold Level is for Ch 1 Report Threshold 100 0 dBto 200
296. nalyzer Parameters Table C 2 Cont Transducer setup parameters Parameter Values Comment CCLD Yes Set to Yes for CCLD Constant Current Line Drive transducers otherwise set to No No Set automatically for known Microphone or Accelerometer Type Please note Set Input to Rear Socket The CCLD input at the Rear socket will automatically be enabled when selecting a transducer requiring CCLD input Calibration Check CIC Microphone only For microphone Type 4184 A you can select to check the calibration of the system using Actuator CIC or Actuator for all other microphone types the setting is preset to CIC Weight Double Accelerometer only Insert weight of the accelerometer in g Set automatically for known Accelerometer type C 2 2 Calibration History Table C 3 Calibration history parameters Parameter Values Comment 1 Calibration date amp Time YYYY MM DD hh mm ss Initial 1 Sensitivity Double Initial mV Pa 1 Preamplifier ID No Text string Initial 1 User Text string Initial 1 Input Top Socket Rear Socket Initial 1 Calibration Type External Internal Initial 1 Calibrator Serial No Text string Initial 1 Comment Text string Initial 1 Analyzer Serial No Text string Initial 2 Calibration date amp Time YYYY MM DD hh mm ss 2 Sensitivity Double 2 Preamplifier ID No Text string 287 288 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and
297. nd Automatic Measurements cccccssececsessececseececesaeeeceeseececseeeceeueeeeeaaeeseneeeeeeeas CHAPTER 9 Updating and Upgrading Applications Maintenance Calibration and Troubleshooting ssssseesssssssoooossssesessooosossesesssssoososesssseseoo 9 1 How to Install New Applications ccccecccccccssssssssecececseseaeeesececeesesassesescseaaeeeeeesceessaeeeeees 9 2 How to Update Upgrade Applications and Install New Languages 9 3 9 4 Update Upgrade using BZ 5503 cccsscesssesseceessecssecesseecseceeseecsseceeseecsaeeeeeeeees Update through the Internet Downgrade to an Earlier Version How to Move a License eee Troubleshooting Measurements cceeececececececeeeeees SD CF Cards and USB StickS cccccccecccccccsssesesssssesssssesesssseseesesans Battery Pack and Recalibration of Battery Charge Indicator TOUCHSCREEN eisiceiiseats es e eaa eea A Oaa SE taa aeaa hace EA bids ebb bbe AE E EA A Reset Option Sanet let aee aaa iar aae aeaee Aae aeaaea a ar ala naana lasia tane 9 5 Care Cleaning and Storage Handling the Analyzer 006 Cleaning the Analyzer 006 Storing the ANnalyZe r u ccccccessssccccecsesssseseeceesesseaeeeescessesseaeees 9 6 Services at Briel amp Kj r for Types 2250 and 2270 0005 Accredited Calibration Initial Calibration Regular Recalibration 000 Filter Calibration Service and
298. nd measurement parameters Table B 1 General parameters Parameter LXeq LXE LXIeq LAFTeq LVpeak TVpeak LXYmax LXYmin Sound Field Correction Windscreen Correction Low Frequency Broadband excl Peak Broadband Peak These parameters require a license for BZ 7223 and spectra measurement Table B 2 Noise indicators and statistics Measurement Parameters Parameter Lday L evening night Lden LXYN Sound Field Correction Windscreen Correction Low Frequency Broadband excl Peak Broadband Statistics based on Percentile N Day Start Evening Start Night Start Evening Penalty Night Penalty Table B 3 Occupational health parameters Parameter Lep d Lep d v Dose Proj Dose VPeaks gt NNNdB Lav RQ TWA TWA Dose RQ Proj DoseRQ Sound Field Correction Wind screen e Correction Low Frequency Broadband excl Peak Broadband Peak 280 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Table B 3 Cont Occupational health parameters Proj VPeaks Lav Twa TWA Dose Proj P t L L E D arameter Lep d Lep d v ose Dose gt NNNdB RQ RQ DoseRQ Exposure Time Reference Time Threshold Level Criterion L
299. nder Ch 2 Type 2270 and at the top of Transducers Database Input no text is displayed Top Socket Rear Socket Determines whether the input is taken from the Top Socket or the Rear Socket Input on connector panel Connect your transducer to this socket This parameter is displayed in Setup gt Input and on the second line of the Transducers Database C 2 Transducer Database Analyzer Parameters The Transducer Database consists of a Transducer Setup and a Calibration History one set per transducer C 2 1 Transducer Setup Table C 2 Transducer setup parameters Parameter Values Comment Serial No Text string Insert unique ID for transducer Name Text string Insert name of transducer to display together with serial number Description Text string Insert description of transducer Preamplifier ID No Text string Document the preamplifier here Microphone Type 4189 Microphone only If the microphone is a known type 4190 then the rest of the parameters of the transducer are set 4191 automatically Sound Field Correction and 4950 4955 A Windscreen Correction are possible for known 4193 microphone types only 4193 UC 0211 4964 4964 UC 0211 4952 0 4952 90 4184 A 0 4184 A 90 FH 2152 0 FH 2152 90 Unknown Please note Microphone Types 4952 and 4184 A can be used with 0 reference direction or 90 reference direction For unknown micr
300. neous Weather Data Wind Dir Wind Speed Instantaneous GPS Data Latitude Longitude Lyi Ly Lxi SPL Lyi SPL Lxn3 OF Lxun3 Lyne Or Lung Trig Input Voltage LAeg T2 mov AL eq T1 mov MEASUREMENTS FOR VIBRATION AND DIRECT INPUT For Display and Storage Start Time Stop Time Overload Elapsed Time Time Remaining Linear Fast max Slow max Fast min Slow min Peak Tpeak Only for Display as Numbers or Quasi analog Bars Fast Inst Slow Inst Trig Input Voltage Instantaneous GPS Data Latitude Longitude MEASURING RANGES When using Microphone Type 4189 Dynamic Range From typical noise floor to max level for a 1 kHz pure tone signal A weighted 16 6 to 140 dB Primary Indicator Range In accordance with IEC 60651 A weighted 23 5 dB to 122 3 dB Linearity Range In accordance with IEC 60804 A weighted 21 4 dB to 140 8 dB Linear Operating Range In accordance with IEC 61672 e A weighted 1 kHz 24 8 dB to 139 7 dB e C weighted 25 5 dB to 139 7 dB e Z weighted 30 6 dB to 139 7 dB Peak C Range In accordance with IEC 61672 1 kHz 42 3 dB to 142 7 dB SAMPLING FOR STATISTICS The Statistics can be based on either Lyp Lys or Lxeq e Statistics Lypy1 7 or Lysy1 7 are based on sampling Lyp or Lys resp every 10 ms into 0 2 dB wide classes over 130 dB e Statistics Lyy4 7 are based on sampling Lxeq every second into 0 2 dB wide classes over 130 dB Full distribution saved with measurement The
301. ng Optional Module 131 11 3 2 Marking Sound Categories Use this facility to categorise the sound while you are measuring or while you are observing the different kinds of sound on the display This will make it much easier to do the post processing and reporting back in the office You can mark up to five sound categories on line The markers are displayed as horizontal lines above the sound profile Fig 11 3 There are two main types of marker e An Exclude Marker this allows you to mark a sound you want to exclude from your measurement later during post processing or reporting It does not remove any data from your measurement e An Event Marker this allows you to mark a particular sound of interest during your measurement On the analyzer e Marker 1 is used as an Exclude Marker e Markers 2 to 5 are used as Event Markers All of these event markers can be user defined You can define a marker by tapping Main Menu gt Setup gt Markers Marker 2 is set to a Manual Event marker by default it can be controlled by the Manual Event pushbutton and the stylus Marker 3is set to a Level Event marker by default it can be controlled by the level trigger facility and the stylus e Marker 6 is used as a Sound Marker and shows the size of the signal recording The analyzer allows you to view the markers at a later date by recalling the data and viewing the desired profile This can also be done if you have trans
302. ng acceleration levels as dB the reference will be 1 um s2 Serial No for 4294 Text string Serial number will be documented in calibration history Serial No for Custom Text string Serial number will be documented in Acceleration Calibrator calibration history Calibration Level for DirectInput Oto 1000 V Set calibration level for Direct Input Please note When displaying voltage levels as dB the reference will be 1 uV Serial No for Direct Input Text string Serial number will be documented in Calibrator calibration history 290 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual C 4 Type 2250 2270 Microphones Table C 5 Overview of Type 2250 70 microphones set Free field 1 dB Free field 2 dB Micro Application Optimised i gt Frequenc Frequen phone pp For Dynamic Range q y quency Range Range 4184 A Weatherproo FreeField0 28 8 150 dB A 3 6 Hz 15 0 kHz 2 5 Hz 16 5 kHz f or 90 6 6 Hz 15 0 kHz 5 6 Hz 16 5 kHz 200 V Diffuse Field 4189 Standard Free Field 16 6 140 dB A 6 8Hz 224kHz 4 2 Hz 22 4 kHz Prepolarized Diffuse Field 7 8 Hz 22 4 kHz 6 3 Hz 22 4 kHz 4190 Standard Free Field 16 5 140 dB A 4 0Hz 224kHz 2 6 Hz 22 4 kHz 200 V Diffuse Field 6 7 Hz 22 4 kHz 5 7 Hz 22 4 kHz 4191 High Levels Free Field 25 6 152 dB A 3 6Hz 22 4kHz 2 5 Hz 22 4kHz 200 V Diffuse Field 6 6 Hz 22 4 kHz 5 6 Hz 22 4 kHz 4193 L
303. nly used weighting is the A weighting which approximates the human ear s response to low medium noise levels A C weighting curve is also used particularly when evaluating very loud or low frequency sounds A Lp dB I gt Frequency 10 20 50 T00 200 500 1k 2k 5k 10k 20k Hz 000055 Frequency weighting used for infrasound measurements Instantaneous time averaged acceleration level with Wm weighting and with 125 ms exponential time constant Please note Wm weighting of the acceleration signal corresponds to using Hyg weighting on the velocity signal as defined in DIN 45669 1 Maximum of the KBF values Average of the values of KBF maxi where each KBFmaxi has been measured during 30 s LAeq LXeq T mov and ALeq T mov LXeq T mov max and ALeq T mov max LAFmax LAFmin Glossary Sound Exposure Level sometimes abbreviated SEL and sometimes called Single Event Level is the Sound Exposure expressed as a level The letter A denotes that the A weighting has been included A widely used noise parameter that calculates a constant level of noise with the same energy content as the varying acoustic noise signal being measured The letter A denotes that the A weighting has been included and eq indicates that an equivalent level has been calculated Hence Laeg is the A weighted equivalent continuous noise level Moving or sliding X weight
304. nput signal Use to assign the new value for immediate response at the output or use the up down navigation keys to increment decrement the value in steps of 1 dB Please note 0 dB means 1 V output for 1 V input Not available for Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 251 252 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual A 15 Lden Periods Table A 15 Lgen Periods parameters Parameter Values Comment Day Start 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 Determines the start of the day period for the Lgay calculation Evening Start 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 Determines the start of the evening period for the Levening calculation Night Start 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 Determines the start of the night period for the Light calculation Evening Penalty 0 to 20 dB The Evening Penalty will be added to Leyening when calculating Lgen Night Penalty 0 to 20 dB The Night Penalty will be added to Lnignt when calculating Lgen For Enhanced Logging BZ 7225 templates and microphone input only Please note A 16 Occupational Health Table A 16 Occupational Health parameters If Evening Start is set between Night Start and Day Start then the eyenjngparameter will be undefined Parameter Values Comment Exposure Time 00 01 00 to 1 00 00 00 Set the Exposure Time to the actual time that you are exposed to noise during a workday Used for calculation of Lep
305. nt not stored e Red LED flashing quickly intermittent overload calibration failed NOTIFICATIONS Sends an SMS or email daily at a specified time or if an alarm condition is fulfilled Alarm Conditions e Disk Space below set value e Trig Input Voltage below set value e Internal Battery enters set state e Change in Measurement State e Reboot of analyzer Signal Monitoring The input signal can be monitored using an earphone headphones connected to the headphone socket or it can be fed to the output socket OUTPUT SIGNAL Input Conditioned A B C or Z weighted Gain Adjustment 60 dB to 60 dB Lyp output every ms as a DC voltage between 0 V and 4 V DC output for calibration purposes 0 dB 0 V and 200 dB 4V HEADPHONE SIGNAL Input signal can be monitored using this socket with headphones earphones Gain Adjustment 60 dB to 60 dB Annotations VOICE ANNOTATIONS Voice annotations can be attached to measurements so that verbal comments can be stored together with the measurement 207 208 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Playback Playback of voice annotations can be listened to using an earphone headphones connected to the headphone socket Gain Adjustment 60 dB to 60 dB TEXT ANNOTATIONS Text annotations can be attached to measurements so that written comments can be stored with the measurement GPS ANNOTATIONS A text annotation with GPS information can be attached L
306. nts You can select more than one job project for Copy Cutor Delete by tapping and holding the stylus on a job project name and then dragging the stylus up or down to select other jobs projects Selecting Default Measurement Job Path Tap Z to select the current job as the default measurement job where all projects will be saved when you press the Save amp pushbutton The job name followed by the current project name will appear in the topmost line in the status area to confirm which job you have selected 6 3 6 3 1 6 3 2 Fig 6 2 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Recalling Measurements You can recall your measurement results to display the measured results reuse setups from previously saved projects or view logged data as a profile Use the Open command in Explorer this will recall the project template display settings and measurement setup used on the saved results along with the results This will however stop and reset the current measurement Viewing Data and Reusing Setups from Projects From Main Menu H gt Explorer locate the project with the setup you want to reuse then tap the project name and select Open from the drop down that appears This will stop and reset the current measurement and load the project including all setups and data You are now using the same screens as the ones you were using just before you saved the data Use the screens to browse the results Pressing
307. o the Network using a LAN Modem Using a3G modem with LAN interface is a simple and very reliable and powerful way of remotely connecting to the analyzer Set up the modem according to its user manual usually requires connection to a PC before you connect the modem to your analyzer When ready connect the modem to the analyzer using a LAN cable For G1 3 analyzers you will also need the 10 100 Ethernet CF Card UL 1016 See Ordering Information on page 219 The Modem parameter should be set to Off The Airlink Raven XE Intelligent 3G Ethernet Gateway from Sierra Wireless www sierrawireless com has been tested 8 2 2 Connection to Network using GPRS EDGE HSPA Modem V Best Practice Turn off the analyzer when connecting the analyzer to a modem Please note The SIM card account should include a data subscription and should be usable without a pincode To use the modem you need to set up the parameters in Dialup Networking listed below and set the Modem parameter to GPRS EDGE HSPA Dialup Parameters in Dialup Networking e APN Access Point Name is an identifier required by the network operator Examples are Internet public and www vodaphone de e User Name Password and possibly Domain should be set as required by the network Operator When the Modem parameter is set to GPRS EDGE HSPA Dialup a connection is made using the settings in Dialup Networking The Status parameter reflects the current status of the network c
308. omatically Escape Time 0 to 60s Build up Time 1 to 10 s Number of Decays per Measurement 1 to 100 ensemble averaged into one decay The generator can be turned on and off manually for checking equipment and sound levels Serial Measurements Selected frequency bands can be measured serially that is one by one in an automatic sequence This can be done automatically in combination with the parallel measurement Impulse Excitation Manual start of first measurement When level say from starter pistol exceeds the user selected trigger level the decay is recorded and backwards integration performed Schroeder method The trigger can then be armed automatically for measuring at the next position CHAPTER 18 Specifications Signal Recording requires license for Signal Recording Option BZ 7226 Recording of the Z weighted measured signal can be done at each position For data storage Signal Recording requires e SD Card All hardware versions e CF Card G1 3 e USB Memory Stick G4 Measurement Status ON SCREEN Information such as overload awaiting trigger and running paused are displayed on screen as icons TRAFFIC LIGHT Red yellow and green LEDs show measurement status and instantaneous overload as follows e Yellow LED flashing every 5 s stopped ready to measure e Green LED flashing slowly awaiting trigger or calibration signal e Green LED on constantly measuring e Yellow LED flashing slowly
309. on BZ 7234 Wm filters 10 00 0 00 u m LU H 10 00 M LU Ht LM LU 20 00 HH m M Pa i 30 00 n n h L 40 00 H H H L 50 00 H n H H SHH 60 00 HH HH HH Ne 70 00 N LW L m 80 00 0 0100 0 1000 1 0000 10 0000 100 0000 1000 0000 10000 0000 Frequency Hz W Weighting W_ Weighting 130806 Low Frequency Option BZ 7234 together with BZ 7222 BZ 7223 BZ 7224 or BZ 7225 and Accelerometer Type 8344 for low level measurements measures the following timed broadband parameters in addition to the standard measured parameters aW time averaged weighted acceleration value PeakW maximum peak of the weighted acceleration value aWCrest crest factor given by Peakyw ay MTVV maximum of the aw values KBFmax maximum of the KBF values KBFTm average of the values of KBFmax where each KBFmax has been measured during 30s The following instantaneous values are also available aW 1s maximum time weighted acceleration value during the latest second with weighting1 and 1 s exponential time constant KBF instantaneous time averaged acceleration level with Wm weighting and with 125 ms exponential time constant Please note Wm weighting of the acceleration signal corresponds to using Hyg weighting on the v
310. on standards Note The above is only guaranteed using accessories listed in this Product Data Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 amp IEC 60068 2 2 Environmental Testing Cold and Dry Heat Operating Temperature 10 to 50 C 14 to 122 F Storage Temperature 25 to 70 C 13 to 158 F Humidity IEC 60068 2 78 Damp Heat 93 RH non condensing at 40 C 104 F Recovery time 2 4 hours Mechanical Non operating IEC 60068 2 6 Vibration 0 3 mm 20 m s2 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 27 Bump 1000 bumps at 400 m s IEC 60068 2 27 Shock 1000 m s2 6 directions Enclosure IEC 60529 1989 Protection provided by enclosures IP44 With preamplifier extension cable or protection plug connected to the top socket and the hinged cover protecting the bottom connectors Additional Standards for Micro USB Wireless Adaptor UL 1050 FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization for Micro USB Wireless Adaptor UL 1050 FCC Identifier KA2WA121A1 FCC Rule Parts 15c Frequency 2412 0 2462 0 Range MHz Output Watts 0 269 Safety EN 60950 1 2006 A11 2009 A1 2010 A12 2011 EMC Emission EN 301 489 1 V1 9 2 EN 301 489 17 V2 2 1 EN 55022 2010 AC 2011 Spectrum amp EN 300 328 V1 7 1 Health EN 62311 2008 Restriction of EN 50581 2012 Hazardous Substances EC Declaration of Conformity 1Tx1R 802 11bgn USB adapter C Tick Authorization AS NZS 4268 2008 A1 2010
311. on your analyzer is selected as the 7ransducer parameter this is also found on the Setup screen e Check whether the parameters for the selected transducer 7ransduce are set correctly especially the Microphone Type and Polarization Voltage parameters These are found by tapping Main Menu gt Transducers e Checkthat the Sound Field and Windscreen Correction parameters have been set correctly These are found by tapping Main Menu gt Setup gt Input e Check if the calibration is OK make a new calibration using an external calibrator SD CF Cards and USB Sticks The Logging Enhanced Logging and Signal Recording software requires that measurements are saved on memory cards SD or with G1 3 analyzers CF A USB memory stick can be used from hardware version 4 Device Format and Speed In order to ensure reliable operation with the memory device the format of the file system and the speed of the device are tested Upon insertion the analyzer verifies the format of the memory device s file system If the file system is not optimal for usage with the analyzer then you are prompted to format it You will be guided through the process CHAPTER 9 Updating and Upgrading Applications Maintenance Calibration and Troubleshooting When the format of the file system has been accepted then the speed of the device is tested The test writes data to the device and measures the writing speed The test takes less than a minute If th
312. onnection for example Connected or Disconnected If the connection fails then the analyzer will try to reconnect until it succeeds or the Modem parameter is set to Disabled If the connection succeeds then the analyzer will automatically get an IP address which is readable but not accessible in Network for more details see section 8 3 The IP address is the address on the WAN Wide Area Network or Internet Use this address in BZ 5503 or an Internet browser to connect to the analyzer Please note In some cases you might be able to get a static IP address from the network operator which means that the analyzer will always have the same IP address when connected to the network However typically the IP address will be renewed each time the analyzer connects to the network In order to deal with this in BZ 5503 or via an Internet browser you need to use DynDNS see section 8 2 3 8 2 3 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Modems with USB Interface The Airlink Fastrack Xtend GPRS EDGE and HSPA modem from Sierra Wireless www sierrawireless com has been tested Modems with an USB interface can be connected to the USB Type A socket on G4 analyzers Modems with RS 232 Serial Interfaces The following modems have been tested e FASTRACK Supreme 10 and 20 GSM GPRS EDGE Modem from Wavecom e Airlink Fastrack Xtend GPRS EDGE and HSPA from Sierra Wireless www sierrawireless com For G4 analyz
313. ons if required by type approval authorities Using BZ 5503 you can also install licenses for the specific applications and if you have hardware version 1 3 install your preferred language with G4 hardware all languages are pre installed in the analyzer Installation requires a USB connection between BZ 5503 and the analyzer 103 104 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual The BZ 5503 software will clearly indicate if the new software version is an update free of charge or an upgrade license fee Please consult the on line help included with the BZ 5503 software for instructions on how to install upgrades updates of the software together with your preferred language 9 2 2 Update through the Internet The analyzer can update software by itself if it is connected to the Internet see section 7 1 This method is particularly useful if the analyzer is used for long term monitoring and you do not want to go to the measurement site for servicing that is you want to disturb the measurement as little as possible Please note e The method is used for updating the software with the latest version available from the Briel amp Kjaer website The languages already installed will be updated at the same time If you have G1 3 analyzers you cannot install new languages or licenses to do this you must use BZ 5503 e This can be done remotely if you connect to the online display using either BZ 5503 or an In
314. op of the screen to open the Template Explorer and tap Save g Hint If you make changes to the screen that you do not want to keep and you have not yet saved the template you can undo them by selecting the template again from the Project Template Bar at the top of the screen CHAPTER 4 43 Getting to Know Your Analyzer Shortcut Bar The Shortcut Bar at the bottom of the screen displays a number of fixed icons that are always accessible These include Main Menu Eq accesses the Main Menu This allows you to navigate to a specific function see description earlier under Navigation Principles e Backlight select a backlight level Help J get context sensitive help from any screen by tapping on the icon at the bottom Closing the Help screen will return you to the previous screen Battery Power Status shows the battery condition All green shows a fully charged battery while red means power levels are low Tap the icon to get more details of the battery condition When the power supply lead is connected ME will be displayed in place of Battery Power Status E The clock in the lower right corner displays the current time Tap the readout to get details of the time and date or to set the clock 4 5 3 Use of Pushbuttons for Controlling Measurements The design of the analyzer is such that the layout of the pushbuttons has been optimized for single handed operation Reset Measurement Pushbutton Use the Reset
315. ophone types set the rest of the parameters no corrections can be made for unknown types Please note If you are unsure which microphone to use please refer to Table C 5 which gives an overview of the microphones where they can be used and their specifications 286 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Table C 2 Cont Transducer setup parameters Parameter Values Comment Accelerometer Type 4397A Accelerometer only If accelerometer is a known type 4513 then the rest of the parameters of the transducer are set 4513 001 automatically S For unknown accelerometer types set the 4514 001 rest of the parameters 4514 002 4533 B 4533 B 001 4533 B 002 4534 B 4534 B 001 4534 B 002 6233 C 10 8324 8341 8343 8347 C 2647 D Unknown Nominal Sensitivity Double Set automatically for known type Otherwise set the nominal sensitivity in mV Pa for microphones in mV m s for accelerometers and in V V for Direct input Polarization Voltage Yes Microphone only Set to Wo if microphone is prepolarized otherwise set to Yes for polarization No voltage of 200 V Top Socket only Set automatically for known Microphone Type Free field Type Yes Microphone only Set to Yes for Free field types otherwise set to No No Set automatically for known Microphone Type Capacitance Double Microphone only Insert capacitance of microphone in pF Set automatically for known Microphone Type A
316. or Z controlled by Setup gt Frequency Settings gt BB excl peak parameter W frequency weightings A B C Z or G controlled by Setup gt Frequency Settings gt Spectrum parameter U time weightings F or S controlled by Setup gt Statistics gt Spectral Statistics based on parameter R time weightings F orS controlled by Setup gt Occupational Health gt Time Weighting for Lav parameter Q exchange rate 4 5 or 6 dB controlled by Setup gt Occupational Health gt Exchange Rate for Lav parameter N number between 0 1 and 99 9 controlled by Setup gt Statistics gt Percentile N parameter Please note All parameters will be per channel in 2 channel templates unless stated otherwise Type 2270 only 261 262 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual B 1 Total Measurement Microphone Input B 1 1 For Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 Logging Software BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 The following parameters are measured within the Elapsed Time Equivalent Continuous Sound Levels Lyeg Lyg Leeg Laeg Laeg T1 mov not saved with data LA eq T1 mov max e Lyeg T2 mov Not saved with data LA eq T2 mov max Lceg T1 mov NOt saved with data Lceq T1 mov max Lceg T2mov not saved with data Lceq T2 mov max e ALeg T1 mov not saved with data ALeg T1 mov max e ALleg 72 mov not saved with data ALeg
317. or more information Under the Tone Assessment parameters select the settings for Tone Assessment See Chapter 15 for more information 10 2 Controlling the Measurement The measurement is controlled in the same way you would control a normal Sound Level Meter measurement using Start Pause Continue 4 Back erase and Reset pushbuttons see Chapter 3 for more details The measurement can control a generator connected to the Output socket on the connector panel see Fig 2 2 or Fig 2 3 Enable the generator by setting the Source parameter to Generator in Main Menu gt Setup gt Output Socket Signal then set up the generator settings in Main Menu gt Setup gt Generator The generator will be controlled using Escape Time and Build up Time as described in Fig 14 3 10 3 Displaying the Results The Frequency Analyzer measurement screen includes three tabs at the bottom Spectrum tab Broadband tab and XL View tab Extra Large The tabs allow you to choose different ways of displaying the measurement results All but the Spectrum tab have been covered in Chapter 3 However a quick recap is provided below The Broadband tab shows an instantaneous Lap readout with associated bar graph and four measurement parameters followed by two measurement setup parameters The first measurement parameter is displayed in a larger font size for better readability CHAPTER 10 1 1 or 1 3 octave Frequency Analysis Optional Module
318. or the analyzer The measurement microphone and preamplifier items 1 and 2 respectively are normally connected directly to this socket For more details see section 2 3 18 Tripod Mounting Thread Mount the analyzer onto the tripod and or tripod extension 19 Wrist Strap Tripod Mounting Thread Attach a wrist strap to the analyzer for added security or use it to mount the analyzer onto the tripod and or tripod extension using Tripod Adaptor UA 1673 20 Internal Battery Pack Rechargeable high capacity Li Ion battery pack to power the analyzer 21 Hinged Cover FB 0679 FB 0699 A removable plastic cover hinged at the top to provide protection for the connector panel underneath To remove open the cover and pull the hinge out of the slot at the top of the connector panel The cover includes a rubber insert printed with an overview of the main connectors and reset button for easy recognition Indents are provided on the inside of the cover behind the insert that allow you to drill holes in the plastic cover giving access to the main connectors underneath so you can use the cover while power or other cables are connected 22 Camera Type 2270 only Add images to measurements Protected and positioned on the underside at 45 degrees the camera is designed to allow simultaneous image capture and noise measurement without the need to reposition the analyzer for each task 23 High Speed USB and LAN Interfaces Hardware versions 1
319. ordinary rooms but should be increased for larger halls or reverberation rooms 14 Select the Sound Source used to optimise the frequency response of the internal generator output for either a flat power response or optimum power difference between adjacent 1 1 or 1 3 octave bands thereby eliminating the need for an equalizer to smooth the response in most cases Select a type matching your sound source select Unknownif you are using a non Br el amp Kj r sound source or do not want to make a correction to the frequency response Go to step 16 14 2 2 Impulsive Method 15 Set Trigger Level low enough to be sure the impulse will be triggered but high enough to avoid triggering on the background noise A level between 80 and 100 dB is normally adequate 16 Ifyou have set Automatic Save to Yes then Trigger Repeat can be set to Yesto automatically start a new measurement when a measurement has been saved This allows you to go to another position and make a new impulse without the need for controlling the analyzer between the measurements Observe how the traffic light indicates the status of the measurement see Table 4 1 and Fig 14 4 making it easy for you to change position and generate the impulse synchronised with the measurement procedure Press the Start Pause pushbutton to stop the measurement when the last measurement has been saved CHAPTER 14 Reverberation Time Software Optional Module 137 14 2 3 Signal
320. ot saved with the measurement All Tones Frequency Tone level Loti Masking noise level Lon Audibility AL Critical Band CB Tone vs Noise Level difference AL Audibility criterion ALs rit Most Prominent Tone Tone Level L Adjustment K QUALITY INDICATORS On the display a quality indicator smiley will indicate that a hint is available for tone assessment quality Click on the indicator to see the hint pt 1 3 octave Based Tone Assessment with BZ 7223 24 25 Only Tone assessment is based on the measured 1 8 octave spectrum in accordance with either the international ISO 1996 2007 Acoustics Description assessment and measurement of environmental noise part 2 Determination of environmental noise levels Annex D informative Objective method for assessing the audibility Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual of tones in noise Simplified method or the Italian law DM 16 03 1998 Ministero dell ambiente Decreto 16 marzo 1998 SPECTRA ASSESSED The displayed 1 3 octave spectrum Leg Lmax OF Lmin May be assessed Assessment is made as post processing that is when measurement is paused or stopped SETUP ACCORDING TO STANDARD Setups in violation of the standard are indicated as such on the display You can then accept to apply the default setup Tone assessment will be made if possible in spite of standard violations For tone assessment according to ISO 1996 2 Annex D you can
321. ot you set up Ensure that Preferences gt Remote Access gt Web Server is set to Enabled On the smartphone 5 Open MP Field App 6 Tap 4 to open the Instruments screen 7 Tap your analyzer s serial number to connect Please note e For subsequent uses MP Field App should recognized your analyzer and connect automatically However the smartphone may assign a different IP address to the analyzer If so repeat steps 6 and 7 to connect e Ifthe analyzer does not appear on the instrument list tap the icon and enter the analyzer s IP address which can be found on your analyzer at Main Menu gt Preferences gt Network gt IP Address To connect using an access point or Internet connection On the analyzer 1 Switch on the analyzer 2 Plug in Wi Fi Dongle UL 1050 preferred or WLAN SD card UL 1021 for G4 analyzers or WLAN CF card UL 1019 for G1 3 analyzers Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Please note The CF card requires additional input See section 8 3 for additional information 3 Tap Main Menu gt Preferences gt Network gt a IP Address and select Automatically b Available Networks and select the network Ensure that Preferences gt Remote Access gt Web Server is set to Enabled On the smartphone 4 Open MP Field App 5 Tap 4 to open the Instruments screen 6 Tap your analyzer s serial number to connect Please note For subsequent uses MP Field App should
322. otations in the same way as in the Logging module please see 11 The Result Selector first item in the third line of the Status Field determines whether results from the 7otal Logged Logged 100 ms or Report measurement are displayed If you need to display data from another day of the measurement then use Explorer to select and open the project from that day CHAPTER 12 Enhanced Logging Optional Module 192 12 3 1 The Profile Tab The Profile tab displays a profile of a logged broadband parameter dB versus time See Fig 12 1 Fig 12 1 ENHANCED LOGGING Profile view in Enhanced Logging 12 3 2 Displaying Noise Indicators The den and Ldn parameters are displayed in the Broadband tab when selecting 7ota in the Result Selector Then select the Noise Indicators from the Leg parameter group See Fig 12 2 Fig 12 2 ENHANCED Noise Indicators LAF MM Lden 60 1 Lday 62 2 dB Levening 58 3 dB Lnight 54 0 dB Ldn 59 3 dB Start Time 10 11 2005 11 35 02 Spectrum Broadband x 8 12 3 3 Saving and Recalling Results Measurements are saved and can be viewed later in the same way as described for the Sound Level Meter Project in Chapter 3 and Chapter 6 140 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Chapter 13 Signal Recording Option Signal Recording Option BZ 7226 allows you to record the input signal typically sound in either 16 bit or 24 bit resolution during measurement
323. ote Setting Low Frequency to Very Low for sound measurements requires use of the low frequency microphones possibly together with Low Frequency Adaptor UC 0211 These combinations ensure that the measurements fulfil the 1 1 octave and 1 3 octave filter standards however please consult Table C 5 to see how the combinations influence the dynamic range of your measurement 6 Set Broadband excl Peak Broadband Peak and Spectrum Weighting as required 7 Tap EJ to exit 17 5 1 Controlling the Measurement The measurement is controlled in the same way you would control a normal Sound Level Meter measurement using Start Pause Continue Back erase and Reset pushbuttons see Chapter 3 for more details Please note The low frequency settings require much longer settling times of filters and detectors for correct results The instrument automatically takes care of this and waits after you press Start for the needed settling time for the individual detectors 17 5 2 Displaying the Results The display frequency axis resolution may be adjusted by tapping the axis and selecting suitable display frequency limits Fig 17 7 Fig 17 7 Spectrum view with Low Frequency set to Very Low A 0 8 Hz 88 8 dB s 0 8 Hz 90 1 dB 0 8 4 16 63 250 ik 4k 20kA Bandwidth 1 3 octave 71 3 dB Start Time 08 08 2013 15 14 09 Spectrum g ar tel CHAPTER 17 Low Frequency Option BZ 7234 eos 17 5 3 Saving Results Me
324. ould install the software package of your preference as described in section 9 2 Br el amp Kj r recommends that you always use the latest available 2 for all hardware versions If the analyzer now functions normally define your preferred settings in the Preferences screen adjust the touch screen again and make necessary changes to Setup all accessed via the Main Menu E8 If you experience problems selecting another template or you login as another user then note which step causes the problem You might need to delete reconfigure the templates or users To delete reconfigure templates or users use Measurement Partner Suite BZ 5503 with the analyzer connected to the PC via Micro USB Cable AO 1494 G4 hardware or Mini USB Cable AO 1476 or a modem LAN connection Please consult the on line help included with the BZ 5503 software for instructions on how to configure the analyzer Re installing Software Hardware Versions 1 3 If the analyzer still does not work normally after performing the Analyzer Reset procedure then the software might need to be re installed This can be done in two ways 1 If the connection to Measurement Partner Suite BZ 5503 works with the analyzer connected to the PC using a USB cable then the software can be re installed and re configured through the USB cable Please consult the on line help included with the BZ 5503 software for instructions on how to re install software on the analyzer 2 If t
325. ound s frequency The most commonly used frequency weighting is A weighting which adjusts a signal in a way that best resembles the human ear s response at medium range levels A weighting is required for nearly all environmental and workplace noise measurements and is specified in international and national standards and guidelines All of the analyzers measurement parameters apply A or B weighting and a choice of C or Z weighting except for the measurement of peak levels where a single weighting typically C is applied In this case C weighting is used to take into account the energy present at low frequencies even when they are not particularly annoying Time weighting specifies how the SLM reacts to changes in sound pressure It is an exponential averaging of the fluctuating signal providing an easy to read value The analyzer applies Fast Slow and Impulse or F S and T time weightings which are the required weightings according to the vast majority of international and national standards and guidelines 4 2 4 2 1 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual The signal is processed through the weighting filters and the resulting sound pressure level is displayed in decibels dB referenced to 20 Pa on the analyzer s screen The sound pressure level values are updated at least once per second Assessing a fluctuating noise level means getting a value for a level that is in simple terms the
326. our analyzer 4 5 4 5 1 CHAPTER 4 Getting to Know Your Analyzer Basic Principles when using the Analyzer Navigation Principles Star Navigation Concept Jo The main principle is that all the main menus are accessible via a single tap of the stylus The Main Menu icon Fig 4 1 Colour Scheme Traffic Light Brightness Keyboard BackL ight Power Settings l Regional Settings Storage Settings Users W SETUP Input Frequency Weightings Broadband excl Peak Broadband Peak Spectrum Bandwidth Statistics Measurement Control Logged Broadband Logged Broadband 100ms Logged Spectrum Markers Output Socket Signal Quick Full Ill xo Timer Night shift State Enabled Name Nights LOGGING Start Time 29 01 0001 23 00 00 Preset Time 08 00 00 No of Starts 1 e327 forms the centre of the star navigation concept Fig 4 1 The Star navigation concept What to bring Shortcut List of telephone numbers contacts Project 010 lt ore a A Sa gt Map of area Previous measurements if any Measurement equipment access Camera K Comment 1 21 05 2010 10 44 GPS lt a 2 21 05 2010 10 45 PORSE Notei 21 05 2010 10 45 Mobile phos A Flashlight Note 2 21 05 2010 10 45 Personal sdfety equipment image1 21 05 2010 10 45 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 o K Soundrec 1 21 05 2010 10 46 Tabla wle
327. ow Low 23 2 152 dB A 0 56Hz 224kHz 0 45 Hz 22 4 kHz Frequencies Frequencies 38 4 152 dB Z 6 3 Hz 22 4 kHz 5 5 Hz 22 4 kHz 4193 Low Low 37 8 142 dB A 0 38Hz 224kHz 0 28 Hz 22 4 kHz UC 0211 Frequencies Frequencies 39 1 142 dB Z 200 V Free Field Diffuse Field 4950 Standard Free Field 16 4 140 dB A 4 3Hz 19 0kHz 3 2 Hz 20 0 kHz Prepolarized Diffuse Field 6 3 Hz 19 0 kHz 5 6 Hz 20 0 kHz 4952 Outdoor Free FieldO 20 0 141 dB A 4 3Hz 14 0kHz 3 2 Hz 14 5 kHz Prepolarized or 90 6 3 Hz 14 0 kHz 5 6 Hz 14 5 kHz Diffuse Field 4952 Outdoor Free FieldO 20 0 141 dB A 4 3Hz 14 0kHz 3 2 Hz 14 5 kHz EH 2152 Prepolarized or 90 6 3 Hz 14 0 kHz 5 6 Hz 14 5 kHz Diffuse Field 4955 A Low Noise Free Field 4 2 95 dB A 9 2 Hz 19 0 kHz 6 0 Hz 20 0 kHz 200 V Diffuse Field 9 2 Hz 19 0 kHz 7 0 Hz 20 0 kHz 4964 Low Low 16 6 140 dB A 0 6Hz 224kHz 0 47 Hz 22 4kHz Frequencies Frequency 27 3 140 db Z 6 0 Hz 22 4 kHz 5 3 Hz 22 4 kHz Prepolarized Free Field Diffuse Field Analyzer Parameters Table C 5 Cont Overview of Type 2250 70 microphones Free field 1 dB Free field 2 dB Micro Application Optimised i Frequenc Frequenc phate pp For Dynamic Range q y q y Range Range 4964 Low Low 30 0 130 dB A 0 35 Hz 22 4kHz 0 28 Hz 22 4 kHz UC 0211 Frequencies Frequency 34 7 130 db Z Prepolarize
328. paused measurement not stored e Red LED flashing quickly intermittent overload calibration failed Calibration Initial calibration is stored for comparison with later calibrations ACOUSTIC Using Sound Calibrator Type 4231 or custom calibrator The calibration process automatically detects the calibration level when Sound Calibrator Type 4231 is used ELECTRICAL Uses internally generated electrical signal combined with a typed in value of microphone sensitivity CALIBRATION HISTORY Up to 20 of the last calibrations made are listed and can be viewed on the analyzer Signal Monitoring Input signal A C or Z weighted can be monitored using an earphone headphones connected to the headphone socket Headphone Signal Input signal can be monitored using this socket with headphones earphones Gain Adjustment 60 dB to 60 dB Annotations VOICE ANNOTATIONS Voice annotations can be attached to the Reverberation Time Project to Sources to Receivers and to measurements at each Position 213 214 Playback Playback of voice annotations or signal recordings can be listened to using earphone headphones connected to the headphone socket Gain Adjustment 60 dB to 60 dB TEXT AND IMAGE ANNOTATIONS Text and image Type 2270 only annotations can be attached to the Reverberation Time Project to Sources to Receivers and to measurements at each Position GPS ANNOTATIONS A text annotation with GPS information can be attac
329. people or notes that have been partly filled in beforehand where you just have to fill in the final information on location The notes can be attached to jobs as annotations and can be copied onto projects when necessary Fig 8 9 Example notes screen NOTES What to bring List of telephone numbers contacts Map of area Previous measurements if any Measurement equipment access Camera GPS unit Duct tape Mobile phone Flashlight Personal safety equipment 1 HAREA CHAPTER 8 Advanced Use of the Analyzer Tips and Tricks When you have finished typing in your note tap J to accept the changes and save it as a text annotation See section 3 4 for more details on annotations 8 7 1 Metadata For easy and convenient use of metadata define settings for any metadata entered and displayed on the Annotations screen see section 3 4 in advance To define settings for each of the 30 metadata Ensure that you do not have any saved data displayed on the screen 1 Tap Paperclip Ifthe Paperclip i icon is not visible you have no metadata or annotations To access the Annotations screen use the navigation pushbuttons 4 T tomovethe field selector into the top right corner of the Status Field Tap Paperclip Hint Please note If you do not have any metadata defined you can create a set of default metadata to have a convenient starting point for definin
330. perclip oo 41 Parallel Measurements cceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 157 Automated Sequence 158 Parameters Analyzes inaa 283 ETATE TEE M AAEE EEE TEE N ETE 283 Password 47 96 Pasting JODS Projects cceecceeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeee 63 Pattern Evaluation c cccccccccccssseceeeesssssteeeeeeeeees 203 PAUSE ICON ernie Eaa TE PC Connection PO ICOM a aea a aada m0 E EEEE S SSA A een ee PEAK ntah ave i e a daS Peak Sound LeVEl c cceeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeees Peak Sound Level Parameters Peak Sound Levels cesccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeess Percentile Levels Largo o s1cesecseseseesetseseesenees Performing a Manual CIC Calibration 0 6 59 Periodic Report Parameters General Parameters c ccccceseeseeeeeeeees 267 Spectrum Parameters cccccceeseeeseeeeeeeees 268 Periodic Reports cccsssceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesneees 135 266 Placing the Measurement Microphone 08 14 Point ANd Shoot cccccceesseeeesseeeeees wi 19 Polarization Voltage Parameter ceeeeeeeeeee 286 Position 2ck sims tee ain eee 28 Post processing and Reporting cee eeeeeeeeees 71 Post processing ParameterS cceee 257 258 Power Consumption Power Off ieren aeei a Power Settings eeseeeeeeeeeeeeeiersesirensinensrneenens Power Settings Screen esesesesiesersrerrrerersrrernns 81 Pow
331. pes 2250 and 2270 User Manual Table A 10 Cont Level Trigger parameters Parameter Values Comment Cont Parameter Accelerometer Linear Peak Fast max Slow max Fast min Slow min aw LW KBFmax PeakW Direct Linear Peak Fast max Slow max Fast min Slow min For Logging BZ 7224 templates only t Requires license for Signal Recording BZ 7226 A 11 Triggers Table A 11 Trigger parameters APPENDIX A Setup Parameters Parameter Values Comment Signal Recording Timer Timer On Off Set to Onto periodically generate a Timer Event Please note Set Signal Recording gt Recording Control to Timer Event or All Events Timer Period 00 01 00 to 48 00 00 The signal recording is triggered with Timer Period intervals Synchronize with Clock Yes No Select Yesto synch the start of signal recordings with whole minutes or hours Select Vo if you want the first signal recording Timer Period after start Duration 00 00 01 to 24 00 00 Specifies the duration of the timer for the signal recording Please note The total time of the signal recording will be Pre recording Time Duration Post recording Time 243 244 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Table A 11 Cont Trigger parameters Parameter Values Comment Level Trigger 1 Trigger On Off Set to Onfor setting Ma
332. pes 2250 and 2270 TRANSDUCERS Transducers are described in a transducer database with information on Serial Number Nominal Sensitivity Polarization Voltage Free field Type CCLD required Capacitance and additional information The analogue hardware is set up automatically in accordance with the selected transducer CORRECTION FILTERS For Microphone Types 4189 4190 4191 4193 4193 UC 0211 4950 4952 4952 EH 2152 4955 A 4964 4964 UC 0211 and 4184 A BZ 7222 is able to correct the frequency response to compensate for sound field and accessories Sound Field Free field or diffuse field for Types 4952 and 4184 A only 0 Top reference direction and 90 Side reference direction Accessories e Types 4189 4190 4964 and 4964 UC 0211 only None Windscreen UA 1650 or Outdoor Microphone Kit UA 1404 e Types 4191 4193 4193 UC 0211 and 4955 A only None or Windscreen UA 1650 e Type 4950 only None or Windscreen UA 0237 For Accelerometer Types 4397 A 4513 4513 001 4513 002 4514 4514 001 4514 002 4533 B 4533 B 001 4533 B 002 4534 B 4534 B 001 4534 B 002 8324 8341 8344 8347 C 2647 D the lower frequency limit will be optimized to match the specifications for the accelerometer Analysis DETECTORS Parallel detectors on every measurement A or B weighted switchable Broadband detector channel with three exponential time weightings Fast Slow Impulse one linearly averaging detector
333. plates are for describing the template and will not be copied to the project when starting or saving a measurement e Ifyou delete all templates of a certain type for example the Frequency Analyzer and you want a template of this type again then you either have to open a project made with this template and save the template or you have to use Measurement Partner Suite BZ 5503 to transfer a template of this type to the analyzer 4 5 9 Locking the Pushbuttons and Display The pushbuttons and display can be locked to prevent inadvertent operation To Lock Select the Lock Keys and Screen option from the Main Menu Eq e To Unlock Press the Left Arrow pushbutton followed by the Right Arrow pushbutton then the Accept pushbutton y If you attempt to press a pushbutton or tap the screen while the analyzer is locked an information window pops up with instructions on how to unlock it 5 1 5 2 Ls Chapter 5 Calibration This chapter describes calibration including e Types of calibration e How to calibrate e Calibration history e The transducer database e How to set up a calibration reminder e Charge injection calibration CIC e Accelerometer calibration Introduction Calibration is an adjustment of your analyzer to measure and display correct values The sensitivity of the transducer as well as the response of the electronic circuitry can vary slightly over time or could be affected by environmental conditions
334. plicable Hazardous Voltage Electricity Both the apparatus and manual use this symbol when there is a risk for shock or electrocution Hot Surface This manual will use this symbol when there is a risk for burning or scolding Earth Ground Terminal The apparatus will be marked with this symbol when applicable Protective Conductor Terminal The apparatus will be marked with this symbol when applicable Ore ee gt ternating Current The apparatus will be marked ith this symbol when applicable Danger ignals an imminent hazardous situation which if ot avoided will result in death or serious injury ot avoided will result in death or serious injury Caution ignals a hazardous situation which if not voided could result in minor or moderate injury r damage to the apparatus S n Warning Signals a possibly hazardous situation which if n S a o Notice Signals a situation or practice that requires attention but does not directly result in personal injury if ignored Risks and Hazards Explosion Hazards Danger The apparatus is not designed to be used in potentially explosive environments It should not be operated in the presence of flammable liquids or gases Electrical Hazards A Warning Any adjustment maintenance and repair of the open apparatus under voltage must be avoided as far as possible and if unavoidable must be carried out only by trained service Caution Switch off all power
335. ption of smileys in section 14 5 Table The header row of the table contains from left to right The RT selector EDT T20 or T30 which determines which RT to display in the table rows below It is also linked to the main Spectrum selector and main Decay selector The Frequency selector which includes decrement and increment buttons determines the frequency of the readouts in the table rows below The frequency selector is linked to the Spectrum cursor and the frequency of the selected Decay Readout of the RT value for the current measurement before it is saved to a position Each row of the table contains from left to right A checkmark J controlling whether the position is included or excluded from the Room Average Tap it to include check or exclude uncheck the position All positions are by default included in the Room Average The position Tap it to get a drop down with two options Se ect and View Annotations Use Selectto select the position and View Annotationsto view the list of annotations for the position You can add annotations on the position from this view as described in 6 Possible annotation indicated by fi Tap it to view the list of annotations for the position The readout of the RT parameter at the frequency determined by the RT selector and Frequency selector in the table header row There might be a smiley to the right of the readout warning about the quality of the readout Tap the smiley to get mo
336. q LcegLa eq Lyeq T1 mov Lyeq 72 Mov Lceg T1 mov Lceq 72 Mov AL eq I mov AL eq I mov Lye Lyg L Vpeak LxFmax Lxsmax LYImax L YFmax L YSmax L YImax LYE min Lysmin LyImin LYFmin Lysmin Lyimin LavRQ Measurement Parameters 269 270 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Special Parameters Lyreg also called Lyzm LyIeq Lateg Lseq Larrag also called Larrns LaFTeq Aeq e SIL average of Lzeg octave band levels 500 Hz 1000 Hz 2000 Hz and 4000 Hz e PSIL average of Lzeg octave band levels 500 Hz 1000 Hz and 2000 Hz e SIL3 average of Lzeg octave band levels 1000 Hz 2000 Hz and 4000 Hz Lyeg f1 f2 sum of power values for Lyeg frequency bands from f1 Hz to f2 Hz Voltage updated at approx 5 s intervals and logged with Logging Period intervals e Trig Input Voltage requires Trigger Input is set to Voltage for Monitoring The following parameters are available per set of logged parameters Overload in e Start time common to both channels in 2 channel templates e Stop Time common to both channels in 2 channel templates e Elapsed Time excl pauses common to both channels in 2 channel templates The Statistics can be logged to calculate Percentile Levels and Std Dev per logging interval Low frequency Parameters requires Low Frequency Option BZ 7234 Leeq LG10max LG10min LGpeak These parameters require license for BZ 722
337. r 3 Type 0 C e ANSI 1 11 2004 1 1 octave Bands and 1 3 octave Bands Class O e ANSI ASA 1 11 2014 Part 1 1 1 octave Bands and 1 8 octave Bands Class 1 e ISO 140 e ISO 3382 e ISO 354 CORRECTION FILTERS For Microphone Types 4189 4190 4191 4193 4950 4952 4952 EH 2152 4955 A 4964 and 4184 A BZ 7227 is able to correct the frequency response to compensate for sound field and accessories 212 Broadband Measurements DETECTORS A and C weighted broadband detectors with F exponential time weighting Overload Detector Monitors the overload outputs of all the frequency weighted channels MEASUREMENTS Lar and Ler for Display as Numbers or Quasi analogue Bars MEASURING RANGES When using Microphone Type 4189 Dynamic Range From typical noise floor to max level for a 1 kHz pure tone signal A weighted 16 6 to 140 dB Primary Indicator Range In accordance with IEC 60651 A weighted 23 5 dB to 122 3 dB Linear Operating Range In accordance with IEC 61672 e A weighted 23 5 dB to 122 3 dB e C weighted 25 5 dB to 139 7 dB e Z weighted 30 6 dB to 139 7 dB Frequency Analysis CENTRE FREQUENCIES 1 1 oct Band Centre Frequencies 63 Hz to 8 kHz 1 8 oct Band Centre Frequencies 50 Hz to 10 kHz MEASUREMENTS Lzp spectrum for display only Lzeq Spectra sampled at 5 ms intervals MEASURING RANGES When using Microphone Type 4189 Dynamic Range From typical noise floor to max level for a pure tone signal a
338. r Manual What is a Project Template A project template contains all the common display settings and measurement setups required to perform a noise measurement The template does not contain any measurement data these data are saved as individual projects stored in job folders see section 6 1 1 The project templates covered by this manual are e Sound Level Meter included in BZ 7222 software e Frequency Analysis included in BZ 7223 software e Logging included in BZ 7224 software e Enhanced Logging included in BZ 7225 software e Reverberation Time included in BZ 7227 software Please note e Signal Recording Option BZ 7226 does not contain a specific template signal recording options are available in all templates e Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 does not contain a specific template tone assessment options are available in all templates included in BZ 7223 24 25 30 e Low Frequency Option BZ 7234 works with all the templates included in BZ 7222 23 24 25 e 2 channel Option BZ 7229 for Type 2270 enables 2 channel operation for all 2 channel templates included in BZ 7222 23 24 25 28 and for Signal Recording Option BZ 7226 and Low Frequency Option BZ 7234 If you make any changes to the settings in a project template will appear next to the template name to indicate that the new settings have not been saved To save the template tap the template name at the top of the display to open the Template Exp
339. r Rear Socket Channel 1 Type 2270 only See item 11 in Fig 2 2 G1 3 analyzers or Fig 2 3 G4 analyzers This triaxial LEMO connector is used for AC or CCLD inputs to Channel 1 It can be used when analysing electrical signals from for example transducers or signal recordings Use one of the following cables e AOQ 0440 D 015 LEMO to BNC plug 1 5 m e AOQ 0727 D 010 LEMO to BNC jack 1 0 m e AQO 0701 D 030 Accelerometer cable LEMO to M3 3 0 m e AO 0702 D 030 Accelerometer cable LEMO to 10 32 UNF 3 0 m e AO 0722 D 050 Accelerometer cable LEMO to MIL C 5015 5 0 m Input Input Ch 2 or Rear Socket Channel 2 for Type 2270 See item 5 in Fig 2 2 G1 3 analyzers or Fig 2 3 G4 analyzers This triaxial LEMO connector is used for AC or CCLD inputs to Type 2250 or to Channel 2 of Type 2270 It can be used when analysing electrical signals from for example transducers or signal recordings Use one of the cables listed under Input 1 External Power See item 6 in Fig 2 2 G1 3 analyzers or Fig 2 3 G4 analyzers The analyzer is powered by an internal rechargeable battery pack An indication of available charge is shown by the battery icon at the bottom of the screen If the charge remaining is low or empty the batteries can be recharged by connecting Mains Power Supply ZG 0426 to the Ext Power socket When the power supply lead is connected the icon will be displayed in place of the battery icon A Warning Do not
340. r Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual B 2 Periodic Reports Microphone Input B 2 1 For Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 Parameters measured within a Periodic Report interval Equivalent Continuous Sound Levels Leq Lieg Leeg laeg Ly eq T1 mov max Ly eq T2 Mov max Lceg T1 mov max Lceg T2 mov max ALeg T mov max ALeg T mov max Sound Exposure Level Lx Le Peak Sound Level e L Vpeak Ipeak Maximum Time weighted Sound Levels e L yFmax Lysmax L ymax e L YFmax e L YSmax e L YImax Minimum Time weighted Sound Levels LXFmin Lysmin LyImin Lyfmin Lysmin Lyimin Measurement Parameters ISO EU Occupational Health Parameters e e e E Dose ProjDose VPeaks gt xxx dB VPeaks gt 137 dB VPeaks gt 135 dB US Occupational Health Parameters e e e LavRQ TWA TWA DoseRQ ProjDoseRQ General Parameters e e Overload in Start time common to both channels in 2 channel templates Stop Time common to both channels in 2 channel templates Elapsed Time excl pauses common to both channels in 2 channel templates Special Parameters e e Lyteq also called Lyzm LyIeq Lateg LAeq LaFTeq also called Larrms LaF Teq La eq SIL average of Lzeg octave band levels 500 Hz 1000 Hz 2000 Hz and 4000 Hz PSIL average of Lzeg octave band levels 500 Hz 1000 Hz and 2000 Hz SIL3 average of Lzeg oct
341. r flat surface Ensure that the calibrator fits snugly on the microphone 5 Switch on the calibrator Wait a few seconds the level to stabilize 6 Tap Start to start the calibration P Please note Detecting level appears on the screen as feedback 7 While the analyzer is searching for the calibration signal and the signal level is stabilizing the traffic light indicates a short green flash every second When the level is stable the traffic light indicates a steady green and the signal is measured and used for calibration Once the calibration has been completed successfully the traffic light indicates a short yellow flash every 5 seconds The Sensitivity is automatically calculated and displayed in a pop up together with the deviation from the last calibration Tap Yes to accept and use the new sensitivity and save it in the calibration history Tap Noto disregard the new calibration and continue with the old calibration If the calibration deviates more than 1 5 dB from the initial calibration microphones only then the calibration is stopped without changing the calibration of the analyzer The traffic light will indicate a fast flashing red and an error description will appear in the status field Hint Ifthe microphone is separated from the analyzer using a microphone extension cable then place the analyzer so it can be seen from the location of the microphone Start the calibration process select the Calibration sc
342. r setup Earphone Socket See item 2 in Fig 2 2 G1 3 analyzers or Fig 2 3 G4 analyzers Connect a set of headphones earphones using a 3 5 mm minijack earphone socket for reviewing recorded comments or for monitoring the measured sound Use the supplied earphones HT 0015 Output See item 3 in Fig 2 2 G1 3 analyzers or Fig 2 3 G4 analyzers This triaxial LEMO connector is used to output the conditioned input signal for monitoring purposes or to output the generator signal Use cable AO 0440 D 015 LEMO to BNC Trigger and Tacho Input See item 4 in Fig 2 2 G1 3 analyzers or Fig 2 3 G4 analyzers This triaxial LEMO connector is used for the external trigger input or start stop signals to the analyzer or for monitoring an external voltage Using BZ 7222 BZ 7223 BZ 7224 or BZ 7225 software you can control signal recording this requires a license for the BZ 7226 option If you want to start and stop the recording using an external device connect it to this input See details in Appendix A Using FFT Analysis Software BZ 7230 this triaxial LEMO connector can also be used for speed measurements with Tacho Probe MM 0360 or other external tachometer signal To connect a tacho probe use one of the following cables e AOQ 0440 D 015 LEMO to BNC plug 1 5 m e AQ 0727 D 010 LEMO to BNC jack 1 0 m e AOQ 0726 D 030 LEMO to SMB 3 0 m recommended with MM 0360 CHAPTER 2 11 Assembling your Analyzer Input 1 o
343. r the new project name Projects are saved in folders which are called jobs on your analyzer These are similar to folders in the Microsoft Windows filing system Jobs can be created 6 1 2 In the internal memory On a Secure Digital SD card On a USB memory stick G4 analyzers only On a CompactFlash CF card G1 3 analyzers only Navigating in Jobs A results browser called Explorer is used to navigate through the jobs and projects To view all jobs and projects tap Main Menu Eq gt Explorer or tap the project name on the Measurement screen A screen similar to Fig 6 1 will appear Fig 6 1 The Explorer screen Internal Disk jl job 01 uploaded dB Project 001 19 05 2015 11 43 0 8 The example in Fig 6 1 displays a list of jobs and then some projects that have not been stored under a job name The topmost line in the status area Jnterna Disk in Fig 6 1 shows the location in the memory The next line in the status area contains four icons for navigation 6 2 CHAPTER 6 63 Data Management Tap E to go up one level in the job levels The top level is the Memory level where physical memory devices can be selected You can select e With G1 3 analyzers nternal Disk SD Card if a card is inserted in the SD slot CF Card if a card is inserted in the CF slot e With G4 analyzers Internal Disk SD Card B if a card is inserted in the bottom SD slot SD Card T if a
344. rage Signal Recording requires e SD Card All hardware versions e CF Card G1 3 e USB Memory Stick G4 RECORDED SIGNAL A B C or Z weighted signal from the measurement transducer AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL The average level of the signal is kept within a 40 dB range or the gain can be fixed SAMPLING RATE AND PRE RECORDING The signal is buffered for the pre recording of the signal This allows the beginning of events to be recorded even if they are only detected later Sampling Rate kHz 8 16 24 48 Maximum G1 3 110 50 30 10 Pre recording s 16 bit G4 470 230 150 70 Maximum G1 3 70 30 16 3 Pre recording s 24 bit G4 310 150 96 43 Memory KB s 16 bit 16 32 48 96 Memory KB s 24 bit 24 48 72 144 PLAYBACK Playback of signal recordings can be listened to using the earphone headphones connected to the headphone socket RECORDING FORMAT The recording format is either 24 or 16 bit wave files extension WAV attached to the data in the project easily played back afterwards on a PC using BZ 5503 Type 7820 or 7825 Calibration information is stored in the WAV file allowing BZ 5503 and PULSE to analyse the recordings Functions with BZ 7222 and BZ 7223 Manual Control of Recording Recording can be manually started and stopped during a measurement using a pushbutton or an external signal Automatic Control of Recording Start of recording when measurement
345. range Set Resolution to 76 bit to cover up to 96 dB from Peak Recording Level and down Please note e You will only be warned about overload in the recorded signal if Automatic Gain Control is Onor if Resolution is 24 bit or if Peak Recording Level is set to its maximum value e 24 bit recording not possible in BZ 7227 Peak Recording Level 145 dB 135 dB 125 dB 115 dB 105 dB 95 dB 85 dB 75 dB For Automatic Gain Control Offand Resolution 16 bit the recorded wave file has a dynamic range of up to 96 dB When playing back on the analyzer the dynamic range of the output is approx 75 dB When playing back on a PC it might be even lower Set Peak Recording Level to fit the signal The values for Peak Recording Level take the sensitivity of the attached transducer into account The values shown in the list here are nominal values for a Type 4189 or 4190 microphone Print Monitor the Lpeak value during a trial measurement before selecting the Peak Recording Level Please note For recording in 2 channel templates the Peak Recording Level will automatically be set in accordance with Input gt Range Setting i e High Range or Low Range 250 Table A 13 Cont Signal Recording parameters Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Parameter Values Comment Pre recording Time t 0 to 470s Recording is started the Pre recording Time before the trigger conditions are f
346. rding Control set to any of the events you can limit the duration of the recording if Duration Limit is set to On In this case the recording will be at least Minimum Duration long but no longer than the Maximum Duration Use Pre recording Time and Post recording Time to specify how much extra you want to be recorded before and after the event Image Event Type 2270 only if you want to make a short recording together with capturing an image The recording will be Pre recording Time Post recording Time 1 seconds long See details in Appendix A Off if you do not want to record the signal 6 Set Recording Quality to High Medium Fair or Low in accordance with your needs Please note High quality requires more disk space than low quality details in Appendix A 7 Set Recorded Signal to either Input A B weighted Input C weighted or Input Z weighted A B weighting is determined by setting the parameter in Setup gt Frequency Settings gt Broadband excl Peak Input C weighted is suitable for recordings used afterwards to identify the sound source it contains all the audible content of the signal but reduces the low frequency noise from wind etc 8 Set Automatic Gain Control to On if you just want to listen to the signal afterwards The full 120 dB dynamic range from max input level and down will be converted to 40 dB and the signal is stored as a 16 bit wav file Set Automatic Gain Control to Off if you n
347. re detailed information about the warning CHAPTER 14 Reverberation Time Software Optional Module 161 14 3 2 Spectrum The Spectrum tab shows the reverberation time spectrum from a position or the room average reverberation time or both The sound level is displayed during measurements Fig 14 7 Spectrum tab T30 Room 500Hz 0 78s T30 500Hz 0 78s 1 5 1 0 0 0 y 2k 3 15k 100 250 500 ik T20 Room 100 Hz 2 kHz T20 100 Hz 2 kHz Status Field The Status Field on the Spectrum tab is the same as on the Overview tab Spectrum Graph The Spectrum graph is the same as in the Frequency Analysis software Two 1 1 octave or 1 3 octave spectra superimposed with cursor readouts The displayed frequency range is automatically adjusted for the measured frequency range Small smileys are set below each frequency band with a potential problem The smileys are also available at the cursor readouts Tap the smiley at the cursor readout to get detailed information about the warning The Spectrum Parameter selectors above the graph selects which spectra to display You can choose to display 720 Pos 730 Pos EDT Pos 720 730o0r EDT If you only want one graph you can set the other to Off In addition to choosing which parameter to display you can choose to Display Sound Level this will display the Z weighted spectrum LZF together with the A and C weighted broadband levels see Fig 14 8 When displaying LZF you ca
348. re for single channeltemplates For 2 channel templates Type 2270 only most of the values are available for both Ch 1 and Ch 2 Table A 7 Cont Logged Broadband parameters APPENDIX A Setup Parameters Parameter Values Comment Cont Parameter 1 to Parameter 10 Trig Input Voltage Wind Dir avg Wind Dir min Wind Dir max Wind Speed avg Wind Speed min Wind Speed max Amb Temperature Amb Humidity Amb Pressure Amb Rain Gauge Accelerometer Linear Peak Fast max Slow max Fast min Slow min Linear f1 f2 Overload Trig Input Voltage aw LW aWCrest MTW KBFmax KBFTm PeakW Linear Peak Fast max Slow max Fast min Slow min Linear f1 f2 Overload Trig Input Voltage For Logging BZ 7224 and Enhanced Logging BZ 7225 templates only 237 238 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual A 8 Logged Spectrum Table A 8 Logged Spectrum parameters Parameter Values Comment Full Spectral Statistics Yes Determines whether the full spectral statistics are logged or not No Spectrum Parameters All Determines whether A spectrum parameters are logged a Se ected part of the parameters are logged Selected up to 3 parameters or None are logged None Spectrum 1 to Spectrum 3 Microphone LXeq LXFmax LXSmMax LXFmin LXSmin Off Accelerometer Linear aW Fast max Slow max Fast min Slow min Off Direct
349. re saved in separate projects for every 24 hr of logging at a user defined time of day Automatic reboot and resume of operation in case of power failure TRIGGERS Signal Recording Timer For periodically starting a signal recording license for BZ 7226 required Level Triggers Markers can be set and signal recordings can be started license for BZ 7226 required when a broadband or frequency band level is above or below a specified level Hold off time between triggers can be set You can specify up to four independent Level Triggers to be active at four different times during the day Calibration CHARGE INJECTION CALIBRATION CIC Injects an internally generated electrical signal in parallel with the microphone diaphragm A manual CIC can be performed whenever there is no measurement in progress An automatic CIC can be performed at the start and end of a logging measurement The CIC can be set to occur up to 4 times in each 24 hour period CIC Duration 10 s Notifications Alarm Conditions in addition to those specified for BZ 7224 LAeq for the latest Report Period exceeds a set threshold CHAPTER 18 Specifications Software Specifications Signal Recording Option BZ 7226 Signal Recording Option BZ 7226 is enabled with a separate license It works with all the software for Type 2250 2270 Sound Level Meter Frequency Analysis Logging Software Enhanced Logging Software and Reverberation Time Software For data sto
350. reen and tap the _ Start button on the screen then go to the microphone and fit the calibrator onto the microphone switch on the calibrator and monitor the traffic light on the analyzer as discussed previously 8 Once you have completed the calibration tap the button and remove the calibrator It will automatically switch off after a few seconds 5 3 2 Calibration Settings To view the calibration details select the Details tab on the Calibration screen Fig 5 2 54 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Fig 5 2 CALIBRATION Calibration details Mount ca screen Serer he f Calib Time 07 11 2013 21 59 43 Sensitivity Ch 1 5 12 mV Pa Deviation from last 1 53 dB Deviation from initial 0 00 dB Transducer 4964 UC 0211 0 Max Input High Range 132 6 dB Max Input Low Range 130 6 dB Calibration History gt Calibrator Custom Calibration level 124 00 dB Calibrator Serial No Calibr Remind E r 22 43 36 This screen displays the following information e Details of the last calibration date sensitivity deviation from last calibration and deviation from initial calibration e The connected transducer type and serial number Please note You select a new transducer by tapping Main Menu gt Setup gt Input e Max Input Levet The maximum sinusoidal input level to be measured without overload indication A Calibration History link which is provided to enable you to view a histo
351. reen to see whether you have a license to run this module To access the About screen tap the Help icon eg then tap About See Chapter 9 for instructions on installing licenses 12 1 Setting up the Analyzer 1 Select the ENHANCED LOGGING project template section 3 2 1 for more details on templates The project template is displayed on the black banner at the top of the screen 2 Depending on your memory device Insert an SD memory card in a SD card slot at the bottom of the analyzer Ifyou have G1 3 analyzers you can insert a CF memory card in the CF card slot at the bottom of the analyzer With G4 analyzers you can use a USB Type A stick at the bottom of the analyzer You will be notified that a memory card has been inserted select Yesto change the default measurement path to the memory card Please note You cannot log data on the internal disk 3 Tap Main Menu gt Explorer Create a job folder for the measurements and set the default measurement job path as described in Chapter 6 4 Main Menu gt Setup Set up the measurement as described for Logging in Chapter 11 steps 4 to 12 5 Under the Measurement Control parameters Set the Save Project Data at Continuous Logging and Report Period as required Select whether or not you want to save the Full Spectral Statistics for Reports CHAPTER 12 Enhanced Logging Optional Module Please note All other measured broadband and spectral parameters are logg
352. rement If a GPS receiver is connected via USB when you press the Save amp pushbutton then the GPS note is automatically created with the position Remove the GPS receiver after usage to save power Fig 3 11 Example of a GPS note Position 55 816730N 12 532855E Altitude 16 6 Position error 12 1 If you do not have a GPS receiver but know the position for example from your smartphone you can manually key in the position in the GPS note 28 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual A GPS note starts with Position and includes the latitude and longitude For manual entries please enter the latitude and longitude in one of the following formats Degrees DD ddddddY DD ddddddx Example 55 816730N 12 532855E Degrees Minutes DD MM mmmmY DD MM mmmmxX Example 55 49 0038N 12 31 9713E Degrees Minutes Seconds DD MM SS sssY DD MM SS SSSX Example 55 49 0 288N 12 31 58 278E where X EorWand Y NorS If you use degrees only then you can use instead of N S and E W example 43 08011N 79 071007W 43 08011 79 071007 You can use instead of space between latitude and longitude The GPS note can be used by Measurement Partner Suite MPS BZ 5503 to locate the measurement on Google Maps Image Metadata Type 2270 only This can also be done before during or after saving the measurement by tapping Main Menu gt Add Image to Current Measurement The Viewfinder displa
353. requency weighting and Fast time weighting It is the lowest level of environmental noise occurring during the measurement time time resolution is 1 s 313 314 LAF90 0 LA90 0 LAF SPL LAFTeq LavUQ LCpeak LCpeak 1s Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual The noise level exceeded for 90 of the measurement period with A frequency weighting and Fast time weighting The level is based on statistical analysis of a parameter LAF or LAS sampled at 10 msintervals into 0 2 dB wide classes The percentage is user definable An analysis of the statistical distributions of sound levels is a useful tool when assessing noise The analysis not only provides useful information about the variability of noise levels but is also prominent in many standards as the basis for assessing background noise For example Largg is used as an indicator of background noise levels while Lari or Lars are sometimes used to indicate the level of noise events The noise level exceeded for 90 of the measurement period with A frequency weighting The level is based on statistical analysis of Laeg sampled at 1 s intervals into 0 2 dB wide classes The percentage is user definable The Sound Pressure Level maximum time weighted sound level during the latest second is available at any time A denotes that the A frequency weighting is used F denotes that the Fast time weighting is used Taktmaximal Mittelungspegel as defin
354. rial number Then enter the issued pin code here The instrument needs Internet access to log in OK Cancel 5 Click the Devices tile CHAPTER 6 Data Management 7 6 Click Create new and enter the analyzer s serial number located just above the tripod mounting thread see section 2 2 Also enter a comment for example a reference to the analyzer s primary user or location 7 Click the Create button 8 You will be prompted to Confirm device invitation and will be provided with a pin code 9 On the analyzer tap OK and enter the pin code when prompted 10 Tap OK on the analyzer and click Refresh on the Web browser 6 4 2 Managing MP Cloud on the Analyzer When you log in to MP Cloud a Cloud folder and Uploaded folder will automatically be created on all attached memory devices Internal Disk SD cards CF card and USB memory stick The Cloud folder will be Cloud FY when logged in to an account Upload to MP Cloud To upload data to MP Cloud move or copy the data into the Cloud folder All data in the Cloud folder will automatically be uploaded to MP Cloud when connected to the Internet Please note In the event of a lost connection the upload will resume when the connection is re established 68 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual The Cloud Icon The icon will change depending on the status of the connection and upload Logged out of MP Cloud EF Logg
355. rker 3 Level when the Trigger parameter fulfils the Level Trigger conditions see below The conditions are checked every second Signal Recording can also be controlled by these settings see Setup gt Signal Recording gt Recording Control Start Time 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 Start Time defines when the level trigger is enabled Triggering is limited to the enabled time Stop Time 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 Stop Time defines when the level trigger is disabled Triggering is limited to the enabled time Hold Off 00 00 00 to 01 00 00 Hold Off specifies a time after a level trigger where level triggering is disabled Can be useful in reducing the number of triggers Start Slope Rising Falling Set to Rising to start when level goes above Start Level and then stop when level goes below Stop Level Set to Falling to start when level goes below Start Level and stop when level goes above Stop Level Start Level 100 to 200 dB Start trigger conditions are fulfilled when level crosses Start Level in accordance with Start Slope for at least Start Duration seconds set Start Level here Start Duration 0 to 420 s Start trigger conditions are fulfilled when level crosses Start Level in accordance with Start Slope for at least Start Duration seconds set Start Duration here The Start Duration will be limited by the internal recording buffer size and the Recording Quality and Resolution
356. rom DynDNS com it then gets the updated IP address You need to make an account at DynDNS com specifying a user name and a password for the account and a hostname for example MyBK2250 dyndns org identifying your analyzer In the analyzer you need to specify the Hostname Username and Passwordand set Activeto Yes in Preferences under Modem DynDNS settings Each time the analyzer detects a change in the IP address it notifies DynDNS com Please note To avoid too much traffic at DynDNS com the analyzer ensures that this service does not allow updates of settings more frequently than every 10 minutes So you may experience up to a 10 minute wait for DynDNS settings to update 8 3 Network Settings The analyzer can be connected to a Local Area Network LAN through an Ethernet cable or to a Wi Fi network using equipment conforming to the IEEE 802 11a b g n standard This connection can be used to synchronize measurement and setup data with a host PC using BZ 5503 The analyzer supports Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP This requires the analyzer to have a unique address on the network This address is called an IP address and consists of four sets of 3 digit numbers for example 010 116 121 016 The IP address can be obtained in different ways e Automatically e Using DHCP A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP Server on the network assigns automatically an IP address to the analyzer when connected to t
357. rom the main spectrum only available for Reverberation Time Software only One Parameter wrap for displaying values from the main spectrum only but with the columns wrapped on the display to allow as many values as possible on the screen Fig 10 5 Spectrum Table Spectrum table Freq LZFmax 500 Hz 79 7 d8 70 7 dB 630 Hz 80 8 d8 71 5 dB 800 Hz 80 7 d8 70 6 dB 1 kHz 81 6dB 69 9 dB 1 25 kHz 81 8 d8 70 7 dB 1 6 kHz 81 9dB 70 2 dB gt 2kHz 81 0 d8 68 8 dB 2 5 kHz 79 5d8 67 8 d8 3 15 kHz 79 5dB 67 1 dB 4 kHz 77 4d8 65 2 dB 5 kHz 75 2dB 63 9 dB 6 3 kHz 73 7dB 62 2 dB 8 kHz 71 8dB 60 0 dB 10 kHz 69 7 d8 57 4 dB 12 5 kHz 66 6 d8 55 7 dB 16 kHz 61 5dB 51 1 dB 20 kHz 59 3dB 48 2 dB 8 To exit the Spectrum Table tap the J icon 9 Auto Zoom and Auto Scale automatically close the drop down menu otherwise select C ose tap outside the drop down list or use the Left arrow pushbutton to close the menu Hint A quick way of auto zooming is to tap anywhere in the spectrum and then press the Accept x pushbutton twice Please note Save the template if you want to use the display settings for other measurements Some parameters are calculated based on the spectra SIL PSIL SIL3 and Lyeq f1 f2 are calculated during the measurement and saved together with the other measurement data e The Noise Parameters NC NR RC NCB Loudness and Loudness Level are for display only and calculated based on measured Lxeq spectra T
358. rom version 3 Google Chrome from version 2 e Apple Safari from version 4 You may also be able to connect to the analyzer using Internet browsers on smartphones such as an iPhone 8 5 1 Password Protection Connection to the analyzer is password protected There are two levels of protection e Guest for viewing only e Administrator for viewing and controlling the analyzer CHAPTER 8 97 Advanced Use of the Analyzer Tips and Tricks User Name and Password Under Preferences set User Name and Password individually for the Guest and for Administrator accounts You need to specify User Name and Password for the Administrator however you can specify whether a guest requires a login or not 8 6 Connecting to Weather Stations and GPS Receivers 8 6 1 Weather Stations The analyzer can be connected to the following weather stations e Weather Station MM 0316 for measurement of wind speed and wind direction e Weather Station MM 0256 for measurement of wind speed wind direction ambient temperature ambient pressure relative humidity and rainfall A weather station can be connected to the analyzer using USB Adaptor ZH 0698 For Noise Monitoring Terminal Type 3639 A B and C details on how to mount and connect the weather station using Utility Unit ZH 0689 or ZH 0705 please refer to Noise Monitoring Terminal Type 3639 A B and C User Manual BE 1818 When you have connected the Weather Station yo
359. rs requires Low Frequency Option BZ 7234 L610 LGpeak 1s Voltage updated at approx 5 s intervals common to both channels in 2 channel templates e Trig Input Voltage requires Trigger Input is set to Voltage for Monitoring Instantaneous Weather Data common to both channels in 2 channel templates e Wind Dir Wind Speed Instantaneous GPS Data common to both channels in 2 channel templates e Latitude e Longitude Instantaneous Measured Spectra Lw Lws These parameters require license for BZ 7223 and measurement of spectra B 5 1 B 6 B 6 1 Measurement Parameters Processed Parameters for Display Only Microphone Input The following general parameter is available for display for Total data Time Remaining for the current measurement taking available disk space into account The following ISO EU Occupational Health Parameters are calculated and displayed for Total Periodic Reports and Logged data Lepd Lepav If Statistics are available then Std Dev and 7 percentile levels can be calculated and displayed LXN1 or LXUN1 to LXN7 or LXUN7 If spectral statistics are available then 7 percentile levels as spectra can be calculated and displayed LWUN1 to LWUN7 If Lweg spectrum is available then NC NC Decisive Band NR NR Decisive Band RC RC Classification NCB NCB Classification can be calculated and displayed If Lweq1 3 octave spectrum is available then Loudness and Loudness Level can
360. rt as when measuring using the SLM template because this will measure the decays at a single position within the Project anew project is initiated by selecting a new project template or the same again This will create a new project 14 2 5 Serial Measurements If you have made a measurement using the Interrupted Noise method and at some frequencies you have not been able to get a sufficient signal to noise ratio This problem may show up at frequencies where the background noise has been too high The frequencies will then be marked with red smileys see Table 14 1 To solve this lower the background noise which might not be possible or increase the power of the loudspeaker in the source room If your loudspeaker already produces as much noise as possible you can limit the frequency range of the noise to cover just a single frequency band while keeping the output power constant thus increasing the noise level in the smaller frequency range For a 1 3 octave band this will increase the noise level at the band by up to 10 dB To select the frequency bands to be measured using noise limited to cover these bands only 158 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 1 Tap Main Menu gt Setup gt Measurement Control gt Measurement Mode and select Serial 2 On the Spectrum display select the bands you want to measure using the cursor and tap on the x axis to select the band for serial measurement Fig 14 5
361. ry of transducer and calibration settings see below The calibration settings can be adjusted as follows e Calibrator select between Type 4231 and a custom calibrator e Calibration Levet Enter the specific level of your custom calibrator If you are using Type 4231 calibrator level is automatically detected shown as Auto detect Please note The Auto detect setting enables the automatic detection of the calibration level For free field microphone types like Types 4189 and 4190 the calibration level from Sound Calibrator Type 4231 is either 93 85 dB or 113 85 dB For diffuse or pressure field types the calibration level is either 94 dB or 114 dB The calibration process automatically determines the correct level e Calibrator Serial Number Type in the serial number for your calibrator The calibrator will be documented in the calibration history CHAPTER 5 55 Calibration 5 4 Calibration History To view calibration history tap Calibration History gt on the Calibration Details screen Fig 5 2 The analyzer saves the last 20 calibrations plus initial calibration which can be viewed on the Calibration History screen Fig 5 3 Tap EJ to return to the calibration details screen tap EJ again to return to the Measurement screen Fig 5 3 Calibration History screen CALIBRATION HISTORY Date Deviation 15 11 2006 11 24 0 00 dB 26 10 2006 10 15 1 14 dB Time 26 10 2006 10 15 32 Sensitivity 50 00 m
362. s gt BB Peak NNN is the PeaksOver Level Please note Two other peak counters are preset to count peaks over 135 dB and 137 dB respectively 253 254 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 Table A 16 Occupational Health parameters User Manual Comment Parameter Values Exchange Rate for Lav 4dB 5 dB 6 dB The increase in noise level that corresponds to a doubling of the noise level is determined by Exchange Rate for Lav Set Exchange Rate for Lav as required by your local standards Used for calculation of LavUQ TWA TWA DoseUQ ProjDoseUQ U Time Weighting for Lav F or S Q Exchange Rate for Lav 4 5 or 6 dB Please note TWA and TWA require U Sand Q 5 Time Weighting for Lav F Lay will be time weighted in accordance with this parameter Used for calculation of LavUQ TWA TWA DoseUQ ProjDoseUQ U Time Weighting for Lav F or S Q Exchange Rate for Lav 4 5 or 6 dB Please note TWA and TWA require V Sand Q 5 Not available for Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 A 17 Generator Table A 17 Generator parameters APPENDIX A Setup Parameters Parameter Values Comment Generator Type Internal External Set to Interna to use the internal noise generator as specified below Set to Externa to switch an external generator on off using a logic signal On 4 5 V Off 0 V The generator signal appears at the Outpu
363. sacercevectvestenvensebcaveepereterees 106 Metadata wie Metadata Tab oo cece cee cesses eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeenaes 65 Micro USB srona ae e 8 Microphone Extension Cable ssinrnaniiarnrieairinin anann 9 Measurement sssssesserssierisreerrrsrenernsenaerurinernneaans 5 Mounting is Secondary s csrratin avuivatiencta reiii ahaa 5 Type 4189 0 eeceeseseeeseeseeeeeeseeseeseeeaeeeeseaeteeeeeteas 9 Type 4 TII 291 Microphone Extension Cable Connecting eean N a 16 Microphone for Commentary seeeeeeeeee 5 Microphone Holder UA 1317 17 Microphone Input 0 ee cece ecee eee eeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 9 Microphone Type Parameter ss 285 Microphones Connecting Two Microphones s 16 Overview for Type 2250 2270 290 Mid Frequency Range 173 Mini USB 000 eeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeesaeeeeeaeeaeenaes 7 Minijack Earphone Socket 10 Minimum Time weighted parameters c ee 33 Minimum Time weighted Sound Level Parameters 0600 263 266 269 Minimum Time weighted Sound Levels Capin eea an MM 0256 cceceeseeseeecceeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeaeeneesaeseeeeaeeaeees MM2031 6 innit cen niece arent Mobile Phone Connection Per Modem SettingS isinisi anii Modems RS 232 Interface 88 SOttingS puppen 86 TOSTO sessessccsesescsseesseeseceseseesesesesetceoeensenssaetesees 86 INDEX 327 Mounting Analyze kesa ithe a raati 15 Measurement Microphone 15 Microphone cece cece
364. same way you would control a normal Sound Level Meter measurement using Start Pause Continue Back erase and Reset pushbuttons see Chapter 3 for more details Please note e Thelow frequency settings require much longer settling times of filters and detectors for correct results The instrument automatically takes care of this and waits after you press Start for the needed settling time for the individual detectors You cannot start a measurement with G weighting without using one of the low frequency microphones 196 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 17 2 2 Displaying the Results Tap on the broadband result readouts to select parameters from the Low Frequency or the Lpeak group to select the G weighted results Fig 17 3 Fig 17 3 FREQUENCY ANALYZER Selection of Low Frequency broadband readout results LAF 30 50 Please note If you use the FREQUENCY ANALYZER template you will also have the parameter LXeq f1 f2 X A B C Z Gand F1 bottom freq and F2 top freq of the frequency bands in the spectrum By using G weighting of the spectrum you would for example be able to readout the parameter LGeq 5 Hz 20 Hz in cases where that needs to be reported 17 3 Building Vibration Measurements This section describes how to measure Building Vibration parameters Building Vibration parameters are measured using Wm or Wmb filters Fig 17 4 Gain dB CHAPTER 17 Low Frequency Opti
365. saved at this position Results from the measurements at the receiver positions are displayed in the boxes at the receiver positions determined by the parameter and frequency selector in the headline of the map Fig 14 15 Example display showing a measurement in progress The example in Fig 14 15 shows the state when four measurements have been made and saved and the position at S1R3 is selected ready for the next measurement Note the small smileys at some of the receiver positions you can tap them and get more detailed information You can attach text or commentaries at source or receiver positions by selecting View Annotations Fig 14 13 and add new annotations as described in 6 Note the two small paperclips at S1 and R2 they indicate annotations at these positions 168 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Tap Mapjust above the Add Source Fig and Add Receiver ijicons and select 7ab eto display the measurements in a table see Fig 14 16 The table contains the same information as the table described in the previous section when measuring without position management Fig 14 6 Fig 14 16 REVERBERATION TIME Map based measurements displayed in a table T30 lt 100 Hz S1R1 S2R1 sir2 s2R2 Spectrum Decay ad 18 02 10 Please note You can move the data from one position to another Tap a position you want to move and select Cutfrom the drop down then tap the position where you w
366. scecessosecssbossssseceessecnssessdssssesssosedecbabadsastessseseededesdasseses 183 16 1 Connecting TranSAUCe ls innri nre oeni eee a eaaa aae et E r aaar son Raia 183 Underrange Overload i iien aosan ra eiae taas aet aoaea krop tlapak aetan 185 16 2 Setting Up 2 channel Sound Level Meter ccccccccccccsssssssesecececseseaeeecceeseeeaeeececesssaeeeeeesees 185 Controlling the M aSUrEMENE cccccccccsessssesecececsesesaeseeeesceesesaeseeeescceseaesececesseeaeseeseseeegees 186 Displaying the RESUItS isu ureien a e aa i sadecesasdvsuckacecossdosbesbe ese ee 186 SWT A AE T AR EEE E A E EEE A E E N 187 16 3 Setting Up 2 channel Frequency AnalyZe r ccccccccccecsessssscecccecsessseseeeceeseesaesecesesseaeeeeeeeees 187 Controlling the Measurement cccccccccsessssscecececseseeaeseeececeeseeeeseeeesceeeaeseeecesseseeaeeeeseseeesees 187 Displaying the R es ltSi eie iesirea aii E aa i Eei E EAE R E aiei 188 SeS A AN AE E AENEA E E ET E EN 189 16 4 Setting Up 2 channel Logging and Enhanced Logging ccccccccsssssscceeesesseceeececessesseeeeeeees 189 Controlling the Measurement oneee oei E E E a E Ei a T 190 Displaying the Res ltSis aeinn iiie tai e i i aa iei E i E aiaia 190 TAT A E E E EEE EEA 190 16 5 Setting Up 2 channel Signal Recording s ssssssseeesssssssssrsessssesrrerressesrrrsessesrrereessssreereeseseee 190 xii Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual CHAPTER 17 Low Frequency Option
367. server Table D 8 Cont Network settings Preferences Parameter Values Comment Name Up to 32 characters Name SSID of network you want to connect to Update the name either by entering aname directly or by tapping on the Available Networks and selecting a name from the list Security Open Select security as required by the network Shared Open and Shared are for WEP Wired Equivalent WPA PSK Privacy Infrastructure mode WPA2 PSK WPA PSK is for WPA Wi Fi Protected Access with Pre shared Key also called Personal mode WPA2 PSK NPA2 is an enhanced version of WPA Please note G1 3 only automatically set for G4 Encryption None Select Encryption as required by the network WEP Enabled None is for Open security AES Enabl Peeled WEP Enabled is for Open and Shared security TKIP Enabled AES Enabledand TKIP Enabledare for WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK Please note G1 3 only automatically set for G4 Encryption Key Up to 32 characters Insert the encryption key required by the network The key will be displayed until you press Enter then it will be replaced by Please note G1 3 only automatically set for G4 301 302 D 9 Table D 9 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Measurement Partner Cloud Settings MP Cloud settings Parameter Values Comment Account Logged in Logged out Select Logged into log in to your cloud account T
368. sessment can also be found by tapping on the Broadband tab and browsing in a similar way 179 180 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Fig 15 10 Changing the information shown in the value panel 15 4 Logging Software BZ 7224 Template The results from the tone assessment can be found in the Spectrum tab of the Logging template Tone assessment is performed for each logging period as well as for the total measurement time Fig 15 11 Fig 15 11 Viewing results on the logging template 102 See Chapter 11 for more information about setting up a Logging measurement 15 5 Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 Template The tone parameter can be shown for both the logging and the report periods in the Spectrum tab of the Enhanced Logging template Fig 15 12 CHAPTER 15 Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 1 3 octave Method Fig 15 12 Viewing results on the enhanced logging template 63 k 250 1 12 5 See Chapter 12 for more information about setting up a Logging measurement 15 6 Status Codes Smileys When 7one is selected on the tone parameter panel the list of status codes is updated Tap a smiley to get an explanation of the status code and for a tip on how to remedy or improve the settings on the analyzer see an example in Fig 15 13 Fig 15 13 Example of a status code explanation If you have selected 1 1 octave an Accelerometer as transducer or a Directinput tone asse
369. settings G Wm and Wmb are available for Low Frequency Extended or Very Low Direct Requires Low Frequency Option BZ 7234 Linear Bandwidth 1 1 octave Bandwidth of frequency analysis 1 3 octave Bottom F for Special Leq 0 8 Hz to 1 1 octave 1 Hz 16 kHz Top Frequency 1 3 octave 0 8 Hz 20 kHz Please note The lower limit of the parameter depends on Low Frequency Top Freq for Special Leq Bottom Frequency to 20 kHz 1 1 octave 1 Hz 16 kHz 1 3 octave 0 8 Hz 20 kHz k H Not available in Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 Requires Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 Requires Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 or Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 For BZ 7223 BZ 7224 and BZ 7225 only Bottom F for Special Legis f1 in the parameter LXeq f1 f2 Top F for Special Leq is f2 in the parameter LXeq f1 f2 APPENDIX A Setup Parameters A 3 Statistics Table A 3 Statistics parameters available for microphone input only Parameter Values Comment Broadband Statistics based on Lyeg The broadband statistics are based on sampling the i broadband parameter Lyf or xs each 10 ms or Lxeq each XF second Lxs Please note X frequency weighting A or B A requires that the Broadband excl Peak parameter is set to AC or AZ B requires that the Broadband excl Peak parameter is set to BC or BZ Spectral Statistics based on LXF The statistics
370. shbutton Exclude Marker or when the level of a specific parameter exceeds a certain level or you can record the signal through the whole measurement depending on the Signal Recording setting on the Setup screen details in Chapter 12 11 3 Displaying the Results The Logging Measurement screen or Profile tab includes three tabs at the bottom Profile Spectrum and Broadband tabs the Logging SLM includes the tabs Profile Broadband and XL View The tabs allow you to choose different ways of displaying the measurement results All but the Profile tab have been covered previously in Chapters 3 and 10 however a quick recap is provided below The Broadband tab shows an instantaneous Lar readout with associated bar graph and a number of measurement parameters The first measurement parameter is displayed in a larger font size for better readability Requires License for Signal Recording Software BZ 7226 128 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual The XL View tab increases the size of the first parameter readout to a 4 digit full screen display including decimal point The Spectrum tab shows two different spectra parameters being measured simultaneously 11 3 1 The Profile Tab The Profile tab displays a profile of a logged broadband parameter dB versus time This is very convenient when marking sound categories on line or annotating the measurement Fig 11 3 Fig 11 3 Profile tab showing extended
371. sing the Manual Event pushbutton t during the measurement and to limit the duration of the recording if Duration Limit is set to On In this case the recording will be at least Minimum Duration long but no longer than the Maximum Duration Use Pre recording Time and Post recording Time to specify how much extra you want to be recorded before and after the event External Event if you want to start and stop the recording using an external trigger signal connected to the Trigger Input See details in Appendix A Image Event Type 2270 only if you want to make a short recording together with capturing an image The recording will be Pre recording Time Post recording Time 1 second long See details in Table A 13 Off if you do not want to record the signal 6 Set Recording Quality to High Medium Fair or Low in accordance with your needs Please note High quality requires more disk space than low quality details in Appendix A 7 Set Recorded Signal to either Input A B weighted Input C weighted or Input Z weighted A B weighting is determined by setting the parameter in Main Menu gt Setup gt Frequency Settings gt Broadband excl Peak Input C weighted is suitable for recordings used afterwards to identify the sound source it contains all the audible content of the signal but reduces the low frequency noise from wind etc 8 Set Automatic Gain Control to On if you just want to listen to the signal afterwards T
372. sion cable and push gently until it snaps into position 3 Insert the male plug of the extension cable into the top socket of the hand held analyzer see item 17 in Fig 2 1 and push gently until it snaps into position Connecting Two Microphones Type 2270 only To connect two microphones to a Type 2270 Please note Youwillneed Dual 10 pole Adaptor JP 1041 two extension cables AO 0697 D 0303 mlong or AO 0697 D 100 10 m long and two Preamplifiers and two Microphones 1 Gently screw the Microphones onto Preamplifiers ZC 0032 see items 1 and 2 in Analyzer Components Fig 2 1 2 Insert the preamplifiers into the female plugs of the extension cables and push gently until into position CHAPTER 2 17 Assembling your Analyzer 3 Insert the male plugs of the extension cables into the female plugs of the dual 10 pole adaptor and push gently until they snap into position Please note Channel 1 is tagged CH 1 and Channel 2 is tagged CH 2 on the dual 10 pole adaptor 4 Insert the male plug of the dual 10 pole adaptor into the top socket of Type 2270 see item 17 in Fig 2 1 and push gently until it snaps into position Mounting the Measurement Microphone on the Microphone Holder and Tripod To mount the microphone and preamplifier combination onto Microphone Holder UA 1317 and Small Tripod UA 0801 1 Set Small Tripod UA 0801 in the required position and adjust to the required height 2 Screw Microphone Holder UA 1317 onto
373. smileys are shown on e all readouts of reverberation time results e onthe Position selector as the sum of all quality indicators from each frequency band onthe Room project as the sum of all quality indicators from each frequency band in the Room reverberation time spectrum The explanation is shown if you tap a smiley except on the small smileys below the frequency bands in the spectrum select the frequency band with the cursor and tap the smiley in the cursor readout 14 6 Saving and Recalling Results Measurements are saved at position numbers for example Pos 1 or Source Receiver relations for example S1R2 within the project This means there are more measurements stored in the Reverberation Time projects than the Sound Level Meter Frequency Analyzer or Logging projects which all contain only one measurement within each project To opena saved project tap Main Menu gt Explorer and tap the project s icon then you can view all the measured data and even continue measuring at new positions Chapter 15 Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 1 3 octave Method Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 includes tone assessment according to selected methods The software module includes an FFT based as well as a 1 3 octave based method It allows assessment of tones on site The result of the tone assessment is the adjustment to be added to the Lye as described in the relevant standards for calculating ratin
374. spectrum and decays Fig 14 2 Typical RT measurement setup using a loudspeaker source CHAPTER 14 Reverberation Time Software Optional Module DIRAC MP3 Player s gt s9 ZE 0948 110009 Fig 14 3 Typical RT measurement cycle for the interrupted noise method dB Sound Level Escape Time l Time lamala l Build up About 1s He Decay time lt Decay measurement Generator On l lt 060208 Fig 14 3 shows a typical RT measurement cycle automatically performed by the analyzer where the different steps are described as follows 1 After Start there is a chosen Escape Time which allows for vacating the measurement site 2 The noise generator is then switched on and waits for the chosen Build up time to allow for a steady state to be reached 3 The decay measurement starts The level for the first second or so labelled About 1s on Fig 14 3 is used to identify the excitation sound level as the 0 dB reference level 4 The noise generator is switched off and the Decay time starts 5 The decay measurement ends when only the background noise level is measured automatically detected by the analyzer 153 154 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 6 Steps 2 to 5 are automatically repeated a chosen number of times and the measured decays are averaged together to reduce t
375. sseesssesesereeeeteeeesenseeeeoreees Built in Help s cicc dcessiessccesctesecticceseseasseesesceseretirecratecess B weighting BZ 6 298 erian ay air AE BZ 5503 28 36 50 65 70 87 89 103 106 111 123 141 149 171 BZ 5503 A Logging Post processing Tools 71 BZ 5503 B Spectrum Post processing Tools BZ 7222 sities whateva apa eatin eaten BZ 7222 Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7223 Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7224 Logging Software eeeeeeeee 1 34 123 BZ 7225 Enhanced Logging Software 1 34 135 BZ 7226 Signal Recording Option 1 34 141 BZ 7227 Reverberation Time Software 1 35 151 BZ 7229 2 channel Option 1 35 103 183 214 219 BZ 7230 FFT Analysis Software ceseeeseeeeeeees 171 BZ 7231 Tone Assessment Option 1 35 171 Cc Calculating the Level Difference Between One Band and the Adjacent Bands 0 173 Calibration isanne ttie aneen idi aidais Accredited o ACOUSTIC S Saoer enaa sane Tek edesnradntscnadaacustlednedd Electrical emiren asina Filter HIStOFY vecienisccivercnteaveiecs dakian diia History Parameter ccecceseeeeeeeeseeeneeeneees 287 Initial oe Manual cis ces sses tea ccavscoservedivens che inadeiccietaladadeacesaivtend 52 Regular Recalibration ccceeeeeeesseeeeeeees 113 O EL 2h2ieteecd Becciveserciccasvevs T 39 eae A A 53 Standard ices nine e aa
376. ssment will be performed but a smiley will be displayed When you tap the smiley it will advise you to use a Microphone For an overview of all the remedies associated to the various smileys please refer to Table 15 1 181 182 Table 15 1 Overview of smileys and associated remedies Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual range Smiley Colour Explanation Remedy Tip for Solution E Red No tone assessment on 1 1 There is no method for assessing tones when the octaves spectrum is analysed in 1 1 octave bands select 1 3 octave instead EA Red Analysis on Accelerometer The analysis is carried out on an accelerometer input select a microphone E Red Spectrum must be LzFmin When Italian Law is selected the analysed spectrum must be LzfFmin E Red No tone assessment on inst It is not possible to make tone assessments on parameters instantaneous parameters Fast or Slow S Yellow Analysis on Direct The analysis is carried out on a Direct input select a microphone 5 Yellow Setup different from ISO standard The ISO is selected and the measurement setup deviates from the proposals in the ISO standard 5 Yellow Min or Max spectrum When the ISO standard is selected the analyzed spectrum should be Leq 5 Yellow Tone freq outside proposed ISO In the ISO standard the defined frequency range for range tone assessment is from 25 Hz to 10 kHz A tone is detected outs
377. such as temperature and humidity While you are unlikely to ever experience a large drift or change in sensitivity with the analyzer it is nevertheless good practice to perform regular calibrations normally before and after each set of measurements Often calibration is required by measurement standards such as IEC 61672 1 Calibration Types Acoustic Calibration Acoustic calibration is the preferred calibration method particularly when standards and regulations require calibration before a measurement The method involves applying an acoustic signal of known magnitude and frequency to the microphone which calibrates all the analyzer s components microphone preamplifier and electrical circuitry Electrical Calibration To calibrate the Direct input use a stable sinusoidal voltage at a frequency between 150 Hz and 10 kHz The procedure is very similar to the Standard Calibration procedure for sound calibration described above however without the transducer mounting procedure 5 3 5 3 1 Fig 5 1 Calibration screen Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Manual Calibration If no calibrator is available or a known amplification is introduced for example by analysing a tape recorded signal then you can type the sensitivity directly into the Sensitivity field The analyzer will be regarded as uncalibrated and the text Unca will appear in the status field Charge Injection Calibration You
378. t admin Password Character string Define the password required for full access to the web page and for access from BZ 5503 MPS and Type 2250 2270 SDK The password will be displayed until you press Enter then it will be replaced by RR Default admin Guest Login Required Yes No Set to Yes to require user name and password for login to the guest web page Set to Nofor free access to the guest web page Guest User Name Character string Define the user name required for limited access to the web page that is view of the analyzer only Default guest Preferences Table D 11 Remote access settings Parameter Values Comment Guest Password Character string Define the password required for limited access to the web page The password will be displayed until you press Enter then it will be replaced by Default guest Please note The remote access parameters are common to all users of the analyzer D 12 Image Settings Type 2270 only Table D 12 Parameter Values Comment Image Control View Finder Set to View Finder to use the Viewfinder together with the Manual Event Manual Event pushbutton to capture an image The image can then be saved or rejected after capture Set to Manua Eventto capture and save the image each time you press the Manual Event pushbutton D 13 NMT Server Settings Hardware Version 4 only For setup of
379. t 1 kHz 18 octave 1 1 to 140 dB Linear Operating Range In accordance with IEC 61260 1 octave lt 20 5 dB to 140 dB Internal Generator Built in pseudo random noise generator Spectrum Selectable Pink or White Crest Factor e Pink noise 4 4 13 dB e White noise 3 6 11 dB Bandwidth Follows measurement frequency range e Lower Limit 50 Hz 1 8 oct or 63 Hz oct e Upper Limit 10 kHz 1 3 oct or 8 kHz oct Output Level Independent of bandwidth e Max 1 Vims 0 dB e Gain Adjustment 60 to 0 dB When bandwidth is changed the level for all bands is automatically adjusted to comply with the set output level Correction Filters for Sound Sources Type 4292 Type 4295 and Type 4296 Flat or Optimum Turn on Time and Turn off Time Equivalent to RT 70 ms Repetition Period 175 s Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Output Connector Output Socket Control See Measurement Control External Generator Selectable as alternative to internal generator For controlling external noise generator Levels O V Generator off 4 5 V Generator on Rise time and Fall time 10 us Control See Measurement Control Reverberation Time EDT T20 and T30 in octave or 1 3 octave bands Decays Measured and stored using averaging time of 5 ms Evaluation Range 0 to 10 dB for EDT 5 to 25 dB for T20 and 5 to 35 dB for T30 Measurement Time Automatic selection of measurement time for the de
380. t Explanation Description or y No decay end found The end of the decay cannot be determined N 5 because it doesn t end in the background noise Background noise too high Background noise is above the upper y evaluation point t E No decay start found No decay start found y Background noise too high Background noise is above the lower ci evaluation point T Max Decay Time too short The lower evaluation point is beyond the decay time z No decay found The slope of the decay is positive that is the reverberation time is negative P amp Reverberation time too short Less than 2 points in Evaluation Range o E Excitation sound level too high Overload Reverberation time too short BxT below 16 B filter bandwidth and T F amp reverberation time of detector required by ISO 3382 R 5 T20 used T30 unavailable T20 used T30 unavailable n High background noise Background noise too close to level at lower E evaluation point 169 170 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Quality r Indicat smile Explanation Description or y p E Short reverberation time Less than 4 points in Evaluation Range Decay is bent The difference between T20 and T30 is E greater than 10 Recommended quality indicator from ISO 3382 2 Annex B k Decay is non linear Correlation coefficient in linear regression is too low The quality indicators first column are shown in the spectrum table only The
381. t Socket Please note e For Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 set Measurement Control gt Excitation Interrupted Noise to enable the generator parameters e For Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 set Output Socket Signal gt Source Generatorto enable the generator parameters Noise Type Pink White The type of noise from the internal generator The bandwidth of the noise will be adjusted to the frequency range from Bottom Frequency to Top Frequency Level re 1 V 60 0 to 0 0 dB This sets the internal noise generator attenuation in dB referenced to 1 V This level stays at the set level irrespective of the frequency range Sound Source Unknown Type 4292 Optimum Type 4295 Optimum Type 4296 Optimum Type 4292 Flat Type 4295 Flat Type 4296 Flat This setting optimises the frequency response of the internal generator output to the connected sound source The Flat setting optimises the output fora flat power response the Optimum setting optimises the power difference between adjacent 1 1 or 1 3 octave bands while maintaining a boost at low frequencies Select a type matching your sound source OmniPower Sound Source Type 4292 or 4296 or OmniSource Sound Source Type 4295 Select Unknownif you are using another sound source or don t want to correct the frequency response 255 256 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Table A 17
382. t home 227004 Type2270 gt By dehy Lp Bage Took Briel amp Kj r We help our customers improve the quality of sound and vibration and related human comfort Downloads Service Help Yor Q Downloading picture http b Internet Protected Mode Off R10 78 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 79 Chapter 8 Advanced Use of the Analyzer Tips and Tricks 8 1 Setting your Preferences on the Analyzer You can specify a number of parameters controlling display settings power settings regional settings storage settings and users These parameters are grouped together under Preferences You access preferences by tapping Main Menu E gt Preferences from the list of options The screen shown in Fig 8 1 will appear Fig 8 1 PREFERENCES R The Preferences screens Display A Power Regional Users and Projects Headphones Remote Access Network MP Cloud Notifications Modem DynDNS NMT Server Printers CEN 8 1 1 Display Tap Display or next to Display to expand the list of available display settings Fig 8 2 These parameters allow you to select a suitable display colour scheme This may vary depending on the lighting conditions at the time of the measurement Fig 8 2 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual PREFERENCES Display screen Digiy O 8 1 2 Traffic Light Brightness Normal Keyboard BackLight o
383. t home 227004 Type2270 Windows Internet Explorer provided by Bruel amp Kjaer S amp V sfou GU le http bkflemmingathome dyndns org display 4 x Google Pe File Edit View Favorites Tools Help X k C Flemming at home 227004 Type2270 gt om vi Pege v G Tools v Briiel amp Kj r We help our customers improve the quality of sound and vibration and related human comfort Downloads Service Help Downloading picture http b Internet Protected Mode Off 100 v The analyzer can be viewed by several people at the same time however the response time will increase with the number of connected browsers The View and Control Instrument Web Page Fig 7 5 shows the View and Control Instrument Web page where you have an online display and keyboard for full control of the analyzer The online display can be used for monitoring the measurement The keyboard on the screen has the same functions as the analyzer s keyboard Click on the display with the cursor to control the analyzer as you do when tapping on the analyzer display CHAPTER 7 77 Connection to PC or Smartphone or Measurement Partner Field App ji A a a a a aY Fig 7 5 Flemming at home 227004 Type2270 Windows Internet Explorer provided by Bruel amp Kjaer S amp V Online display and Cw http bkflemmingathome dyndns org display 44 X Google P keyboard for full _ control of the analyzer GEC Flemming a
384. t is you select DM 16 03 1998 then you have accepted the default setup for that standard and the only parameter you can change is the 7S0 226 parameter Select one of the diffuse or free field contour options available from the parameter drop down which appears when you tap the parameter For more details and for information on how to set up individual tone assessment parameters see the following section 175 176 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 15 2 2 Setting up a Measurement Manually ISO 1996 2 Annex D When tone assessment according to ISO 1996 2 Annex D is selected you can set the division between the Low and Middle frequency range the division between the Middle and High frequency range and also the limits for the level differences between adjacent bands see Fig 15 5 You can also refer to Fig 15 1 for a definition of the frequency ranges and level differences Fig 15 5 Left Setting the Low Freq Last Band parameter Right Setting the Level Difference Low parameter You set the division between the Low Middle frequency range by selecting the required value for the Last or highest Bandin the Low frequency range from 12 5 Hzto 315 Hz and set the division between the Middle High frequency range by selecting the required value for the Zast or highest Band in the Middle frequency range from 160 Hz to 20 kHz The ISO method does not state which frequency weighting shou
385. t the bottom of the screen allows you to view the complete list of setup parameters while the Quick tab allows you to access the more frequently used parameters defined by yourself When you have finished viewing or updating the parameters tap J to return to the Measurement screen Changes made to the setup will only be applied temporarily that is until you select another project template or open another project to reuse the setup from that project However if you want the setup changes to be saved in the current template select the Template Explorer option from the Main Menu Eq and tap the Save icon E Hint If you make changes to the setup that you do not want to keep and you have not yet saved the template you can undo them by selecting the template again from the Project Template Bar at the top of the screen CHAPTER 4 39 Getting to Know Your Analyzer Preferences The Preferences screen is accessed from the Main Menu E and gives you access to the analyzer s preferences if Multi User is disabled or your own preferences if Multi User is enabled These include things such as regional settings appearance of the screen power management user profiles and language You can change these as required see section 4 5 6 For more information refer to section 8 1 When you have finished viewing or updating the parameters tap E to return to the Measurement screen Transducers The Transducers screen is accessed from the Main
386. t the following compact flash LAN and WLAN cards e 10 100 Ethernet Ruggedized CF Card from Socket Mobile www socketmobile com Briiel amp Kjaer order number UL 1016 GoWi Fi P500 CF WLAN rev Band rev C from Socket Mobile Briiel amp Kjaer order number UL 1019 Parameters in Network Settings Location Use the Location parameter to specify a text up to 20 character long identifying the analyzer or location of the analyzer The Location will be displayed on the PC as well as the serial number of the analyzer when browsing for analyzers in BZ 5503 and when connected using the online display Hint The Location parameter is useful for both USB and LAN connections CHAPTER 8 91 Advanced Use of the Analyzer Tips and Tricks Network Connection e Gl 3 analyzers Type 2250 None default CF Socket Select this to use an Ethernet CF Card in the Compact Flash socket Type 2270 LAN Socket default Select this to connect via a LAN cable This is disabled if an Ethernet CF card is inserted in the Compact Flash socket CF Socket Select this to use an Ethernet CF Card in the Compact Flash socket e G4 analyzers for all analyzer types LAN Socket default Select this to connect via a LAN cable LAN settings are hidden if a Wi Fi Dongle or an SD WLAN card is inserted SD Socket Automatically set when an SD WLAN card is in the SD card slot WiFi Dongle Automatically set when USB Wi Fi Dongl
387. ta listed above the following can be inserted in a project annotation as a GPS Note common to both channels in 2 channel templates e e Position as Latitude and Longitude Altitude Position error dependant on type of GPS unit These parameters require a license for BZ 7223 and spectra measurement Measurement Parameters B 6 2 Periodic Reports Accelerometer or Direct input For Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 Parameters measured within a Periodic Report interval Linear Averaged Levels e Linear Peak Levels Peak R T Peak Maximum Time weighted Levels Fast max e Slow max Minimum Time weighted Levels Fast min e Slow min General Parameters Overload in e Start time common to both channels in 2 channel templates e Stop Time common to both channels in 2 channel templates e Elapsed Time excl pauses common to both channels in 2 channel templates Special Parameters e Linear f1 f2 sum of power values for Linear frequency bands from f1 Hz to f2 Hz Low Frequency Parameters requires low frequency option BZ 7234 and accelerometer input aW e aWoest MTW KBF may KBFry Peaky These parameters require a license for BZ 7223 and spectra measurement 275 276 B 6 3 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Spectrum Parametersa e Linear or aW requires low frequency option BZ 7234 and accelerometer input Fast max Slow max
388. tap the Ka icon at the top of the display Software and Hardware Versions Once in the help system you can access the list of installed software versions and licenses together with information about the hardware This information is always available and is accessed by selecting About from the top of the display What is Measurement Partner Suite BZ 5503 Measurement Partner Suite BZ 5503 comes standard with your hand held analyzer and provides data archive preview and export capabilities as well as software maintenance and remote online display In addition to the included standard configuration valuable data analysis and post processing functionality is available in an expanding suite of optional application modules The software enables you to do the following e Setup or control the analyzer from a PC e Retrieve data from the analyzer e Manage and archive data from the analyzer e Manage archives in Measurement Partner MP Cloud e Merge MP Field App annotations with the corresponding analyzer in the project e View data in archives e Update the software in the analyzer e Install licenses for use of software modules in the analyzer e Remotely view online displays e Post process data optional e Export to other post processing and documentation tools like Evaluator Type 7820 or Microsoft Excel or Word Measurement Partner Suite BZ 5503 is supplied on the Environmental Software DVD BZ 5298 which is included with y
389. te Select the template you want to use for the measurement Please note Reverberation Time templates are not available for timer control e Start Time Set the start time at least 3 minutes ahead of current time e Preset Time Set the preset time for the measurement regardless of the settings in the template used by the timer e Stop Time The time when the measurement stops for information only e No of Starts Set to the total number of times you want to start the measurement Start Every The time interval between the start of each successive measurement This interval must be greater than Preset Time 3 minutes e User The user who specified the timer Cannot be changed Please note When using timers for automatic measurements ensure the meter is connected toa stable power supply It is advised to set the Ext Power switch to Charge battery only see section 8 1 2 9 1 9 2 9 2 1 Chapter 9 Updating and Upgrading Applications Maintenance Calibration and Troubleshooting How to Install New Applications Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 Frequency Analysis Software BZ 7223 Logging Software BZ 7224 Enhanced Logging Software BZ 7225 Signal Recording Option BZ 7226 Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 Building Acoustics Software BZ 7228 FFT Software BZ 7230 Tone Assessment Option BZ 7231 Noise Monitoring Software BZ 7232 and Low Frequency Option BZ 7234 are pre installed on Types 2250 and 2270 In addition
390. ted into the preamplifier through the applicable input device This makes the underrange indication a dubious indicator of the quality of the measurement especially on the more sensitive ranges Example 1 Und A Immediate underrange for the A weighted levels Example 2 U1 AC Immediate underrange in channel 1 for the A and C weighted levels Frequency weighting as defined in ISO 8041 2005 used for whole body vibration in buildings all directions The band limiting part of the W filter Zero frequency weighting is without any frequency weighting that is equivalent to Linear LIN or FLAT Index 321 Symbols CPeaks gt 1400B ceeceeceeseseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 316 Numerics 1 1 or 1 3 octave Frequency Analysis 00 115 1 3 octave Method 0 eee cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeaeenees 171 264 72D EEA E E AT 286 2 channel Option BZ 7229 seese 183 AIBA siii ain aaa 206 211 290 A About Icon as About Menu sssssssesssesessssssrrssssrssrsssrinsessnresrnssrsrnnernnse 3 Accelerometer Icon Accept Pushbutton ssssseessseessieesrsesrresrreseerrrssrense 5 Accredited Calibration 113 Accredited Traceable Calibration 0 0 cceeee 58 Acoustic Calibration cccccceceseceseeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 51 Adaptor AO 0657 Adaptor for Standard Tripod Adaptor UC 0211 israr arai Add Image to Current Measurement wh Add New Timer ICON c
391. ternet browser To update via the Internet 1 Tap on the analyzer s screen then About to get a list of installed software and licenses 2 Scroll down to the bottom of the screen and tap the Check for updates on the web gt link the Software Update screen appears see Fig 9 land Fig 9 2 3 Click on the Check for Updates button to check for the latest updates This will connect to the Br el amp Kj r update server If a new software version is available the build version will be displayed and you can decline or start the update you will be warned if the new version requires a new license If the versions that are available are not later than those already installed you will be told so and the update will be terminated 4 If you choose to update the analyzer the software will start downloading to the SD or CF card G1 3 analyzers already inserted in the analyzer You need at least 200 MB of free space on the memory card Depending on the speed and quality of the Internet connection this can take from a few minutes to several hours If the connection is lost then the download will automatically continue when connection is established again Please note The analyzer can continue measuring during the download period 5 When download is complete the measurement is paused and normal use of the analyzer is prevented Connections to the analyzer are terminated and the upgrade of the analyzer will start This will take 10 1
392. th measurements in accordance with various standards OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration 29 CFR 1910 95 MSHA Mine Safety and Health Administration 30 CFR 62 0 UMHRPEL DOD Department of Defence DoD Instruction 6055 12 ACGIH American Conference of Government Industrial Hygienists DHHS Pub 98 126 ISO UK Noise at Work Regulations SI 1989 1790 amended by SI 1992 2966 and SI 1996 341 See the table below but please also check your local legislation Maximum peak of the acceleration signal or voltage input with frequency weighting Linear Maximum peak of the acceleration value with frequency weighting Wm or Wmb Reference Time is used for calculation of Sound Exposure Level Lep a v or Time Weighed Average TWA with a reference time other than 8 hours 317 318 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual RC RC Classification SIL PSIL SIL3 Slow Max Slow Min The Room Criterion Mark II is primarily a diagnostic tool for HVAC noise in spaces The RC curve is chosen as the value of the PSIL rounded to the nearest integer in the range 25 lt RC lt 50 The RC classification is the combination of the Sound Quality Descriptor and the Probable Occupant Evaluation The sound quality descriptor can display the values N for neutral where no frequency range is dominant LF for rumble where the low frequency range 16 63 Hz is dominant MF for roar where the mid frequency r
393. the CF card slot at the bottom of the analyzer With G4 analyzers you can use a USB Type A stick at the bottom of the analyzer Please note You cannot record the signal on the internal disk 3 Tap Main Menu gt Explorer Navigate to the memory card create a job folder for the measurements and set the default measurement job path as described in Chapter 6 4 Tap Main Menu FE gt Setup Set all the parameters as required for the Logging or Enhanced Logging measurement see Chapter 11 or Chapter 12 respectively 5 Under Signal Recording you can specify the Recording Control parameters as follows Automatic if you want to start the recording when you start the measurement and stop when you pause the measurement and to limit the recording to Maximum Duration if Duration Limit is set to On Manual Event if you want to start and stop the recording using the Manual Event pushbutton during the measurement Exclude Event if you want to start and stop the recording using the Back erase pushbutton n during the measurement External Event if you want to start and stop the recording using an external trigger signal connected to the Trigger Input Level Event if you want to start and stop the recording based on the level trigger settings during the measurement All Events if you want to start and stop the recording based on any of the events CHAPTER 13 Signal Recording Option Please note When Reco
394. the stylus and selecting other parameters from the drop down lists that appear Hint The tabs at the bottom of the screen allow you to choose different ways of displaying the measurement results The Broadband tab shows an instantaneous Lap readout with associated bar graph and four measurement parameters followed by two measurement setup parameters The first parameter is displayed in a larger font size for better readability Fig 3 4 The XL View tab increases the size of the first parameter readout to a four digit full screen display including decimal point CHAPTER 3 23 Making your First Measurement 6 Set Measurement Mode to Automaticand choose a preset time for your measurement Then repeat steps 3 and 4 The measurement will automatically pause after the preset time This allows you to either save your measurement or continue measuring as required 7 Tap Main Menu Eq gt Setup Fig 3 5 Fig 3 5 SOUND LEVEL METER Main Menu options Change the broadband weighting parameters by tapping on the FF next to Frequency Settings then on the weighting parameter field on the right side of the screen A weighting drop down menu will appear Fig 3 6 Change the parameters as required Fig 3 6 Changing the broadband frequency settings 8 Return to the bar graph screen of the SOUND LEVEL METER template by tapping E and you are ready to make a new measurement 24 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 Use
395. tness for the traffic light and whether the backlight for the pushbuttons should be on or off In addition you can also change the number of decimal places on your dB results readout Table D 1 Display settings Parameter Values Comment Colour Scheme Arcade Select between five colour schemes one optimised for Alhambra outdoor use in bright conditions and one optimised Indoor for very dark conditions Outdoor Night Traffic Light Brightness Off Low Normal High Key Backlight Off On Backlight Brightness Minimum Select backlight brightness using the backlight icon Level 2 KH at the bottom of the screen Maximum level uses Level 3 the most power Level 4 Level 5 Maximum Resolution of Readings Normal dB Number of decimal places for values displayed Normal 1 Extended 2 Extended Engineering Number of digits for values displayed Normal 3 Extended 4 Please note This setting is for display only and has no effect on the measurement precision or resolution 293 294 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual D 2 Power Settings Table D 2 Power settings Parameter Values Comment Backlight Dim After 30 sec Select optimum value for full backlight on After 1 min brightness determined by Backlight Brightness After 2 min before the backlight is dimmed if analyzer is left After 5 min untouched After 10 min Never Turn off Backlight After 1 min G1 3 analyzers only
396. to equipment before connecting or disconnecting their digital interface Failure to do so could damage the equipment Mechanical Hazards Caution Whenever it is likely that the correct function or operating safety of the apparatus has been impaired it must be made inoperative and be secured against unintended operation Waste Handling Br el amp Kj r complies with the EU s Waste Electrical A and Electronic Equipment WEEE Directive which issues the following waste handling instructions e Do not dispose of electronic equipment or batteries as unsorted municipal waste e It is your responsibility to contribute to a clean and healthy environment by using the appropriate local return and collection systems e Hazardous substances in electronic equipment or batteries may have detrimental effects on the environment and human health e The symbol shown to the left indicates that separate collection systems must be used for any discarded equipment or batteries marked with that symbol e Waste electrical and electronic equipment or batteries may be returned to your local Briel amp Kj r representative or to Bruel amp Kj r Headquarters for disposal Briel amp Kjaer has made every effort to ensure the accuracy of the information contained in this document No responsibility is accepted for any errors or omissions herein It is the responsibility of the user to ensure compliance with any legal or statutory requirements in th
397. ttings Service and Repair isese 112 Services Calibration sein a ar ea ea a iiia Filter Calibration Hardware Maintenance ee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 113 Initial Calibration ccceececceeeseeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 113 Regular Recalibration ccc eeeeeeeeeees 113 Rental fnccchecnue di aidia 114 RGD all snanar irrin iaai heaves 113 Service Agreement 113 MANNO eat eean aa cuba shyecentecasciseiteinensoas 114 330 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Set Up Enhanced Logging cceceeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeaes 136 Frequency Analyzer c ccccsceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeee 115 Generator re 116 Logging 124 New USEIs 00 v1 84 Reverberation Time 155 Sound Level Meter Project Template w 20 Tone Assessment ececeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeeteneeeees 174 TRANS GUGCM feseeerssecee essere eieks iaie ences 285 Setting up a Tone Assessment Measurement Default Setup deniers niece 177 Manually using ISO 1996 2 Annex D 176 Manually using Italian Law ee 176 Setting up the Analyzer Building Vibration eee eeeeeeeeeneeeeees 198 Settings AlaniM 4 fi indi eis Weve thie eee aie 93 DYNDNS ws cvivs aon tenideersiavauenedaeieeearent 86 Modem sisean ina eed here en a e eink 86 Setup Edit Mod 22 23 32 ee e G weighting Parameters ainis hinien ladon S tup Screenin anana naia Shortcut Bar Signal Recording
398. u can verify the connection by displaying the instantaneous updated parameters Wind Dir and Wind Speed from the Weather group Data from the weather station is automatically obtained during the measurement and saved on data see measurement parameters in Appendix B The measured data can be displayed as parameters from the Weather group Fig 8 8 Data from weather station obtained during a measurement and saved on data LLELLE LLL 20 60 4 6 80 100 120 140 Wind Speed avg 0 1 m s Wind Dir avg 17 deg Amb Temperature 23 0 C Amb Humidity 27 5 Measurement Mode Manual Preset Time 00 00 30 Spectrum CD e 8 6 2 8 7 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual GPS Receivers The analyzer can be connected to the following GPS receivers e GPS Receiver ZZ 0249 for measurement of latitude longitude altitude and position error For Noise Monitoring Terminal Type 3639 A B and C details on how to mount and connect the GPS receiver using Utility Unit ZH 0689 or ZH 0705 please refer to Noise Monitoring Terminal Type 3639 A B and C User Manual BE 1818 e ND 100S GPS USB Dongle from Globalsat www globalsat com tw for measurement of latitude longitude and altitude e BU 353 Cable GPS with USB Interface from Globalsat for measurement of latitude longitude and altitude The GPS receivers with USB interface can be connected directly to the USB port on analyzers with G4 analyzers
399. uires a GPS device connected Instantaneous Measured Parameters e Instantaneous Time weighted Sound Levels L example Lar Sound Pressure Levels max levels once per second example Lar SPL e Instantaneous Peak Sound Levels example Lcpeak 1s e Instantaneous Weather data requires a weather station connected e Instantaneous GPS data requires a GPS device connected If you measure the acceleration signal from an accelerometer then the most common used parameters are Timed Measured Parameters e Average example Linear e Peak example Peak e Time for Peak example Tpeak e Maximum Time weighted parameters example Fast max e Minimum Time weighted parameters example Slow min e GPS data requires a GPS device connected 34 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Instantaneous Measured Parameters e Instantaneous Time weighted parameters example Fast Inst e Instantaneous GPS data requires a GPS device connected The acceleration parameters can be displayed in either Engineering units m s or in dB Please note See Appendix B for a comprehensive list of all parameters Sound Level Meter Software BZ 7222 incorporates a simple user interface that is easy to learn and uses intuitive data storage and recall Comprehensive security features mean no loss of data even on accidental power off Smart features are built in for field use for example allowing you to personalise your measurements
400. ule e View whether the display of the profile during the measurement is frozen or not When the O icon is animated the display is being updated with new logged data during the measurement You can freeze the display update by tapping on the icon This also freezes the icon Tap the icon again to unfreeze the display Step forwards or backwards through the logging intervals on all displays using the and icons The icons are also connected to the profile cursor so that any corresponding movement backwards or forwards through the intervals in one display will be reproduced in the other Some interaction with the display will automatically freeze and unfreeze the display only while measuring e Tap the stylus on the profile This will set the profile cursor and freeze the display update of the profile You can move the cursor to any point in the profile by using the left and right arrow pushbuttons The profile will be scrolled automatically if necessary Unfreeze by tapping on the icon e Tap and hold the stylus on the profile display and drag it to the left or right This will freeze the display and show two cursors Next remove the stylus from the display and a drop down menu appears with the possibility of setting or editing a marker or annotation see below Select the required function from the drop down menu When the function has been carried out the profile unfreezes automatically and progresses as it did before you tapped
401. ulfilled for example 5 s means the recording will be started 5 s before you hit the Manual Event pushbutton This is possible because the recording is done continuously in an internal buffer ready to be saved as a wave file The Pre recording Time is limited by this buffer size and the Recording Quality and Resolution see details in the Specifications chapter Post recording Time t 0 to 1 00 00 00 Use this parameter to specify how much extra you want to be recorded after the trigger conditions are no longer fulfilled Duration Limit On Use this parameter to enable the Minimum Duration and Maximum Duration parameters for overruling the duration Off of the signal recording determined by the trigger condition parameters Minimum Duration t 00 00 00 to When Duration Limit is On then Minimum Duration will 1 00 00 00 determine the minimum recording time regardless of the trigger conditions The total record length will then as a minimum be the sum of Minimum Duration Pre recording Time and Post recording Time Maximum Duration t 00 00 00 to When Duration Limit is set to On then Maximum Duration 7 00 00 00 will determine the maximum recording time regardless of the trigger conditions The total record length will then as a maximum be the sum of Maximum Duration Pre recording Time and Post recording Time amp Please note If Maximum Duration 00 00 00 then it is disabled and does not limit the duration
402. umbers above 2479652 Set Trigger Input to Vo tage Leve if you want to control signal recording by a voltage level generated by external equipment The Voltage Level should generate at least 2 V for On and less than 1 V for Off The duration of the steady level should be at least 1 s so it can be recognised by the analyzer Set Trigger Input to Vo tage for Monitoring if you want to monitor the voltage at this input This setting can be used together with Notifications see section 8 4 This setting cannot be combined with MATRON Handswitch or Voltage Level Label Up to four Labels for the channels characters Leftmost is for Channel 1 default set to Ch 1 Rightmost for Channel 2 default set to Ch 2 Available in 2270 2 channel templates only Table A 1 Cont Input parameters APPENDIX A Setup Parameters Parameter Values Comment Input Top Socket Rear Socket Determines whether the input is taken from the Top socket or the Rear socket Input on connector panel Connect your transducer to this socket Please note Sound Field and Windscreen corrections can be added to both the Top Socket and the Rear Socket Input parameters However be careful that you do not add a double correction for instance if you have recorded the signal from the Output socket on a tape recorder and later want to re analyse the recording via the Rear socket In this case you should set Microphone Typ
403. ure Please note e The formatting procedure can take several minutes depending on the size of the device e The read write performance of SD and CF memory cards and USB sticks varies alot The performance depends on the manufacturer of the memory device the type of device the size of the device how much it has been used how fragmented the memory is and even the day of production of the device Two identical memory devices can have a different performance because the manufacturer has changed the internal technology without notice e The cards delivered by Briel amp Kjaer have all been tested for their read write performance in the analyzer and can be used for the applications available in the analyzer If you need more or other types of memory devices please consult your local Briiel amp Kj r representative hint In general you should select devices aimed for the industrial or professional photographer market 108 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual V Best Practice Remember to regularly re format the device especially before a long unattended measurement this will ensure the best performance of the device 8 Select Test Speed if you want to check the device s file speed 9 4 3 Battery Pack and Recalibration of Battery Charge Indicator The software keeps the capacity of the battery pack updated Over time the total capacity of the battery pack decreases If you find that the Time
404. uring short or long term monitoring you can check the calibration of the analyzer using the Charge Injection Calibration CIC facility This is done automatically during a logging measurement see section 11 2 and section 12 2 Unlike an internal calibration the Briel amp Kj r patented CIC technique enables a complete measurement chain to be verified including the microphone preamplifier cabling and analyzer Each verification measurement is compared to an initial reference measurement As the name implies the CIC method injects an internally generated charge into the microphone and preamplifier input circuit and the ratio between the measured signal and the injected signal is measured CIC Ratio Fig 5 8 CHAPTER 5 59 Calibration This method is based on the detection of changes in impedance at the input terminal It was developed for monitoring of microphone channels and requires a preamplifier with a small extremely stable built in capacitor which enables the application of an electrical signal to a preamplifier and microphone input terminal A stable CIC Ratio means a healthy system and assures stable operation of the microphone cable preamplifier and remaining measurement system Fig 5 8 Charge Injection Calibration Low leakage resistance capacitor C is set in parallel with the microphone and fed with voltage e The ratio e e is constant when g C Cm and C are constant Changes to preamplifier gain g cabl
405. used for more than Standby After time the Standby After setting will overrule the Backlight settings and the backlight will be switched off or dimmed e Please use the Display in conjunction with the Power to save power during measurements and extend the battery operating time G4 analyzers have an Ext Power setting which determines whether the analyzer automatically switches on and charges the battery when external power is applied or the battery is just charged It is recommended to select the Switch On and Charge setting for unattended measurements to ensure measurement will restart in case of power failure G1 3 analyzers have a similar function There is a small manual switch at the back of the analyzer under the battery pack To access the switch remove the battery When you have made your choices tap Power or to collapse the list Regional Tap Regional or next to Regional to expand the list of available regional settings Fig 8 5 Regional screen Display Power Decimal Point Date Separator Date Format 23 06 2015 13 59 37 Time Zone GMT 01 00 Madrid Paris Language English Keyboard US International Wind Speed Unit SI Temperature Unit SI Dimension Unit SI Vibration Unit SI Users and Projects 4 Select your preferred settings for Decimal Point and Date Separator and select your preferred Date Format date and time from the six different formats provided in the drop down Then select your T
406. ushbutton to make a normal parallel measurement and then do the serial measurements all in an automated sequence CHAPTER 14 Reverberation Time Software Optional Module 14 2 6 Annotating Projects and Positions While using the Reverberation Time Software you can annotate the Reverberation Time project using the normal method of adding annotations to a project The annotations can then be viewed by tapping on the Annotations icon or tapping Main Menu gt Explorer See section 3 4 However your project can contain a lot of measurements one per position so you can annotate any position in the project Signal recordings are automatically attached as annotations to the positions Annotations at positions are managed in the Overview display described in the next section 14 3 Displaying the Results The Reverberation Time Measurement screen includes three tabs at the bottom Overview Spectrum and Decay The tabs allow you to choose different ways of displaying the measurement results e Overview Shows the measurement positions in a table one position per row Use this to get an overview of your measurements to include exclude positions from the spatial average of all positions in the room and to manage annotations signal recordings at the positions e Spectrum Shows the reverberation spectra graphically or as a table for one position or for the room average Alternatively it can show the instantaneous sound pressure leve
407. ut screen tap the Help icon gg then tap About See Chapter 9 for instructions on installing licenses If you have purchased Type 2250 2270 together with the software application s then the relevant license s comes pre installed on the analyzer 171 172 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual If you purchased a separate software application for your Type 2250 2270 then you have to install the license on the analyzer This is done using BZ 5503 please consult the on line help included with the BZ 5503 software for instructions on how to install a license 15 1 Tone Assessment According to ISO 1996 2 Annex D When assessing noise it is generally recognised that noise containing audible pure tones is more annoying than noise with the same A weighted broadband level that does not contain audible tones When assessing noise that contains tones or narrow bands of noise an adjustment shall be added to the A weighted time averaged level Laeg The first evaluation of audible tones in noise is most often carried out by the human ear But for comparative analysis results and documentation an objective analysis may be needed Tone Assessment can be performed using the ISO 1996 2 2007 standard Determination of environmental noise levels Annex D Objective method for assessing the audibility of tones in noise Simplified method This method uses 1 3 octave measurements The selection of method depends on local leg
408. ved at the time specified in the Save Project Data at parameter in Main Menu gt Setup gt Measurement Control The next project is automatically started immediately after the first one without any data loss Please note When Preset Logging Time has elapsed or you pause the measurement then the project will not be saved automatically This has to be done manually In the case of power failure or other failures the software is rebooted automatically This means that the measurement data collected up until the time of the reboot is saved in a project anda new measurement is started The new measurement is started in a new project The projects are named as specified in Main Menu gt Preferences gt Users and Projects For example if you select Auto naming of Projects and start the measurement on the 13th of November then your projects for measuring 48 hours assuming you have started in the middle of the day and have set Save Project Data at parameter to 00 00 00 will be e 051113 001 containing data from the middle of the day November 13th until midnight 137 138 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual e 051114 001 containing data for a whole day November 14th e 051115 001 containing data from midnight to the middle of the day on November 15th If you did not select Auto naming of Projects then you would have the following projects assuming the Project Name Prefix parameter was set to Projectan
409. vity High Range Weighting Microphone Electrical Total A 14 6 dB 28 3 dB 28 5 dB B 13 4 dB 26 9dB 27 1 dB gr 13 5 dB 27 0 dB 27 2 dB Z 5 Hz 20 kHz 15 3 dB 31 2 dB 31 3 dB Z 3 Hz 20 kHz 15 3 dB 32 1dB 32 2 dB Low Range Weighting Microphone Electrical Total A 14 6 dB 12 4 dB 16 6 dB B 13 4 dB 11 5 dB 15 6 dB AC 13 5 dB 12 9dB 16 2 dB Z 5 Hz 20 kHz 15 3 dB 18 3dB 20 1 dB Z 3 Hz 20 kHz 15 3 dB 25 5dB 25 9 dB MEASURING RANGES The full level measuring range is covered in two range settings High Range for the least sensitive range and Low Range for the most sensitive range When using Microphone Type 4189 Broadband Analysis Dynamic Range From typical noise floor to max level for a 1 kHz pure tone signal A weighted e High Range 28 5 to 140 dB e Low Range 16 6 to 110 dB Primary Indicator Range In accordance with IEC 60651 A weighted e High Range 41 7 dB to 122 3 dB e Low Range 23 5 dB to 92 3 dB Linearity Range In accordance with IEC 60804 A weighted e High Range 39 6 to 140 8 dB e Low Range 21 4 to 110 8 dB Linear Operating Range In accordance with IEC 61672 e A weighted 1 kHz High Range 43 0 dB to 139 7 dB Low Range 24 8 dB to 109 7 dB e C weighted 1 kHz High Range 41 7 dB to 139 7 dB Low Range 25 5 dB to 109 7 dB e Z weighted 1 kHz High Range 45 9
410. we recommend you order accredited calibration together with the new analyzer Regular Recalibration To fulfil requirements for public measurements and to minimize the cost of errors due to faulty or inaccurate measurements we can arrange for calibration every year in an ISO 17025 certified laboratory at Briel amp Kj r With annual data you will have an unbroken history to use as reference either for internal requirements for audit required by authorities or at the request of your customers And not least you can follow the history of sensitivity for your analyzers over time Filter Calibration e You can order calibration of filters Please specify at the time of ordering e Calibration of filter response for octave and 1 3 octave filters according to IEC 61260 Service and Repair The hand held analyzer is designed and constructed to provide many years of reliable operation However if a fault occurs that impairs the analyzer s correct function then remove the battery pack and disconnect any external power supply to prevent risk of further damage For more information about preventing faults or damage to your analyzer see section 9 5 Hardware Maintenance and Repair You can minimize the risk of unexpected costs by purchasing the hardware maintenance with a five years warranty Minor repairs such as those resulting from damage caused by unauthorized use of the analyzer can be performed at the same time as the analyzer is being
411. while the timer trigger conditions are fulfilled however take Maximum and Minimum Duration into account Comments continue on next page 247 248 Table A 13 Cont Signal Recording parameters Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Parameter Values Comment Cont Set to A Events to record while any of the events above are Recording Control active however take Maximum and Minimum Duration into account If you do not want to record the input signal then set Recording Control to Off to economise on power Set to Image Event Type 2270 only to make a recording of 1 s Pre recording Time Post recording Time Please note For Reverberation Time Software BZ 7227 the values are limited to Offand Automatic Set to Automatic to make signal recordings during the measurements Recorded Channel Ch 1 Select Ch 1 or Ch 2 to record that channel or select Both to record both channels simultaneously Ch 2 Both Recording Quality Low This setup determines the quality of the recording by f adjusting the sampling rate Fair Theamountof space required for the recording will depend on Medium the selected quality see details in the Specifications chapter High Recorded Signal Microphone Use this parameter to select the frequency weighting of the Input X weighted recorded signal Input C weighted Please note ee e The frequency weighting of the recorded signal can be Input Z weighted selected ind
412. wner of such trademark Briel amp Kj r All rights reserved Briel amp Kjaer Sound amp Vibration Measurement A S DK 2850 N rum Denmark For service and support contact your nearest Bruel amp Kj r Customer Care support team Headquarters info bksv com 45 7741 2400 China Beijing 86 10 59935811 France service fr bksv com 33 1 69 90 71 02 Germany bkservice de bksv com 49 421 17 870 Italy it info bksv com 39 02 5768061 Japan info_jp bksv com 81 3 6810 3500 North amp South America bkservice bksv com 1 770 209 6907 Spain servicio tecnico bksv com 34 91 659 08 20 UK amp Ireland ukservice bksv com 44 1223 389800 Go to www bksv com contact for contact information to our other global offices Contents CHAPTER 1 INEFOGDUCTIONS siscissssccctnsss ccatssesetebvessseccbousessechushosShaveccoubensdecsadavevenceabebesscoosdbsueonsesesocsessesnonssseetes 1 Wd amp WI COM Cis cei ca tecise SR EE cea cse 8 estes 2 cde silica caekscgdavet A TE 1 1 2 How to Use this Manual fssec cs siceresleotts lostccccan bite suesceeees Lani a ea AEE A TE E Ea eRe EEEE 1 Conventions Used in this Manual ccsccccssscecesseececseneecessececeeseeeeceeaaeceseeeeceeaeeeceeaaeeesneneeeeeas 1 BOB INNMELS araon aea o auth Gath Save dace cece ya veles cet A A eesede cota onc stucdes outs Seve tecetesuusonnsh aN 2 Experienced Users of Acoustic Measurement Equipment ccccesssccecessesssceeeescess
413. xposure Time is the actual time that a person is exposed to noise during a workday Used for calculation of Lep a and Lep d v Maximum time weighted acceleration or voltage level measured with Linear frequency weighting and Fast time weighting It is the highest level occurring during the measurement time Minimum time weighted acceleration or voltage level measured with Linear frequency weighting and Fast time weighting It is the lowest level occurring during the measurement time 311 312 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual F S or I time weighting Frequency Frequency weighting G weighting KBF KBFmax KBFTm A time weighting sometimes called a time constant defines how the exponential averaging in root mean square RMS measurement is done It defines how heavily fluctuating sound pressure variations are smoothed or averaged to allow useful readings The standards define three time weightings F Fast S Slow and I Impulse Most measurements are carried out using the F time weighting which uses a 125 ms time constant The number of pressure variations per second Frequency is measured in hertz Hz The normal hearing for a healthy young person ranges from approximately 20 Hz to 20000 Hz 20 kHz Our hearing is less sensitive at very low and very high frequencies In order to account for this weighting filters can be applied when measuring sound The most commo
414. y available when running the Enhanced Logging template e For 2 channel Enh Logging the Report Threshold Level is used for Ch 1 and Report Threshold Level 2 is used for Ch 2 Table 8 2 Content of Notification Information Type Content Reason for notification Test Alarm or Status followed by a short description Time of notification Date and Time Instrument ID Serial No and Location Status of current Disk Free memory Total memory Status of Internal Battery Full High Low Critical Charging or Unknown Trigger Input Voltage if available The voltage Measurement Status if available Running Paused or Stopped No of Signal Recordings if available The number of signal recordings made since start of measurement Latest CIC Result if available Passed Background noise too high Ratio outside tolerances Ratio deviates from Ref Undefined Ref or Undefined For 2 channel measurements One CIC result per channel CHAPTER 8 95 Advanced Use of the Analyzer Tips and Tricks Current value of LAF if available The value For 2 channe measurements One CIC result per channel Report Threshold Level The value Report Level LAeq The value Please note Some of the information listed above may not be available depending on the conditions when the notification was sent for example no measurement values will be available imm
415. y will then appear showing what is coming through the camera lens The camera has fixed focus and automatically adjusts the light sensitivity you just have to position the analyzer so that the object you want to capture is visible in the viewfinder and then press the Manual Event pushbutton or tap the icon to capture the image see Fig 3 12 Fig 3 12 Viewfinder CHAPTER 3 29 Making your First Measurement When captured the image is presented as a still picture and you can save the captured image by pressing the Save amp pushbutton or by closing the Images view or you can reject the image by pressing the Back erase pushbutton Fig 3 13 Viewfinder 11 50 01 Please note When finished tap the E icon to return to the Measurement screen Tap Paperclip to see a list of all annotations in the project and tap the Camera icon i in the annotation to view the image 3 4 1 Annotation Tutorial To become more familiar with this process try the following 1 Make a new measurement see section 3 1 if unsure 2 Tap Paperclip and define or select metadata 3 Make a short written comment and attach it to the new measurement as previously described 4 Make a short spoken comment as previously described 5 Make an image as previously described for Type 2270 only 6 Tap Paperclip and check that you have three annotations select one of them to see hear the annotation 3 5 Switching Off
416. yed until you press Enter then it will be replaced by Ik SMS Active No Yes Set to Yesto activate the first phone number otherwise set to No Name Character string Name identifying first phone number Phone Number Number The number of the first SMS recipient Active No Setto Yesto activate the second phone number otherwise set Yes to No Name Character string Name identifying second phone number Phone Number Number The number of the second SMS recipient Please consult your email provider 305 306 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual D 11 Remote Access Settings Table D 11 Remote access settings Parameter Values Comment Web Server Disabled Enabled Set Web Server to Enabled to enable display and control of the analyzer on a web page see section 7 4 Set to Disabled to disable the web server functionality BZ 5503 Login Required Yes No Set to Yesto require user name and password for access to the instrument from BZ 5503 MPS or from the Type 2250 2270 SDK Set to Wo for free access to the instrument Please note If set to Yes then you require BZ 5503 version 4 1 or higher to access the instrument User Name Character string Define the user name required for full access to the web page that is view and control of the analyzer and for access from BZ 5503 MPS and Type 2250 2270 SDK Defaul
417. ylus left or right to a position outside the marker range 3 Remove the stylus from the display and a drop down menu appears 4 Select De ete for the marker you want to narrow from the drop down menu The part where the marker overlaps the gap between the two cursors will be deleted CHAPTER 11 Logging Optional Module ma To delete a marker 1 Tap and hold the stylus in the profile display at a position to the left of the marker you want to delete 2 Drag the stylus to a position to the right of the marker 3 Remove the stylus from the display and a drop down menu appears 4 Select Delete for the marker you want to delete from the drop down menu Please note Sound markers cannot be edited Marking the whole sound marker or part of it and selecting Delete will delete the whole sound marker and signal recording 11 3 4 Annotate Sound Categories You can annotate the measurement online with a spoken comment or a written note or with Type 2270 only an image The annotation is displayed as an icon below the sound profile Annotating During the Measurement The measurement parameter is displayed as a progressing profile Use of Pushbuttons Press and hold down the Commentary pushbutton and talk to the analyzer to make your comment Release the button when finished This will insert acomment annotation in the profile at the time when the button was pressed Use of Stylus Tap and hold the stylus in the profile display at
418. ypes 2250 and 2270 User Manual 2 2 Analyzer Components An overview of the main analyzer components is provided in Fig 2 1 and the text below Fig 2 1 Analyzer components 120028 CHAPTER 2 5 Assembling your Analyzer 1 Measurement Microphone A Briel amp Kj r Prepolarized Free field 2 Microphone A robust and reliable microphone with a wide frequency range 2 Preamplifier Used to convert the high impedance output of the microphone to low impedance suitable for driving long extension cables The arrow points to the preamplifier s built in windscreen sensor 3 Manual Event Pushbutton Manually indicate events during a measurement Using BZ 7222 and BZ 7223 software you can control signal recording and using BZ 7224 Logging Software or BZ 7225 Enhanced Logging Software you can insert an Event Marker and control recordings With Type 2270 this button can also be used to capture images Please note Signal recording requires a Signal Recording Option BZ 7226 license 4 Commentary Pushbutton Add recorded audio messages to your measurement files 5 4 T Navigation Pushbuttons These move the active screen component Field Selector and navigate the user interface 6 Back erase Pushbutton Erase the last 5 seconds of measurement data or insert an Exclude Marker BZ 7224 Logging Software or BZ 7225 Enhanced Logging Software only 7 v Accept Pushbutton Accept changes you make to th
419. yzer 4 Trigger and Tacho Input Socket A triaxial LEMO connector use the supplied LEMO to BNC cable AO 0440 D 015 to connect For tacho probe connection other cables may be used See Trigger Input Socket in section 2 3 3 for more information 5 Input Socket or for Type 2270 only Input Ch 2 Socket A triaxial LEMO connector depending on the transducer used a number of cables are available for connection See section 2 3 3 for more information 6 External Power Socket Use Mains Power Supply ZG 0426 to connect and charge batteries 7 Battery Charge Indicator An LED that indicates when the battery pack is being charged from external power See Battery Charge Indicator in section 2 3 3 for more information on the LED colour codes 8 Reset Button Press to reset the analyzer if you have problems 9 Secure Digital Card Slots Insert an SD or SDHC memory card to save data 10 LAN Socket Connect a LAN cable to synchronise measurement and setup data with a host PC over a LAN 11 USB A Socket Connect to Wi Fi Dongle UL 1050 printers or other external USB devices 12 Type 2270 only Input Ch 1 Socket A triaxial LEMO connector depending on the transducer used anumber of cables are available for connection See section 2 3 3 for more information 2 3 3 Description of Inputs and Outputs Top Socket See item 17 in Fig 2 1 This 10 pin LEMO connector is the main microphone input for the analyzer Microphone Type 4189
420. yzer Module for Very Low Frequencies 1 For Sound measurements Mount your low frequency microphone and low frequency adaptor on the preamplifier and connect it to the top socket section 2 5 2 The first time you use the transducer it needs to be created in the transducer database section 5 5 and calibrated section 5 3 Vibration measurements Connect the accelerometer to the rear socket Briiel amp Kjaer recommends Accelerometer Type 8344 for low level building vibration measurements If it is your first time to use the microphone it needs to be created in the transducer database see section 5 5 and calibrated see section 5 3 2 Select the 2 Ch FREQUENCY ANALYZER LOGGING or ENH LOGGING project template The project template is displayed at the top of the screen if it does not display the correct template tap the Project Template Bar at the top of the screen and select the correct template from the drop down menu See section 3 2 1 for more details on templates 199 200 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual 3 Tap Main Menu gt Setup gt Input gt Transducer and select appropriate microphone or accelerometer 4 Tap Main Menu Eq gt Setup gt Frequency Settings gt Low Frequency Option and tap On This will enable extra options for the Low Frequency parameter Frequency Analyzer module only and for the frequency weighting parameters Fig 17 2 5 Set Low Frequency to Very Low Please n
421. zer Tripod Mount Small Tripod UL 1009 or UA 0587 2250 2270 Hand held Analyzer M UA 1651 Tripod Extension for Hand held Analyzer Interface cables see list UA 0587 Tripod or UA 0801 HT 0015 Earphones AO 0440 D 015 Output Cable 1 5m Industrial Grade SD Memory Card for Hand held Analyzer BZ 5298 pe 0696 Wrist Strap Environmental KE 0440 Software CD incl Travel Bag Utility software for 2250 2270 QB 0061 ae Rechargeable Accessories Battery Pack FB 0699 uua a rasta Hinged Cover Chains for Hand held o ger Analyzer for QB 0061 Ae ge Interface Cables u 15m AO 1449 D 010 LAN Cross over Cable 1m AO 1450 LAN Cable 1 5 m AO 1476 f ZG 0426 USB Cable 1 8 m Mains Power Supply for hardware v 1 3 AO 0440 D 015 Aeae USB Cable 1 8 m ll Input Cable for hardware v 4 A0 0440 D 015 15 Trigger Input Cable 15m 040031 9 a 2 5 2 5 1 2 5 2 Hand held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 User Manual Assembling the Analyzer Charging the Battery for the First Time Battery Pack QB 0061 comes charged to approximately half capacity on initial delivery Fully charge the battery pack before assembling the analyzer for the first time Connect Mains Power Supply ZG 0426 to the external power socket It should take 8 to 10 hours On G1 3 analyzers the battery charge indicator shows a steady green l

User Manual: Hand-held Analyzer Types 2250 and

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents